JP2020199360A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine for attaining stable ball pass of a ball.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a connection member 424 that is arranged at one end of a first passage formation member 520 and a second passage formation member 422, is displaced by abutting on the other of the first passage formation member 520 and the second passage formation member 422, and connects the first passage formation member 520 and the second passage formation member 422, thus absorbing positional misalignment because of displacement of the connection member 424 interposed between ends even if positions of one end of the first passage formation member 520 and one end of the second passage formation member 422 deviate from each other.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 42

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a communication state in which one end of a first passage member and a second passage member formed so that a ball can pass is communicated with each other and a separated state in which one ends are separated from each other. ing. (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-171636

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that it is difficult to stably throw a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of stabilizing the throwing of a ball from a first passage member to a second passage member. To do.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first passage member and a second passage member formed so that a ball can pass through, and at least the first passage member is displaced, whereby the said game machine. A communication state in which one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other so that a ball can be thrown from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is the second. It is possible to form a separated state in which the first passage member and the second passage member are not communicated with each other by being separated from one end of the passage member, and at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member. A connecting member that is displaceably arranged and that communicates between one end of the first passage member and the second passage member in a state of being displaced by being in contact with the first passage member or the other of the second passage member. To be equipped.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the connecting member is arranged so as to face each other with an opening at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member. The other side wall portion is provided, the one side wall portion is located on the displacement locus of the first passage member, the first passage member is displaced, and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is When it comes into contact with one side wall of the connecting member, the connecting member is displaced so that the other side wall of the connecting member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the communication state is formed by rotating the first passage member with one end thereof as a rotation tip side, and the connecting member is the first. A rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of one passage member is provided, the first passage member is rotated, and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connection member. Then, the connecting member is rotated so that the other side wall portion of the connecting member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member.

According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to the first aspect, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 2, the throwing can be stabilized.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the upper elevating unit. It is a front view of the upper elevating unit. It is a front view of the upper elevating unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the upper elevating unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the upper elevating unit. (A) is a front view of the first gear, (b) is a rear view of the first gear, (c) is a front view of the second gear, and (d) is a second gear. It is a rear view of. It is a front view of a lifting body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a lifting body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a lifting body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a lifting body and a transmission device. It is a front perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the drive side slide member. It is a rear view of the drive side slide member. (A) is a front perspective view of the connecting member, (b) is a front view of the connecting member in the direction of arrow XXVIb of FIG. 26 (a), and (c) is an arrow of FIG. 26 (a). It is a rear view of the connecting member in the XXVIc direction view. It is a rear view of the 2nd passage forming member and the connecting member. It is a rear view of the 2nd passage forming member and the connecting member. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a side view of the liquid crystal elevating unit in the direction view of arrow XXX of FIG. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and a left swing unit. It is a front perspective view of the left swing unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of the rocking operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the swinging operation unit. It is a front view of the rocking operation unit. It is a partial front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit and the left swing unit. It is a partial front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit and the left swing unit. It is a front view of a rotating unit. It is a front perspective view of a rotating unit. It is a front view of the rotating unit in a state where a guide member is removed. It is a front perspective view of the rotating unit in a state where a guide member is removed. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating unit. It is a front view of the rotating unit in a state where a rotating member, a part of a pitching device, and a guide member are removed. It is a front schematic diagram of a guide member. (A) is a front view of the one-side rotation drive member and the other-side rotation member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the one-side rotation member and the other-side rotation member in the LIb-LIb line of FIG. 51 (a). is there. It is sectional drawing of the rotating unit cut in the plane including the rotating shaft of a central transmission member. It is a front view of a case member and a drive mechanism. (A) is a front view of the rotating member, and (b) is a side view of the rotating member in the direction of arrow LIVb of FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 54 (b) is a rear view of the rotating member in the direction of arrow LV in FIG. 54 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of the split member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the split member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a split member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the split member. (A) and (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the split member in the state of being arranged in the first section. (A) and (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the split member in a state of being arranged in the second section. It is an exploded front perspective view of a pitching device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a pitching device. It is an exploded front perspective view of an arm rotation mechanism. It is a front view of the pitching device in a state where the arm member of an arm rotation mechanism is arranged in a holding position. It is a front view of the pitching device in a state where the arm member of an arm rotation mechanism is arranged at a separated position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece appearance mechanism in a state where a holding piece is arranged in a protruding position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism in a state where a holding piece is arranged in an immersion position. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at a protruding position, and (b) is a partial enlargement of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism in the LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb line of FIG. 68 (a). It is a cross-sectional view. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at the immersion position, and (b) is a partial enlargement of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism in the LXIXb-LXIXb line of FIG. 69 (a). It is a cross-sectional view. It is a front perspective view of a guide member. It is a rear perspective view of a guide member. It is a front view of a guide member and a rotating member. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotating member in the first section, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotating member in the second section. (A) to (d) are state transition diagrams for each rotation of the one-side rotation drive member by 30 degrees. It is a state relation figure which shows the relationship between the engagement or disengagement state of one side rotation drive member and the other side rotation drive member with respect to a split member, and a phase. (A) to (c) are state transition diagrams for each unit rotation amount of the rotating member. It is a partially enlarged side view which enlarged the part in the 1st section of a rotating member. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the main body member of the tip wall member, (b) is a top view of the main body member of the tip wall member, and (c) is the line LXXIXc-LXXIXc of FIG. 79 (b). It is sectional drawing of the main body member of the tip wall member, (d) is the front view of the main body member of a tip wall member. It is a front view of the left swing unit. It is a front view of the left swing unit. It is a front view of the left swing unit. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the left swing unit and the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. (A) is a partial front view of the drive-side slide member in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a side view of the drive-side slide member in the direction of arrow LXXXIXb of FIG. 89 (a), and (c). Is a partial front view of the drive side slide member.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 88, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a ball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. .. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged in the front direction, and by sliding it in the back direction against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 54b is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one time. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time is not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and has a third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured in. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, balls to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (overhanging state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (retracted). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" ”Is easy to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (retracted state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

A second variable winning device 82a is arranged on the upper left of the first winning opening 64, and a second specific winning opening 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the second variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) so that the ball cannot win a prize in the second specific winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the second variable winning device is opened (expanded) at the time of a specific jackpot (for example, 15R probability variable jackpot), the ball is put into a special gaming state in which it is easy to win the second specific winning opening 82. Can be done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. , The left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100 and 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of a specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. 7 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIGS. 8 to 10 are front views of the operating unit 200.

In addition, in FIGS. 6 and 7, the state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged in the descending position is shown in FIG. 9, in which the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the first passage forming member of the left swing unit 500 are shown. The state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 600 is connected to the 520 is shown in FIG. 10, and the state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 600 is arranged in the raised position is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 6 to 10, a state in which the upper elevating unit 300 is arranged at the ascending position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 10, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 210 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the back case 210, an upper elevating unit 300, a liquid crystal elevating unit 400, and a left swing unit. The 500, the rotating unit 600, and the light emitting decorative member 700 are housed respectively.

The back case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 211 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side open. The bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210 is provided with a recess having a substantially circular shape in the center thereof, and the rotating unit 600 is housed in the recess. The liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged on the front side of the rotating unit 600, and the upper elevating unit 300, the left swing unit 500, and the decorative light emitting member 700 are the upper edge portion, the left side edge portion, and the lower side edge portion of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. It is arranged in each part.

The upper elevating unit 300 includes elevating bodies 330 in which a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) are arranged side by side in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 8), and the elevating bodies 330 are independently arranged in the height direction (FIG. 8). It is formed so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction (see FIGS. 12 and 13). In the state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged in the descending position, when the elevating body 330 is arranged in the elevating position, almost the entire surface of the third symbol display device 81 is visible (see FIG. 8), while the elevating body When the 330 is arranged in the lowered position (see FIG. 12), a part of the third symbol display device 81 is made invisible by the elevating body 330.

The liquid crystal elevating unit 400 has a pair of guide rods 451 arranged in a vertical posture with the axes along the vertical direction and arranged at predetermined intervals in the width direction, and both ends in the width direction of the guide rods 451. It includes a drive-side slide member 420 and a driven-side slide member 430 that are supported so as to be slidable, and a drive motor 441 that moves the drive-side slide member 420 up and down, and the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down by the drive motor 441. As a result, the driven side slide member 430 is driven up and down.

That is, when the drive-side slide member 420 is raised, the drive-side slide member 420 pushes the driven-side slide member 430 upward while resisting the action of gravity, while the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered. The driven side slide member 430 is lowered by its own weight as the drive side slide member 420 is lowered.

The drive-side slide member 420 is provided with the second passage forming member 422, and the driven-side slide member 430 is provided with the display device 81 on the FIG. 3 side. When the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged at the connecting position between the ascending position and the descending position, the second passage forming member 422 can be connected to the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 (FIG. FIG. 9). Further, when the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged in the raised position, the upper region of the third symbol display device 81 is arranged on the back side of the upper elevating unit 300 (see FIG. 10).

The left swing unit 500 includes a first passage forming member 520 that swings in a direction in which the tip side is moved up and down with the base end side as the center. When the first passage forming member 520 is swung in the direction of lifting the tip side, the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connecting position (see FIG. 9), and the tip side is connected to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. When it is swung in the direction of swinging down the tip side, it is arranged at the release position (see FIG. 10), and the connection of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 with the second passage forming member 422 is released.

The ball flowing down the game area can flow into the left swing unit 500, and the left swing unit 500 flows into the left swing unit 500 when the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connecting position (see FIG. 9). The ball is sent to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520, while the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the release position (see FIG. 10). , The inflowed ball is sent to the game area through a passage to be described later provided separately from the first passage forming member 520.

The rotating unit 600 is an effect device configured to imitate a roulette wheel. That is, a member (rotary member 640) corresponding to a wheel (rotary disk) formed rotatably, and the wheel are divided in the circumferential direction and colored in red or black, and different numbers are displayed. A portion corresponding to a pocket (display plate 646 and a partition plate 647) is provided, and a ball B thrown from a device on the inner peripheral side of the wheel (throwing device 650) is included in a portion corresponding to a plurality of pockets. Formed to fall into either.

In the state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged in the descending position (see FIG. 8), almost the entire rotating unit 600 is shielded from the player by the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, while the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is in the connecting position. In the arranged state (see FIG. 9), a part (lower part) of the member corresponding to the wheel is exposed, and in the state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged in the raised position (see FIG. 10), the wheel In addition to a part of the corresponding member (lower part), the ball B held on the inner peripheral side of the member corresponding to the wheel and the path from when the ball B is thrown to when it falls into the part corresponding to the pocket It is exposed and these are made visible to the player.

The light emitting decorative member 700 includes a case body formed of a light-transmitting material and a plurality of LEDs arranged inside the case body, and a mode of light emitted from the LEDs (for example, a light emitting LED). By changing the number and light emission time), the effect of light emission is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 20, detailed configurations of the upper elevating unit 300, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, the left swing unit 500, the rotating unit 600, and the light emitting decorative member 700 will be described. First, the upper elevating unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 20.

FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300, and FIGS. 12 and 13 are front views of the upper elevating unit 300. It should be noted that in FIGS. 11 and 12, all the elevating bodies 330 arranged side by side in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 12) are arranged in the ascending position, and in FIG. 13, all the elevating bodies 330 are lowered. The state of being arranged at the position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, in the upper elevating unit 300, a plurality of elevating bodies 330 (four in the present embodiment) are arranged in the width direction of the horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped base member 310, and each elevating body 330 is arranged. It is configured to be movable up and down between the ascending position (see FIG. 12) and the descending position (see FIG. 13). Next, the configuration of the drive mechanism of each elevating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15.

FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300, and FIG. 15 is a rear disassembled perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, in the upper elevating unit 300, the base member 310 is provided with a space for accommodating the transmission device 350 between the horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped base member 310 and the base member 310. A rear cover 320 that is fastened and fixed to the back side, and an elevating body 330 in which a rack 332 is housed between the base member 310 and the back cover 320 and a circular effect portion 331 is arranged on the front side of the base member 310. Mainly, a drive device 340 that is fastened and fixed to the back cover member 320 to generate a driving force required for raising and lowering the elevating body, and a transmission device 350 that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device 340 to the elevating body 330. Be prepared.

The cover member 310 is a semicircular recessed portion 311 having a semicircular shape in which the center of a circle is arranged at the lower end and recessed from the front side side surface to the back side, and a rack 332 of the elevating body 330 from the back side side surface. It is provided with a guide rib 312 that is projected in a rib shape toward a position with a slight gap in the left-right direction.

The semicircular recessed portion 311 is configured with a radius slightly larger than the outer diameter of the effect portion 331 of the elevating body 320, and the center of the circle of the semicircular recessed portion 311 and the center of the effect portion 331 are vertically linear. It is placed at the position that matches with. As a result, when the effect portion 331 moves upward, it is possible to move to the front side of the position where the effect portion 331 interferes with the semicircular recessed portion 311 on the front side of the base member 310, and the vertical width of the base member 310 is secured. , It is possible to secure a large ascending movement width of the effect unit 331.

The guide rib portion 312 is a rib-shaped portion extending in the vertical direction, and is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right side surfaces of the rack 332 of the elevating body 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11). As a result, it is possible to prevent the elevating body 330 from moving in the left-right direction (translation or tilting operation) during the elevating movement.

Further, by configuring the semicircular recessed portion 311 as a recess recessed from the front side to the back side, the area where the back side can be made invisible is increased as compared with the case where the space penetrates in the front-rear direction. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large area for arranging the mechanical portion (a portion such as a gear or a motor that is not intended to be visually recognized by the player).

The back cover 320 has a main body portion 321 formed in a case shape with the front side and the lower side open, a cylindrical shaft support portion 322 projecting from the main body portion 321 to the front side, and the front surface from the shaft support portion 322. A guide hole 323, which is a long hole drilled in a position where the extension direction is aligned with the vertical direction at a position shifted in the left-right direction in view, and a shaft support portion from the bottom of the periphery where the upper shaft support portion 322 is projected. A rib-shaped locking portion 324 along the radial direction of 322 is provided.

The shaft support portion 322 is a portion that pivotally supports the pair of gear members 351 and 352 of the transmission device 350, and the guide hole 323 is a hole that guides the elevating operation of the elevating body 330.

The locking portion 324 is arranged on the upper side in the vertical direction and the lower side in the vertical direction with respect to the shaft of the upper shaft support portion 322, and in a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position or the descending position, respectively, the first The end of the locking arc portion 351c of the gear 351 is a portion that can be brought into contact with each other in the rotational direction.

The elevating body 330 includes an effect unit 331 formed in a circular plate shape, and a rack 332 fixed to the back surface of the effect unit 331 and extended in the vertical direction at a position with a gap from the back side side surface of the effect unit 331. , Equipped with.

The effect unit 331 is a portion in which a circular liquid crystal panel is arranged inside a circular outer frame, and an effect is produced by displaying a pattern or a figure on the liquid crystal panel.

The rack 332 includes a slide shaft 332a that is convexly provided on the back surface side and is projected to a position where it is inserted into the guide hole 323 of the back cover 320.

The slide shaft 332a is not a mode in which a plurality of the slide shafts 332a are convexly provided, but a mode in which one is projected. Therefore, since the number of guide holes 323 arranged can be reduced to one, it is possible to secure a large moving distance of the rack 332 while suppressing the arrangement space of the guide holes 323 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rack 332 can come into contact with the guide rib portion 312 in the left-right direction, the rack 332 can be in the left-right direction even if the rack 332 is connected to the guide hole 323 at one position. It is possible to prevent tilting to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effecting unit 331 from swinging in the left-right direction when the elevating body 330 moves up and down, and it is possible to prevent the distance between the second gear 352 and the rack 332 from fluctuating and the toothing relationship from deteriorating. be able to.

The drive device 340 includes a drive motor 341 which is a drive source fastened and fixed to the back cover 320, and a drive gear 342 which is rotated by the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 341 and transmits a drive force to the transmission device 350. ..

The transmission device 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 322 and meshed with the drive gear 342, and is meshed with the first gear 351 and the rack 332 and pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 322. It includes a second gear 352.

As described above, since the plurality of (four in the present embodiment) elevating bodies 330 each include an independent drive motor 341, in addition to the operation in which all the elevating bodies 330 interlock and move up and down, each elevating body 330 is used. It can be raised and lowered individually. Since the technical idea of each elevating body 330 is common, the elevating body 330 arranged at the left end of FIG. 11 will be described below, and the other elevating bodies 330 will be omitted.

Next, the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) is a front view of the first gear 351, FIG. 16 (b) is a rear view of the first gear 351 and FIG. 16 (c) is a front view of the second gear 352. 16 (d) is a rear view of the second gear 352.

As shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the first gear 351 has a main body portion 351a having a through hole through which the shaft support portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted and gear teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface. And, on the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 351a, the overhang length of about half of the tooth length of the gear teeth (extending to the pitch circle C1 in which the contacts of the teeth to be meshed are connected) is extended to the portion where the formation of the gear teeth is omitted. A contact portion 351b that is formed overhanging in the radial direction with an overhang length) and a locking portion that is convexly provided in an arc shape centered on the axis along a direction parallel to the axis from the back surface side surface of the main body portion 351a. It includes an arc portion 351c.

The contact portion 351b has an arc shape whose tip surface in the radial direction has a radius r centered on the central axis of the main body portion 351a, and has a tooth thickness (arc) equivalent to two to three gear teeth formed on the main body portion 351a. The angle formed by the center of the tooth is composed of tooth thickness in the range of about 45 to 60 degrees). That is, since the formation length in the circumferential direction of the main body 351a is longer than the tooth thickness of one gear tooth, the strength in the circumferential direction can be secured as compared with the gear teeth of the main body 351a.

The locking arc portion 351c is a portion whose tip in the circumferential direction can be brought into contact with the locking portion 324 (see FIG. 14) of the back cover 320 in the circumferential direction, and regulates the rotation angle of the first gear 351. There is a role.

As shown in FIGS. 16 (c) and 16 (d), the second gear 352 is composed of two layers of gears having different tooth shapes on the front side and the back side, and is formed in a donut plate shape. And the deformed gear portion 354 formed on the front side of the intermediate plate 353 and having a partially deformed tooth profile, and the spur gear shape formed on the back side of the intermediate plate 353 and meshed with the rack 332 (see FIG. 15). The transmission gear unit 355 is provided.

The intermediate plate 352 is formed so as to project radially outward from the tips of the gear teeth of the deformed gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. Therefore, the mating member (first gear 351 or rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) to be meshed with the mating member (first gear 351 or rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) can be brought into contact with each other by overlapping in a direction parallel to the tooth surface (see FIG. It is possible to suppress the movement of the 330 in the direction parallel to the tooth surface during the ascending / descending operation.

The deformed gear portion 354 is a portion that is meshed with the first gear 351 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11), has a through hole through which the shaft support portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted, and has gear teeth on the outer peripheral surface. The main body portion 354a to be formed, the receiving portion 354b formed overhanging the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a where the formation of gear teeth is omitted, and one end of the receiving portion 354b (on the right side of FIG. 16C). An adjacent gear tooth 354c, which is adjacent to the end), is provided.

The receiving portion 354b is located on the counterclockwise side when viewed from the front from the adjacent gear tooth 354c along the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a (the side where the first gear 351 engages with the adjacent gear portion 354c when the elevating body 330 is moved upward). ) Is a portion formed at an arrangement angle (about 30 to 50 degrees) equivalent to two gear teeth, and the tip surface of the contact portion 351b in a state where the transmission device 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 322. The tooth length of the adjacent gear tooth 354c is formed between the curved wall portion 354b1 formed to be curved along the arc shape of the radius r formed by the tooth, and the curved wall portion 354b1 and the tooth surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a connecting wall portion 354b2 formed with a tooth length of about half of that (a tooth length extending up to a pitch circle C2 connecting the contact points of teeth to be toothed). Therefore, the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the connecting wall portion 354b2 side has an overhang length of about half the radial overhang length of the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the opposite side of the connecting wall portion 354b2. It is formed so as to project radially from the connecting wall portion 354b2 in a state of being integrally formed with the connecting wall portion 354b2.

As shown in FIG. 16C, in a state where the transmission device 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 322, the second gear 352 is a curved wall along an arc shape having a radius r formed by the tip surface of the contact portion 351b. When the portion 354b1 is arranged, the adjacent gear tooth 354c is arranged outside the arc having a radius r (the second gear 352 side) (the adjacent gear tooth 354c has a radius r). The formation is limited to a position that does not interfere with the circle).

Next, the elevating operation of the elevating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20. Since the operation path of the ascending operation and the descending operation is the same, the ascending operation will be described here, and the description of the descending operation will be omitted.

17 to 20 are front views of the elevating body 330 and the transmission device 350 in which the ascending operation of the elevating body 330 is illustrated in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 17, the state in which the elevating body 330 is arranged in the descending position is shown, and in FIG. 18, the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. The state in which the distance increasing operation is performed and the circumferential end of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 begins to mesh with the adjacent gear tooth 354c of the second gear 352 is shown, and FIG. 19 shows the state shown in FIG. The state immediately after the first gear 351 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view and the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise in the front view so that the end face of the contact portion 351b in the circumferential direction and the adjacent gear tooth 354c are disengaged. Illustrated, FIG. 20 shows a state in which only the first gear 351 is rotated by a predetermined amount clockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the elevating body 330 is moved up and down by transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) to the rack 332 via the drive gear 342 and the transmission device 350. To. More specifically, the driving force of the drive gear 342 is transmitted from the first gear 351 meshed with the drive gear 342 to the deformed gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 meshed with the first gear 351. The rotation of the second gear 352 is transmitted to the rack meshed with the transmission gear portion 355 (see FIG. 16D) of the second gear 352, so that the elevating body 330 moves up and down.

In the lowered position shown in FIG. 17, the slide shaft 322a (see FIG. 15) of the rack 332 is arranged at the lower end of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15) of the back cover 320. Therefore, it is possible to mechanically prevent the rack 332 from moving further downward.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 17, the first gear 351 comes into contact with the circumferential end of the locking arc portion 351c of the first gear 351 and the locking portion 324 on the lower side of the back cover 320. The rotation of the rack 332 in the clockwise direction (the direction in which the rack 332 is lowered) is mechanically prevented.

As a result, even if the drive gear 342 is over-rotated due to poor control of the drive motor 341 or the like, and a load is generated to further rotate the first gear 351 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. By mechanically preventing the rotation of the first gear 351, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the second gear 352, and the situation where the rack 332 descends can be avoided. Therefore, the slide shaft 322a (FIG. FIG. 15) is pressed against the lower side surface of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15), and the slide shaft 322a or the guide hole 323 can be prevented from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the process of ascending the elevating body 330, the circumferential end face of the contact portion 351b whose peripheral tooth thickness is made larger than that of other gear teeth meshes with the adjacent gear tooth 354c. Therefore, the load transmitted in the reverse direction from the second gear 352 to the first gear 351 (load due to the weight of the elevating body 330) can be received by the contact portion 351b, which has a higher strength than the other gear teeth. , The durability of the first gear 351 can be improved.

Since the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 projects to the pitch circle C1 and the connecting wall portion 354b2 of the second gear 352 extends to the pitch circle C2, the contact portion 351b is connected in the state of FIG. It is approached to a position where it rubs against the wall portion 354b2. Therefore, the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be brought into contact with each other at a portion close to the tooth root of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, and the durability of the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be improved.

Further, since one side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c is connected to the connecting wall portion 354b2 in the circumferential direction, the strength against the load received from the circumferential direction is improved as compared with the other gear teeth. In other words, since the radial overhang length of the side surface on the connecting wall portion 354b2 side is shortened, the resistance to deformation of the adjacent gear tooth 354c in the direction perpendicular to the tooth length direction is increased, and the connecting wall portion is formed. Since the 354b2 is integrally formed with the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the total tooth thickness of the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the connecting wall portion 354b2 as a portion that receives the force applied to the adjacent gear tooth 354c is increased. , The resistance to the circumferential deformation of the adjacent gear tooth 354c increases. As a result, it is possible to prevent the adjacent gear teeth 354c from being damaged when receiving the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

As shown in FIG. 19, immediately after the elevating body 330 is arranged in the raised position, the arcuate tip portion of the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear tooth 354c come into contact with each other. In this state, since the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 are not in contact with each other in the circumferential direction of the first gear 351, the transmission of the driving force in the rotational direction of the first gear 351 to the second gear 352 is released. To.

Therefore, the force supporting the weight of the elevating body 330 meshed with the second gear 352 is not transmitted from the first gear 351 and the elevating body 330 starts to move in the falling direction, so that the second gear 352 moves the rack 332. It starts to rotate in the direction of downward operation (counterclockwise in FIG. 19).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, since the contact portion 351b is arranged in the range in the direction in which the adjacent gear tooth 354c rotates (inside the circle formed by the tip of the adjacent gear tooth 354c), the second gear When rotating the 352, it is necessary to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

Since the outer peripheral shape of the contact portion 351b is an arc shape centered on the central axis of the main body portion 351a, the load applied to the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 351b is an axial component toward the axial side of the first gear 351. It is decomposed into Fa and a circumferential component Fb along the tangential direction of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

The axial component Fa is not in a direction in which the first gear 351 can rotate, and in a state where the rigidity of the first gear 351 is ensured (in a structure that does not expand and contract in the radial direction), the abutting portion is formed by the axial component Fa. It is difficult to push 351b out of the movement locus of the adjacent gear teeth 354c.

The circumferential component Fb faces the rotation direction of the first gear 351 but slips between the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the contact portion 351b because the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the contact portion 351b come into contact with each other at a point. It is difficult to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the circumferential component Fb because the first gear 351 is difficult to rotate.

Therefore, since the contact portion 351b is prevented from being pushed to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the second gear 352 is prevented from rotating, and the second gear 352 and The state of the elevating body 330 is maintained.

Both the abutting portion 351b and the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b are formed from an arc shape having a radius r centered on the first gear 351 and, as shown in FIG. 19, the circumference of the first rotating gear 351. Since the contact is made against the surface along the direction, the rotation of the first gear 351 can be firmly received by utilizing the entire area of the curved wall portion 354b1. As a result, even if the stop of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) is delayed after the elevating body 330 reaches the ascending position, it is possible to prevent the first gear 351 from over-rotating, and the drive motor 341 is stopped. It is possible to prevent the delay from affecting the operation mode of the elevating body 330.

As shown in FIG. 20, the first gear 351 rotates and stops until the locking arc portion 351c comes into contact with the upper locking portion 324. From FIG. 18 to FIG. 20, since the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 pushes the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the second gear 352 is rotated, so that the adjacent gear tooth The 354c is aligned with respect to the second gear 352, and in the state shown in FIG. 20, a state in which the adjacent gear teeth 354c abuts on the tooth tip surface of the contact portion 351b can be reliably formed.

From the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, since the elevating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position, it is restricted that the second gear 352 rotates in the direction in which the rack 332 is moved ascending (clockwise in FIG. 20). Will be done. Therefore, even if the first gear 351 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 19 with respect to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 does not rotate. Therefore, it is possible to reliably form a state in which the tooth tip surface of the contact portion 351b faces the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

As shown in FIG. 20, in a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position, the curved wall portion 354b1 of the second gear 352 follows an arc shape having a radius r formed by the tip surface of the abutting portion 351b. Since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are arranged outside the arc of radius r (second gear 352 side) in the arranged posture, only the first gear 351 is rotated in the same rotation direction (from the state shown in FIG. 19). It can be rotated in the counterclockwise direction (FIG. 19).

At this time, the tooth thickness of the contact portion 351b is thicker than that of the other gear teeth (approximately the thickness of two to three gear teeth), so that the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is moderately adjusted. can do. That is, for example, even if the first gear 351 stops in a phase intermediate between the state shown in FIG. 19 and the state shown in FIG. 20, the relationship between the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b is the same. It is possible to regulate the rotation of the second gear 352.

Further, it is possible to regulate the rotation of the second gear 352 in both directions while keeping the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 loose. That is, even if the second gear 352 is about to rotate clockwise in FIG. 20, the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b comes into contact with the tooth tip surface of the abutting portion 351b, so that the direction of the load is adjacent to the above-mentioned details. The rotation of the second gear 352 is restricted as in the case of contact between the set gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b. Therefore, since the rack 332 is restricted from moving in both the up and down directions when the elevating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling in the elevating body 330. It is difficult to regulate both the upper and lower directions (particularly, the regulation in the ascending direction) with the conventional crank mechanism, and it is achieved for the first time by the gear shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 as in the present embodiment. It is a thing.

As described above, due to the relationship between the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352, it is possible to prevent the second gear 352 from rotating while the elevating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position. It is not necessary to continuously apply the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) with a magnitude equal to or larger than its own weight in order to maintain the above position, and energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, it is possible to maintain the elevating body 330 in the ascending position by using the dead center of the crank mechanism, but in that case, there is a problem that the crank mechanism becomes large in size corresponding to the moving distance of the elevating body 330. there were. In the present embodiment, the crank mechanism is not required, and the rotation of the second gear 352 can be regulated by the relationship between the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352, so that the transmission portion can be miniaturized.

A method of releasing the restriction on the rotation of the second gear 352 will be described. In the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, another member that interferes with the contact portion 351b is not arranged in the rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 20) when the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 is rotated in the opposite direction. Therefore, the rotational operation in the direction in which the elevating body 330 of the first gear 351 is lowered (clockwise in FIG. 20) is allowed.

When the first gear 351 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 20 to the state shown in FIG. 19 and further rotated in the same direction, the restriction on the rotation direction of the second gear 352 is released (the contact portion 351b of the contact portion 351b). (The tip surface is separated from the adjacent gear tooth 354c), and the elevating body 330 can be lowered. That is, the rotation restriction of the second gear 352 can be released by the rotation operation of the first gear 351, and the first gear 351 can be made to perform another operation in order to release the rotation restriction of the second gear 352. Since it is unnecessary, the structure of the first gear 351 can be simplified.

Next, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 33. FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. As shown in FIG. 21, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is composed of a drive-side slide member 420 that has an effect portion 422a having a circular liquid crystal portion and moves up and down, and a member that moves up according to the drive-side slide member 420. A driven side slide member 430 including a third symbol display device 81 is provided, and the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are communicated with a common guide rod 451 and are configured to operate in the same direction. Will be done.

FIG. 22 is a front exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. As shown in FIG. 22, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 includes a base member 410 composed of a pair of long plate-shaped members, a drive-side slide member 420 configured to be capable of elevating and lowering in the vertical direction, and driving thereof. Generated from a driven side slide member 430 that is arranged above the side slide member 420 and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction, a drive device 440 that generates a driving force for the drive side slide member 420 to move up and down, and the drive device 440. A transmission device 450 having a pair of guide rods 451 that transmit the driving force to the drive-side slide member 420 and guide the operation of the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430, and the lower ends of the pair of base members 410. The lower front plate member 460, which is connected to the drive-side slide member 420, and the cover member 470, which is arranged on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and on the front side of the upper part, are mainly provided. ..

The base member 410 is a U-shaped recess that is arranged at positions that vertically coincide with each other in the vertical direction of the main body member 411 that is configured as a vertically long plate-shaped member and the upper and lower ends of the main body member 411 and is open to the front. A member of the guide rod support portion 412, which is arranged inside the vertical line drawn from the guide rod support portion 412 (the side closer to the other base member 410) and extends to the front side of the main body member 411. The first shaft branch 414, which is projected in a cylindrical shape on the front side of the main body member 411 on the opposite side of the locking portion 413 with the vertical straight line drawn from the stop portion 413 and the guide rod support portion 412, and its first. A descent restricting member 415 that is pivotally supported by the shaft support 414 and regulates the descent operation of the drive side slide member 420, and a cylindrical shape that is arranged below the first shaft support 414 and is projected on the front side of the main body member 411. It mainly includes a second shaft branch 416 and a lift restricting member 417 that is pivotally supported by the second shaft branch 416 and regulates the climbing operation of the driven side slide member 430.

The guide rod support portion 412 is a portion that supports both ends of the guide rod 451 of the transmission device 450, and is formed with an opening width that can accommodate the guide rod 451. In the present embodiment, the cover member 470 is fastened and fixed to the base member 410, so that the opening on the front side of the guide rod support portion 412 is closed, and the guide rod 451 is fixed to the guide rod support portion 412.

The locking portion 413 is a portion that comes into contact with the lower side surface of the fall prevention portion 435 of the driven side slide member 430 in the vertical direction, and the driven side slide member 430 further descends from the contact state. To regulate.

The lowering restricting member 415 and the ascending restricting member 417 rotate with the elevating operation of the driving side slide member 420 and have a role of restricting the movement of the driven side sliding member 430, which will be described in detail later.

The drive-side slide member 420 is a member whose left and right ends are fastened and fixed to the rack 452 of the transmission device 450, and is moved up and down by the slide operation of the rack 452.

The driven side slide member 430 does not have an independent driving device, and its left and right ends are supported by guide rods 451 so as to be slidable, and the driven side slide member 420 moves up and down in accordance with the elevating operation of the driving side slide member 420. The driven side slide member 430 includes a main body member 431 having a third symbol display device 81 and being elongated in the left-right direction, functional units 432 arranged at both ends of the main body member 431 in the left-right direction, and the functional parts thereof. A guide hole 433 that is a hole drilled in the 432 in the vertical direction through which the guide rod 451 is inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 434 that extends upwardly and inclined in the left-right outward direction at the lower end of the functional portion 432. A fall prevention portion 435 extending to the back side inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end of the functional portion 432 (the side close to the other guide hole 433) is mainly provided.

The hook-shaped portion 434 is a portion hooked on the ascending regulating member 417. In a state where the driven side slide member 430 is arranged in the descending position, the ascending restricting member 417 wraps around and is hooked on the engaging surface 434a which is the upper side surface of the hook-shaped portion 434 (see FIG. 29). It is possible to prevent the member 430 from moving in the ascending direction (for example, it is possible to prevent the member 430 from bouncing due to the reaction of falling). Further, since the hook-shaped portion 434 is tilted upward and the engaging claw portion 417e of the rising restricting member 417 is formed in parallel with the inclination, the engagement between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the rising regulating member 417 causes the hook-shaped portion 434 to be tilted in the left-right direction. Wobble can also be suppressed.

The shape of the tip of the hook-shaped portion 434 (outside the tip of the engaging claw portion 417e in the state shown in FIG. 29 (the portion on the right side of FIG. 29)) is based on the movement locus of the engaging claw portion 417e. Is also shaped to fit below. Therefore, even in a state where the engaging claw portion 417e and the hook-shaped portion 434 are engaged with each other and a load is applied to each other, the ascending regulating member 417 can be rotated.

The drive device 440 includes a drive motor 441 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and a drive gear 442 that is rotated by the drive force of the drive motor.

In the transmission device 450, a pair of guide rods 451 fixed to the guide rod support portion 412 of the base member 410, and the drive side slide member 420 supported by the guide rods 451 so as to be slidable are fastened and fixed, and the drive gear 442. Mainly includes a rack 452 meshed from the inside (inside of the pair of drive gears 442) and a vertically elongated plate-shaped contact wall 453 extending from the vicinity of the tooth root of the rack 452 to the front side.

The contact wall 453 has a role of rotating the ascending restricting member 417 to the release side and a role of moving the rack 452 away from the drive gear 442 by receiving the urging force of the ascending restricting member 417. To do.

The left and right ends of the lower front plate member 460 are fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and the central portion is bent in a manner offset to the back side by a predetermined amount as compared with the left and right ends. A main body member 461 having a shape, a guide hole 462 bored in the left half of the main body member 461 along the left-right direction (in a manner of ascending and tilting toward the outside), and extending above the main body member 461. It is mainly provided with a tubular passage portion 463 which is a tubular member to be formed and whose upper end portion is opened to the front side.

The guide hole 462 is a long hole in which the slide shaft 423b of the wiring storage member 423 is slidably guided.

The tubular passage portion 463 is a tubular member through which a ball can pass, and forms a second passage of the drive side slide member 420 in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at a connecting position (see FIG. 31). It is a member through which a ball flowing down through the member 422 passes.

The detailed configuration of the drive-side slide member 420 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. FIG. 23 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive-side slide member 420, FIG. 24 is an exploded rear perspective view of the drive-side slide member 420, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the drive-side slide member 420.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the drive-side slide member 420 is a disk having a main body member 421 formed as a plate-shaped member elongated in the left-right direction and an effect portion 422a composed of a circular liquid crystal. A second passage forming member 422 in which a portion is fastened and fixed to the central portion of the main body member 421 from the front side and a groove through which a ball can pass is extended from the disk portion to the left in the front view, and a second passage thereof. A wiring storage member 423 whose one end is pivotally supported at the lower left end of the forming member 422 and whose other end is supported by a guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460, and a second flow path forming member 422. Mainly includes a connecting member 424 which has a passage portion which is pivotally supported by the shaft and penetrates along the circumferential direction of the shaft and serves as a portion for introducing a sphere into the groove portion 422b of the second flow path forming member 422.

The main body member 421 is opened to the front side to a guide portion 421a forming a part of a tubular portion through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted and a portion extending to the left in the front view from the central portion. It mainly includes a groove portion 421b arranged so as to be inclined downward to the left in the embodiment, and a discharge opening 421c formed through the groove portion 421b at the lower left end portion having a size equal to or larger than the diameter of a sphere in the front-rear direction. ..

The guide portion 421a is a groove portion having an arcuate cross section that is opened to the back side and extends in the vertical direction, and the guide rod is closed by closing the opened portion with a rack 452 (see FIG. 22) of the transmission device 450. A tubular portion through which 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted is formed.

The groove portion 421b is a member that forms a sphere passage jointly with the second passage forming member 422, and the sphere that has flowed down along the groove portion 421b is discharged to the back surface side of the main body member 421 through the discharge opening 421c. To.

The second passage forming member 422 includes an effect portion 422a composed of a circular liquid crystal, and a shaft support portion 422b that is projected in a cylindrical shape from a disk portion arranged on the back side of the circular liquid crystal to the back side. A sensor member 422c that is arranged below the shaft support portion 422b and detects the passage of a sphere, and a groove that opens to the back side with a width that allows the sphere that has passed through the sensor member 422c to flow down, in the front-rear direction with the groove portion 421b. A shape capable of accommodating a groove portion 422d having the same shape, a guide portion 422e forming a tubular portion through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted, and a connecting member 424 between the shaft support portion 422b and the sensor member 422c. Mainly includes a storage recess 422f recessed in.

The shaft support portion 422b is a portion where the connecting member 424 is pivotally supported. In the state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the connecting position, after the ball flowing down the left swing unit 500 passes through the sensor member 422c via the connecting member 424, the ball passes through the passage formed by the grooves 422d and 421b. To do.

The wiring storage member 423 is a member that accommodates wiring that extends from the lower front member 460 or the like and is connected to the effect portion 422a or the like, and is a length that is pivotally supported by the left lower end portion of the second passage forming member 422 in the front view. It mainly includes a main body portion 423a which is a rod-shaped portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a cylindrical slide shaft 423b which is projected from the lower end portion of the main body portion 423a to the back surface side.

The main body portion 423a is a member for accommodating wiring in an inner portion formed in a U-shaped cross section, and is configured in a curved shape so as to be convex in a direction away from the second passage forming member 422 in the longitudinal direction. To. As a result, the wiring can be loosened along the curved shape in the vicinity of the shaft support position with the second passage forming member 422, and it is possible to prevent the wiring from being bent and broken.

The slide shaft 423b is a rod-shaped portion inserted into the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460.

Next, the configuration of the connecting member 424 will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (a) is a front perspective view of the connecting member 424, FIG. 26 (b) is a front view of the connecting member 424 in the direction of arrow XXVIb of FIG. 26 (a), and FIG. 26 (c) is a front view. 26 (a) is a rear view of the connecting member 424 in the direction of arrow XXVIc.

As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), the connecting member 424 extends in the radial direction of the tubular portion 424a formed in a tubular shape and pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 422b and the tubular portion 424a thereof. The plate-shaped upper side wall portion 424b to be provided and the curved plate-shaped lower side wall portion 424c arranged to face the upper side wall portion 424b with a length equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere below the front view of the upper side wall portion 424b. And the connecting cover 424d that connects the back side ends of the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c and is laid between the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c, and is wound and connected to the tubular portion 424a. The member 424 is mainly provided with a torsion spring 424e that gives a downward (counterclockwise direction) urging force to the member 424.

The upper side wall portion 424b is formed in such a manner that the width increases from the radial end portion of the tubular portion 424a toward the axis of the tubular portion 424a, and the side surface is formed along a straight line in FIG. 25 (b). It is a plate-shaped part.

The lower side wall portion 424c is a plate-shaped portion formed to be curved along an arc centered on the axis of the tubular portion 424a, and a space having a length through which a sphere can pass is provided between the lower side wall portion 424c and the upper side wall portion 424b. Arranged.

The connecting cover 424d is a plate member that prevents the ball passing through the connecting member 424 from spilling to the back surface side. The open portion of the connecting member 424 formed on the opposite side (front side) of the connecting cover 424d is closed by the bottom portion of the accommodating recess 422f of the second passage forming member 422 coming into contact with the front side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from spilling from the open portion of the connecting member 424.

The operation of the connecting member 424 with respect to the second passage forming member 422 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. 27 and 28 are rear views of the second passage forming member 422 and the connecting member 424. Note that FIG. 27 shows a downwardly inclined state in which the open portion composed of the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c of the connecting member 424 faces the left-right direction, and FIG. 28 shows the connection as compared with the state of FIG. 27. The upward inclined state in which the open portion composed of the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c of the member 424 faces diagonally upward is shown, and FIG. 27 corresponds to the separated state (see FIG. 41) described later, and FIG. 28 shows. Corresponds to the communication state (see FIG. 42) described later.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the connecting member 424 can rotate around the shaft support portion 422b in a state of being accommodated in the accommodating recess 422f of the second passage forming member 422, and the second passage forming member 422 can rotate. The front side end faces of the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c are brought into contact with the bottom portion of the accommodating recess 422f.

The accommodating recess 422f is formed in a portion of the connecting member 424 facing the lower side wall portion 424c in the state shown in FIG. 27 in an arc shape centered on the shaft support portion 422b along the outer diameter of the lower side wall portion 424c. The curved wall portion 422f1 to be formed and the surface arranged to face the curved wall portion 422f1 are recessed in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1 and smoothly connected to the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 in an upwardly inclined state (see FIG. 42). A facing wall portion 422f2 having a curved surface to be formed is provided.

Since the curved wall portion 422f1 is in surface contact with the lower side wall portion 424c in the downward inclined state of the connecting member 424 in the radial direction, the positional deviation of the connecting member 424 in the axial radial direction can be suppressed.

Therefore, even if the fitting between the shaft support portion 422b and the tubular portion 424a of the connecting member 424 is loosened (a state where the gap is large, for example, a state where the dimension has a gap between 0.5 mm and 1 mm), the connecting member When the 424 is tilted downward, the posture of the connecting member 424 can be maintained with high accuracy by the contact between the lower side wall portion 424c and the curved wall portion 422f1.

On the other hand, when the fitting of the shaft support portion 422b and the tubular portion 424a of the connecting member 424 is loosened, the operating resistance generated in the shaft support portion is reduced, so that the connection is made unless a load from other members is generated. The member 424 can be reliably maintained in the downward tilted state by the action of gravity and the urging force of the torsion spring 424e. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the connecting member 424 is maintained in an upwardly inclined state even though no load is generated from other members.

The facing wall portion 422f2 is a portion that guides the ball from the connecting member 424 to the sensor member 422c. In the present embodiment, the sphere can be smoothly guided to the sensor member 422c by bending the surface that faces the curved wall portion 422f1.

The upward tilted state is formed in a communicating state in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the connecting member 424 are communicated with each other. In this state, since the lower side wall portion 424c is separated from the opening of the sensor member 422c, the ball that has passed by rolling the lower side wall portion 424c of the connecting member 424 rolls on the curved wall portion 422f1 and of the sensor member 422c. It passes through the opening and flows down the groove 422d.

On the other hand, the downward tilting state is formed in a separated state in which the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 of the left swing unit 500 are separated from each other. In this state, the lower side wall portion 424c projects to the inside of the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the lower end portion of the lower side wall portion 422c and the wall surface of the accommodating recess 422f arranged to face the lower end portion thereof (sensor member 422c). By setting the dimension between the sphere and the wall surface extending vertically upward to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere, it is possible to prevent the sphere from passing through the connecting member 424 (the sphere is ejected from the lower end portion).

Therefore, as will be described later, even if the sphere reaches the connecting member 424 in the separated state, the flow of the sphere can be stagnant at the connecting member 424.

Next, the elevating and lowering operations of the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 33. First, the positional relationship between the drive-side slide member 420, the driven-side slide member 430, and the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

29 is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, and FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 in the direction of arrow XXX of FIG. 29. In addition, in FIGS. 29 and 30, the state in which the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are arranged in the descending position is shown, and the illustration of the pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 is omitted. The transmission member 450 is visible. Further, in FIG. 29, the lowering regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 on the right side of the front view are partially magnified, and the rack immediately before the contact wall 453 and the release convex portion 417c of the ascending regulating member 417 come into contact with each other. The outer shape of 452 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the driven side slide member 430, the fall prevention portion 435 is brought into contact with the locking portion 413 of the base member 410 from below at the lowered position, and the hook-shaped portion 434 is raised. It comes into contact with the regulating member 417 from above. As described above, since the driven side slide member 430 is restricted from moving in both the vertical direction, it is possible to prevent the driven side slide member 430 from rattling in the vertical direction at the descending position.

Further, the ascending restricting member 417 and the locking portion 413 are arranged with the guide rod 451 inserted through the guide hole 433 sandwiched between them, and they can come into contact with the functional portion 432 of the driven side slide member 430. It is possible to prevent the portion 432 from rattling in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the guide rod 451 (the left-right direction in FIG. 29). Therefore, even if the driven side slide member 430 is disturbed at the moment when it is placed in the lowered position or when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by the player, the driven side slide member 430 rattles. Can be suppressed, and the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

Further, since the ascending restricting member 417 and the locking portion 413 are arranged so as to be displaced in the vertical direction, the functional portion 432 rattles in an oblique direction (for example, the direction connecting the locking portion 413 and the ascending restricting member 417). Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the driven side slide member 430 is disturbed at the moment when it is placed in the lowered position or when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by the player, the driven side slide member 430 rattles. Can be suppressed, and the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

Since the locking portion 413 is displaced upward as compared with the ascending restricting member 417, the locking portion 413 is arranged at a position far from the drive side slide member 420, and the locking portion 413 slides on the drive side. It is possible to make it difficult to hinder the raising and lowering operation of the member 420. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the drive-side slide member 420 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 30, the lowering restricting member 415 is arranged in front of the ascending regulating member 417, and the forming height of the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450 (the length of protrusion from the vicinity of the tooth root of the rack 452). Is the height before reaching the descent restricting member 415, so that the descent restricting member 415 and the contact wall 453 do not abut in the rotation direction of the descent restricting member 415. Further, since the hook-shaped portion 434 is arranged at the same position in the front-rear direction as the ascending regulating member 417, the hook-shaped portion 434 and the descending regulating member 415 do not abut in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, the rack 452 includes a convex plate 453a projecting from the upper end portion of the contact wall 453 toward the front side, and the convex plate 453a can be brought into contact with the lowering restricting member 415 in the rotational direction.

FIG. 31 is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. In FIG. 31, the state in which the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up from the descending position and arranged at the connecting position is shown, and the illustration of the pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 31, the descending regulation member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 on the right side of the front view are partially enlarged.

In a state where the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged at the connecting position, a ball can be introduced into the connecting member 424 via the left swing unit 500 (see FIG. 42).

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 31, the ascending restricting member 417 is a member that covers the hook-shaped portion 434 from above in a state before the upper end portion of the contact wall 453 is brought into contact with the ascending restricting member 417. Rotational operation is possible between the engaged state shown in FIG. 29 and the disengaged state shown in FIG. The released state is not limited to the state shown in FIG. 31, and means a state in which the ascending regulating member 417 is rotated from vertically above the hook-shaped portion 434 to a posture in which the ascending regulating member 417 is retracted.

The ascending restricting member 417 is one of a cylindrical portion 417a pivotally supported by the second shaft support portion 416, an extension plate 417b extending linearly in the tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 417a, and the extension plate 417b. A release convex portion 417c projecting vertically from an end (lower end), an engaging convex portion 417d projecting vertically from the other end of the extension plate 417b, and an engaging convex portion thereof. At the convex end of 417d, the hook extends parallel to the extension direction of the hook-shaped portion 434 in an engaged state and is arranged above and inward (upper left in the enlarged view of FIG. 29) of the tip of the hook-shaped portion 434. The joint claw portion 417e, the separated inclined portion 417f which is downwardly inclined on the upper side surface of the convex end portion of the engaging convex portion 417d, and the cylindrical portion 417a are wound around and one end portion is formed on the main body member 411 of the base member 410. It mainly includes a torsion spring 417 g that urges the ascending restricting member 417 in the inward winding direction (counterclockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 29) by being locked.

The extension plate 417b extends above the axis of the cylindrical portion 417a. As a result, when the release convex portion 417c is pushed up, the other end of the extension plate 417b can be moved in a direction away from the driven side slide member 430, and the release operation can be performed.

Even if the driven side slide member 430 is about to move upward in the engaged state, the engaging claw portion 417e meshes with the hook-shaped portion 434 (between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the functional portion 432). (By inserting 417e), the movement of the driven side slide member 430 is strongly suppressed.

The release operation of the ascending restricting member 417 will be described. First, in the state shown in FIG. 29, the upper end of the contact wall 453 is brought into contact with the release convex portion 417c, while the ascending restricting member 417 is maintained in the engaged state. From this state, when the rack 452 is raised to the state shown in FIG. 31, the end portion of the contact wall 453 pushes up the release convex portion 413c, so that the raising restricting member 417 is moved outward (clockwise in the enlarged view of FIG. 31). ), And the engaging convex portion 417d is retracted from above the hook-shaped portion 434 (released state).

That is, the release operation of the ascending restricting member 417 can be performed only by the ascending operation of the rack 452. Therefore, for example, as compared with the case where the solenoid member for releasing the ascending restricting member 417 is separately arranged, the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) also serves as the driving device for releasing the ascending restricting member 417. It is possible to reduce the number of drive devices to be arranged (the product cost can be reduced). In addition, it is possible to prevent the ascending regulating member 417 from being inadvertently operated.

In other words, according to the present embodiment, since the ascending regulating member 417 is operated according to the arrangement of the rack 452, as compared with the case where the ascending regulating member 417 is operated by another drive source (solenoid or the like), It is possible to prevent the rack 452 and the ascending restricting member 417 from malfunctioning due to inconsistent operation timing, and when the driven side slide member 430 ascends, the ascending restricting member 417 reliably shifts to the released state. Can be made to. For example, it is possible to prevent the rack 452 from being lifted while the lift restricting member 417 is in the engaged state, and an excessive load is applied to the hook-shaped portion 434 and the engaging convex portion 417d of the lift regulating member 417.

Further, the rack 452 is lifted, and the lift restricting member 417 is moved to the released state immediately before the upper end of the rack 452 and the lower end of the driven side slide member 430 are brought into contact with each other, so that the rack 452 continues to lift. When the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420 are separated from each other, an engaged state (see FIG. 29) is formed to prevent the driven side slide member 430 from rattling, while the driven side slide. When the member 430 and the drive-side slide member 420 are in contact with each other, a release state (see FIG. 31) is formed, and the driving force required for raising the driven-side slide member 430 can be suppressed.

Here, in the case of the configuration in which the drive side slide member 420 pushes up the driven side slide member 430 during the ascending operation of the drive side slide member 420 as in the present embodiment, the driven side slide member 430 and the engaging portion are released. Can be performed by pushing up the driven side slide member 430, but in this case, it is necessary to bring the driven side slide member 430 into an engaging state that can be disengaged by the pushing force, and strong engagement is difficult. Will be. Further, in this case, there is a problem that the driven side slide member 430 vibrates due to the reaction generated when the driven side slide member 430 and the engaging portion are disengaged, and the posture becomes unstable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ascending restricting member 417 is rotated to be disengaged by retracting the ascending restricting member 417 from above the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven side slide member 430. The force that can be loaded on the driven side slide member 430 and the force that causes the ascending regulating member 417 to rotate can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to increase the force that suppresses the ascending operation of the driven side slide member 430 in the engaged state while suppressing the force required for releasing.

Further, since the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 do not come into contact with each other when the ascending restricting member 417 is released, the driven side slide member 430 is less likely to recoil, and the driven side slide member 430 at the time of release is less likely to occur. Can stabilize the posture of.

In the connected state shown in FIG. 31, the discharge opening 421c of the drive-side slide member 420 and the tubular passage portion 463 of the lower front plate member 460 are communicated with each other. As a result, the ball that has flowed down the second passage forming member 422 can be discharged to the tubular passage portion 463.

32 and 33 are front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. Note that FIG. 32 shows a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 moves up from the state shown in FIG. 31 and the convex plate 453a of the transmission device 450 is about to come into contact with the lowering regulation member 415. , The state in which the drive-side slide member 420 is raised from the state shown in FIG. 32 and the convex plate 453a is placed in the raised position on the upper side of the lowering regulating member 415 is shown. Further, in FIG. 33, the vicinity of the lowering regulation member 415 is partially enlarged.

In the state shown in FIG. 32, the release convex portion 417c of the ascending restricting member 417 is brought into contact with the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission devices 450 are arranged symmetrically, and the direction in which the release convex portion 417c abuts on the contact wall 453 is also symmetrical. Therefore, the release convex portion 417c functions as a guide for guiding the drive-side slide member 420, and it is possible to prevent the drive-side slide member 420 from rattling in the left-right direction during the ascending / descending operation.

Since the lift restricting member 417 is urged in the left-right inward direction of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 by the torsion spring 417 g, the load in the left-right inward direction of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is applied to the contact wall 453 from the release convex portion 417c. Can be called. As a result, the drive-side slide member 420 is urged in a certain direction along the left-right direction, so that the posture of the drive-side slide member 420 during the ascending / descending operation can be stabilized.

Further, when the drive-side slide member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction, the elastic force applied from the release convex portion 417c to the contact wall 453 is such that the drive-side slide member 420 is returned to the center position, and a pair of left and right slide members are returned. The ascending control member 417 is asymmetrical.

That is, on the side where the contact wall 453 moves in the direction close to the release convex portion 417c, the ascending restricting member 417 is further rotated toward the release side, so that the amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g is increased and the urging force is increased. While the force pushing back the contact wall 453 increases, on the side where the contact wall 453 moves away from the release convex portion 417c, the ascending restricting member 417 is rotated in the direction opposite to the release side, so that the torsion spring 417g The amount of deformation is reduced, the urging force is reduced, and the force pushing the contact wall 453 is reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress rattling in the left-right direction when the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down.

Since the drive gear 442 and the lift restricting member 417 are arranged on the same side with respect to the rack 452, the urging force of the torsion spring 417g acts in the direction of separating the rack 452 from the drive gear 442, so that the drive side slide member 420 The rack 452 and the drive gear 442 are close to each other due to rattling in the left-right direction, and it is possible to suppress an increase in drive resistance (the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 can be stabilized).

That is, when the drive side slide member 420 rattles in the left-right direction and the rack 452 moves in a direction close to the drive gear 442, the ascending restricting member 417 is wound outward (the engaging convex portion 417d is on the left and right outside of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400). By being rotated in the direction of rotation (moving in the direction), the amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g is increased, and by increasing the urging force, the urging force for pushing back the drive side slide member 420 is increased, while the rack 452 is driven. When moving in a direction away from the gear 442, the guide rod 451 supports the rack 452, so that the rack 452 separates from the drive gear 442 beyond the gap provided in the support structure between the guide rod 451 and the rack 452. Is regulated. As a result, the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 is narrowed, and it is possible to suppress an excessive meshing resistance, and the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 is widened, resulting in tooth misalignment. Can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 33, in a state where the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are arranged in the raised position, the lower side surface of the convex plate 453a of the transmission device 450 is the release convex portion 415c of the lowering regulating member 415. Contact with the upper side surface (locked state).

The convex plate 453a includes an inclined side surface 453a1 on the lower side surface, which is inclined upward toward the left and right outward sides.

The descending inclined member 415 is one of a cylindrical portion 415a pivotally supported by the first shaft support portion 414, an extension plate 415b extending linearly in the tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 415a, and the extension plate 415b. A release convex portion 415c that is projected vertically from the end (upper end) and has a semicircular tip, and a release convex portion 415c that is wound around a cylindrical portion 415a and one end is engaged with the main body member 411 of the base member 410. It mainly includes a torsion spring 415d that urges the lowering restricting member 415 in the inward winding direction (counterclockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 33) when stopped.

As shown in FIG. 33, the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 is locked by the lowering restricting member 415. Therefore, the supply of the driving force of the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) can be stopped while the rack 452 is held in the raised position, and the power consumption of the drive motor 441 can be reduced.

Further, the rotation operation of the lowering restricting member 415 to the locked state shown in FIG. 33 is performed by raising the rack 452 and causing the convex plate 453a to get over the release convex portion 415c of the lowering restricting member 415. Therefore, both the driving force for raising the rack 452 and the driving force for forming the locked state of the lowering regulating member 415 can be generated by the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 2). That is, the drive motor 441 can also be used, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Returning to FIG. 30, the positional relationship between the descending regulation member 415, the ascending regulating member 417, and the contact wall 453 in the front-rear direction will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, the lowering restricting member 415 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 30) as compared with the ascending regulating member 417, and the contact wall 453 can abut on the ascending regulating member 417 in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 30. The lower side surface of the lowering regulation member 415 is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the front side surface of the contact wall 453.

It will be described back to FIG. 33. The lowering regulating member 415 and the contact wall 453 are brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 33, the contact wall 453 and the ascending restricting member 417 are brought into contact with each other in the left-right direction (FIG. 33 left-right direction), and the abutting wall 453 and the descending regulating member 415 are brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction (paper surface of FIG. 33). (Vertical direction). As a result, the ascending regulating member 417 can suppress the rattling of the drive side slide member 420 in the left-right direction, and the descending restricting member 415 prevents the drive side slide member 420 from rattling in the front-rear direction (direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442). It is possible to suppress rattling.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the area of the tooth contact surface from being reduced due to the relative movement of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 in the direction parallel to the tooth surface, and to tilt forward when the rack 452 is arranged in the raised position. Can be prevented.

By rotating the drive gear 442 in the direction of lowering the rack 452 from the state shown in FIG. 33, when the rack 452 is about to be lowered, the convex plate 453a applies a load to the release convex portion 415c, thereby causing a lowering regulation member. 415 is rotated outward (clockwise in the magnified view of FIG. 33). As a result, the lock by the lowering regulation member 415 is released, and the driving side slide member 420 can be lowered. That is, since the locking by the lowering regulation member 415 can be released by the driving force of the drive motor 441 (the drive source can also be used), the product cost can be reduced.

Further, since the lowering regulation member 415 is unlocked by the lowering operation of the driving side slide member 420, the operation timing is deviated and the lowering regulation is performed as in the case where the lowering regulating member 415 is rotated by another drive source. It is possible to prevent the drive-side slide member 420 from being lowered before the regulation of the member 415 is released, causing an overload on the drive source and the lowering regulation member 415.

In the structure in which both the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are maintained in the raised position as in the present embodiment, the driven side slide member 430 is locked in the raised position of each member. However, in that case, the structure for connecting and separating the driven side slide member 430 and the driving side slide member 420 becomes complicated, and the cost increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the driven side slide member 420 is maintained in the raised position by locking the drive side slide member 420, the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420 are maintained in the raised position. The configuration required for this can be reduced (only the drive device 450 and the drive side slide member 420 can be used). Further, the interlocking of the driven side slide member 430 with the drive side slide member 420 is solely due to the action of gravity, so that the structure between the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420 can be simplified. it can.

When the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, the driven side slide member 430 is lowered on the rack 452. However, for example, the guide rod 451 becomes dirty and the guide rod 451 and the guide hole 433 (see FIG. 22). ), The descending speed of the driven side slide member 430 may be smaller than the descending speed of the rack 452. Even in this case, when the driven side slide member 430 comes into contact with the ascending restricting member 417, the hook-shaped portion 434 acts on the separated inclined portion 417f of the ascending restricting member 417, so that the ascending restricting member 417 can be rotated. Due to the weight of the driven side slide member 430, the ascending restricting member 417 and the hook-shaped portion 434 can be engaged with each other.

Next, the left swing unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42. FIG. 34 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 34, the left swing unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the second variable winning device 82a and the second specific winning opening 82 of the game board 13, and the ball winning the second specific winning opening 82 is placed. A flow path to pass through is provided inside. In the present embodiment, a sensor member 82b for detecting that a ball has passed is provided between the second variable winning device 82a and the second specific winning opening 82. The sensor member 82b is a part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4).

FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 35, the left swing unit 500 is a unit in which the first passage forming member 520 is hung down to the lower right in the front view, and the effect is produced by swinging the first passage forming member 520. is there.

FIG. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 500, and FIG. 37 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the left swing unit 500 includes a base member 510 that forms a skeleton, a first passage forming member 520 that is pivotally supported by the base member 510 and swings, and a base. A drive device 530 that is fastened and fixed to the member 510 to generate a driving force of the first passage forming member 520, a transmission device 540 that transmits the driving force of the driving device 530 to the first passage forming member 520, and a cover on the front side. It is mainly provided with a cover member 550 having an introduction cylindrical portion 552 which is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and connected to the second specific winning opening 82 of the game board 13.

The base member 510 includes a main body member 511 composed of an L-shaped plate-like body in front view, a shaft support hole 512 formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the right end portion of the main body member in front view, and a shaft support thereof. The first wall portion 513, which is arranged vertically above the hole 512 and has a flat plate shape with the surface facing in the front-rear direction, and one or more spheres to the left of the front view from the lower left end of the first wall portion 513. The second wall portion 514, which is arranged at intervals of the above and is formed in a curved plate shape with the surface facing in the left-right direction, and the sphere, which is arranged on the back side of the second wall portion 514 and reaches the second wall portion 514. The flow-down passage 515, the shaft support 516 arranged in the lower left of the front view of the shaft support hole 512 and projecting in a columnar shape on the front side, and the locking arranged around the shaft of the shaft support 516. It mainly includes a wall portion 517 and a detection sensor 518 arranged above the shaft support portion 516 to detect the phase of the transmission device.

The shaft support hole 512 is a hole through which the shaft support portion 521c of the first passage forming member 520 is inserted, and the first passage forming member 520 swings around the shaft support hole 512.

The first wall portion 513 includes a pair of guide wall portions 513a extending from both ends in the left-right direction to the front side.

The locking wall portion 517 includes an arc wall portion 517a having an arc shape centered on the shaft support portion 516 above the shaft support portion 516, and an inclined wall portion 517b extending downward to the lower right in the front view. ..

The arc wall portion 517a is an end face of the detection sensor 518 and extends to the circumferential end face of the shaft support portion 516.

The first passage forming member 520 is provided on the long rod-shaped distribution base member 521, which is a member pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 512, and the distribution base member 521 arranged on the front side of the distribution base member 521. A passage cover member 522, which is fastened and fixed and forms a passage through which a ball can flow down from the distribution base member 521, is mainly provided.

The distribution base member 521 includes a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 521a forming one side of the flow passage of the sphere, and one sphere along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 521a from the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a. An intermediate plate portion 521b arranged at a position separated by a minute gap V1 and a shaft support portion 521c that is projected in a columnar shape on the back surface side near the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a and is inserted into the shaft support hole 512. And the elongated hole 521d formed along the extending direction in the plate-shaped portion extending in the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c, and the back side from the end portion of the intermediate plate portion 521b on the hanging plate portion 521a side. A distribution convex portion 521e that is convexly provided and whose width is shortened toward the outside in the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c, and a gap V1 along the left side surface of the distribution convex portion 521e as viewed from the rear. It mainly includes a curved wall portion 521f that extends to the front side and curves along an arc shape having a center at the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a.

The hanging plate portion 521a is formed in a shape in which the lower side from the middle portion is bent downward as compared with the middle portion to the upper side, and the plate thickness portion on the front side is shaved at the lower end portion to make the ball feed portion thinner. It includes 521a1.

The gap V1 is a space through which the sphere that has reached the right side of the front view of the distribution convex portion 521e passes in the front direction.

The passage cover member 522 extends in a plate shape from both ends of the plate-shaped plate-shaped portion 522a that is covered on the front side of the distribution base member 521 and the plate-shaped portion 522a in the lateral direction toward the back side. Mainly includes upper and lower wall portions 522b.

The plate-shaped portion 522a is formed of a light-transmitting raw resin material, and has a ball receiving portion 522a1 that is bent to the back side at a portion arranged on the front side of the ball feeding portion 521a1 of the distribution base member 521 at the lower end portion thereof. Be prepared.

The upper and lower wall portions 522b are portions that roll the sphere that has passed through the gap V1 and, like the hanging plate portion 521a, the inclination angle changes with the intermediate portion as a boundary, so that the flow velocity of the sphere can be changed at the intermediate portion. it can.

Of the upper and lower wall portions 522b, the lower wall portion is provided with a step inside the tip portion. The step has a role of displacing the rolling sphere in the opposite direction of the upper and lower wall portions 522b (direction from one wall portion to the other wall portion) and decelerating the sphere.

Further, the ball that has reached the lower end of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the back side by the ball feeding portion 521a1 and the ball receiving portion 522a1. As a result, the speed of the ball before ejection can be reduced, and the ejection of the ball can be stabilized.

The drive device 530 includes a drive motor 531 and a drive gear 532 that is pivotally rotated around the rotation shaft of the drive motor 531, and the drive gear 532 is meshed with the main body gear portion 541 of the transmission device 540.

The transmission device 540 is provided with a main body gear portion 541 that is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 516 and meshed with the drive gear 532, and a first passage forming member that is formed in a columnar shape on the front side from an eccentric position of the main body gear portion 541. The eccentric convex portion 542 inserted through the elongated hole 521d of the 520 and the eccentric convex portion 542 extending in the radial direction from the main body gear portion 541 are configured to be in contact with the locking wall portion 517 and can pass through the gap of the detection sensor 518. The extension portion 543 and the extension portion 543 are mainly provided.

The cover member 550 is connected to a plate-shaped main body member 551 that is overlaid on the base member 510 and a second specific winning opening 82 at the right end portion of the main body member 551 in the front view, and the back side end portion is the first. A cylindrical introduction cylindrical portion 552 that abuts on the wall portion 513, and a pair of guide wall portions 553 extending downward from the left-right end portion of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 on the back surface side surface of the main body member 551. Mainly prepare.

The guide wall portion 553 is a portion that overlaps the guide wall portion 513a of the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The sphere that has passed through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 passes between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 and flows downward.

The swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40. 38 to 40 are front views of the rocking operation unit 500. In addition, in FIGS. 38 to 40, the cover member 550 is not shown, and the outer shape of the first passage forming member 520 viewed in cross section at the intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a is shown and the passage cover member. The outer shape is illustrated by an imaginary line.

Further, in FIG. 38, the state in which the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the release position is shown, and in FIG. 39 (a), the first passage forming member 520 is shaken by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 39 (b), the first passage forming member 520 swings by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a) when the dividing convex portion 521e is arranged at an intermediate position between the pair of guide wall portions 513a. In FIG. 40, the state immediately before the contact with the connecting member 424 is shown, and the state in which the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 39 (b) and arranged at the connecting position is shown. To.

As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 occurs when the transmission device 540 is rotated and the position of the elongated hole 521d is moved as the eccentric convex portion 542 moves.

As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, the direction X1 connecting the shaft support portion 516 and the eccentric convex portion 542 and the direction X2 corresponding to the extension direction of the elongated hole 521d (the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c) intersect vertically. To do. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 by the rotation operation of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the shaft support portion 516, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a load for rotating the transmission device 540. As a result, the posture of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

Further, at the release position, the extension portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is arranged in the gap of the detection sensor 518 and is brought into contact with the end portion of the arc wall portion 517a. That is, the extension portion 543 has both a role as a portion used for detecting the phase of the transmission device 540 and a role as a detent member.

As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged to face the guide wall portion 513a on the right side of the front view of the base member 510. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed to the path on the left side of the front view by the distribution convex portion 521e, and is discharged to the outside of the game area through the flow passage 515. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 39A, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged at the intermediate position of the pair of guide wall portions 513a of the base member 510 at the intermediate position between the release position and the connection position. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and has passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped from flowing down by the distribution convex portion 521e (remains on the tip of the distribution convex portion 521e). ).

As shown in FIG. 39B, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged between the pair of guide wall portions 513a of the base member 510 in a state immediately before the first passage forming member 520 abuts on the connecting member 424. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped from flowing down by the distribution convex portion 521e (while riding on the tip of the distribution convex portion 521e). stay). As a result, in the state of FIG. 39 (b), the ball passes through the first passage forming member 520, is sent to the connecting member 424, and the ball is prevented from reaching the facing wall portion 422f2.

Here, since the facing wall portion 422f2 is smoothly connected to the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 in the upward inclined state (see FIG. 42), the upper end portion is the connecting member 424 in the downward inclined state (see FIG. 41). It is configured to project from the lower end of the upper side wall portion 424b to the left in the front view. Therefore, if a ball is thrown to the connecting member 424 in a downwardly inclined state and the ball collides with the upper end portion of the facing wall portion 422f2, the facing wall portion 422f2 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 39 (b), the introduction of the sphere into the first passage forming member 520 is prevented, so that the sphere can be prevented from colliding with the facing wall portion 422f2. It is possible to prevent the facing wall portion 422f2 from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 40, at the connecting position, the direction X1 connecting the shaft support portion 516 and the eccentric convex portion 542 and the direction X2 corresponding to the extending direction of the elongated hole 521d (the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c) intersect vertically. To do. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 by the rotation operation of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the shaft support portion 516, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a load for rotating the transmission device 540. As a result, the posture of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

Further, at the connection position, the extension portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is brought into contact with the inclined wall portion 517b. As a result, the extension portion 543 is abutted against the inclined wall portion 517b to stabilize the phase in which the transmission device 540 is stopped, and the extension portion 543 is locally loaded as compared with the case where the extension portion 543 is locally loaded. The durability of 543 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 40, in the connected state, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged to face the guide wall portion 513a on the left side of the front view of the base member 510. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed to the path on the right side of the front view by the distribution convex portion 521e, and moves to the front side through the gap V1. Rolls along the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522b (see FIG. 37) of the passage cover member 522.

The flow of spheres in the connected state will be described. First, the ball that has won the second specific winning opening 82 from the game area through the second variable winning device 82a moves back and forth toward the back side through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 (see FIG. 36), and the first wall portion. When it comes into contact with 513, it flows down the passage formed by the guide wall portions 513a and 553, moves back and forth toward the front side through the gap V1 of the first passage forming member 520, and the upper and lower wall portions of the passage cover member 522. Roll over the lower wall of 522b.

That is, the sphere is fed in the front-rear direction before the sphere flows down the inside of the first passage forming member 520. Therefore, even if the balls are supplied to the second specific winning opening 82 in a string of beads, the balls can be smoothly flowed into the first passage forming member 520 by suppressing the bouncing of the balls. Further, by letting the ball sent in the front-rear direction flow down along the curved wall portion 521f (see FIG. 37), the direction of the velocity of the ball can be changed, and the ball smoothly flows into the first passage forming member 520. Can be made to.

In the first passage forming member 520, the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 change in the extending direction with the intermediate portion as a boundary. That is, the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 extend along the straight line Y1 from the intermediate portion to the proximal end side (shaft support portion 521c side), and from the intermediate portion to the distal end side (opposite side of the proximal end side). Is extended along a straight line Y2 that is inclined downward from the straight line Y1.

Therefore, the speed of the sphere rolling inside the first passage forming member 520 is slower from the base end side to the intermediate portion than from the intermediate portion to the tip portion. Become. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball immediately after the ball is introduced into the first passage forming member 520.

Further, as compared with the case where the first passage forming member 520 is formed in a straight shape along the straight line Y1, the direction in which the ball is sent from the first passage forming member 520 at the connecting position (see FIG. 42) , The angle with the direction in which the sphere is introduced into the sensor member 422c (vertical direction) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the ball from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422.

As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the rotation of the transmission device 540 causes the first passage forming member 520 to swing, and the arrangement of the distribution convex portion 521e switches the path through which the ball flows down.

Here, when a wall member arranged to face the distribution convex portion 521e in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged, the distribution convex portion 521e is brought closer to the wall member to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere. If the configuration is adopted, when the sphere stays in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e, the sphere may be caught between the distribution convex portion 521e and the wall member, causing a malfunction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connection position shown in FIG. 40, a space equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere is provided between the distribution convex portion 521e and the second wall portion 514, and the distribution convex portion No wall member is arranged on the opposite side of the second wall portion 514 with the 521e in between, and the wall member is opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring because the ball is not bitten in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e.

The connection of the flow path between the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. 41 and 42 are partial front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500. In addition, in FIGS. 41 and 42, the second passage forming member 422 is cross-sectionally viewed to make the connecting member 424 visible, and the first passage forming member 520 has an outer shape at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a. The illustrated distribution convex portion 521e is visible.

Further, in FIGS. 41 and 42, the state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the connection position (see FIG. 31) is shown, and in FIG. 41, the left swing unit 500 is arranged at the release position (see FIG. 38). In FIG. 42, the state in which the left swing unit 500 is arranged at the connection position (see FIG. 40) is shown.

When the first passage forming member 520 swings from the state shown in FIG. 41 to the state shown in FIG. 42, the tip end portion thereof abuts on the lower side surface of the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424, and the connecting member 424 is brought into contact with the lower side surface. Swing. That is, since the connecting member 424 is moved along with the moving direction of the first passage forming member 520, for example, even if the stop position of the driving side slide member 420 is slightly deviated from the ideal position, the first It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the tip of the passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling between the tip of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424, and to stabilize the throwing of the ball from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422. Can be done.

When the connecting member 424 is swung, the lower side wall portion 424c on which the ball flowing down from the first passage forming member 520 rolls is moved in a direction close to the tip of the first passage forming member 520. The gap between the rolling surfaces of the one passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 can be narrowed, and the ball is prevented from falling from the gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the ball.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 42, the lower side wall portion 424c is inclined downward toward the sensor member 422c communicating with the groove portion 422d (see FIG. 27). As a result, the ball can be rolled along its downward inclination, and the throwing of the ball to the second passage forming member 422 can be stabilized.

The swinging motion of the first passage forming member 520 is performed by detecting the passage of a ball of the sensor member 82b (see FIG. 34) and the sensor member 422c. For example, in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connecting position shown in FIG. 42, the detected numbers of spheres of the sensor member 82b and the sensor member 422c match (the spheres remain in the first passage forming member 520). By starting the swing of the first passage forming member 520 toward the release position (see FIG. 41) at the timing (not shown), it is possible to prevent the ball from being discharged from the tip of the first passage forming member 520 out of the game area. can do.

As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the spheres are distributed by moving the distribution convex portion 521e, and the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 are contacted by swinging the first passage forming member 520. The driving force required for the operation of contacting each other to form the flow path of the sphere is also used (the driving force of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) for operating the first passage forming member 520 is used). Since the states are synchronized, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the sphere is introduced into the first passage forming member 520 in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the release position. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from being discharged from the tip of the first passage forming member 520 out of the game area.

Further, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged at the upper end portion of the distribution base member 521, and is a wall portion that partitions (forms the upper end) the passage of the sphere flowing down the front side of the hanging plate portion 521a (see FIG. 36). Also serves as. As a result, it is possible to reduce the cost of parts as compared with the case of sorting with other parts, and the ball distributed to the first passage forming member 520 side is surely placed on the hanging plate portion 521a and the passage cover member. It can be introduced in the passage to and from 522.

Next, the rotating unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 77. FIG. 43 is a front view of the rotating unit 600, and FIG. 44 is a front perspective view of the rotating unit 600. FIG. 45 is a front view of the rotating unit 600 in a state where the guide member 680 is removed, and FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the rotating unit 600 in a state where the guide member 680 is removed. Further, FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 600, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 48, the rotating unit 600 includes a case member 610 formed in a container shape with one side open, a guide member 620 covered on one side of the case member 610, and their cases. A drive mechanism 630 arranged between the member 610 and the guide member 620 facing each other, a rotary member 640 rotationally driven by the driving force of the drive mechanism 630, and a pitch arranged on the inner peripheral side of the rotary member 640. The device 650 and a guide member 680 arranged on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640 are mainly provided.

The case member 610 includes a bottom wall portion 611 that is substantially circular in front view, and a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 612 that is erected from the bottom wall portion 611 toward the front, and each of these wall portions 611, 612 covers one surface. It is formed in the shape of a container with an open side. The guide member 620 is formed in the shape of a disk having a front view ring, and is arranged (fixed) at the erected tip of the outer wall portion 612 of the case member 610. As a result, an internal space is formed between the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610 and the guide member 620, and the drive mechanism 630 is arranged in the internal space.

The guide member 620 is a member for holding the rotating member 640 in a displaceable manner, and a connecting link action groove 621 and an undulating link action groove 622 are recessed in front of the guide member 620. The connecting link acting groove 621 and the undulating link acting groove 622 are concave grooves having a U-shaped cross section extending along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link described later of the rotating member 640. The insertion portions 644a and 648a of the member 648 are inserted, respectively.

The groove widths of the connecting link working groove 621 and the undulating link working groove 622 are set to have the same or slightly larger diameters as the diameters of the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the undulating link acting groove 622.

When the rotating member 640 is rotationally driven, the connecting link acting groove 621 acts on the connecting link member 644 to increase or decrease the distance between the dividing members DV (see FIG. 73), while the undulating link acting groove 622 It acts on the undulating link member 648 to undulate the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 (see FIGS. 59 and 60). Here, the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

FIG. 49 is a front view of the rotating unit 600 in a state where the rotating member 640, a part of the pitching device 650, and the guide member 680 are removed, and FIG. 50 is a front schematic view of the guide member 620. In FIG. 50, the shapes of the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 are schematically illustrated by using a two-dot chain line. Such an alternate long and short dash line is shown as a line passing through the center of the groove width of each action groove 621 and 622.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the connecting link action groove 621 has a large diameter portion 621a that curves in an arc shape with a radius R1 centered on the axis O, and a large diameter portion 621a that curves in an arc shape with a radius R2 centered on the axis O. It is composed of a small diameter portion 621b and a pair of connecting portions 621c connecting between the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b. The radius R1 of the large diameter portion 621a is set to a size larger than the radius R2 of the small diameter portion 621b (R2 <R1).

The undulating link action groove 622 has a large diameter portion 622a that curves in an arc shape with a radius R3 centered on the axis O, a small diameter portion 622b that curves in an arc shape with a radius R4 centered on the axis O, and these large diameter portions. It consists of a pair of connecting portions 622c that connect between the 622a and the small diameter portion 622b. The radius R3 of the large diameter portion 622a is set to a size larger than the radius R4 of the small diameter portion 622b (R4 <R3).

In the present embodiment, the large-diameter portion 621a and the small-diameter portion 621b of the connecting link action groove 621 and the large-diameter portion 622a and the small-diameter portion 622b of the undulating link action groove 622 are arranged concentrically with the axis O as the center. In this case, the axis O coincides with the center of rotation when the rotating member 640 is rotated. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotated, the large-diameter portions 621a, 622a and the small-diameter portions 622a, 622b of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the undulating link acting groove 622 act on the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648, respectively. The force can be suppressed to reduce the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630.

Further, the pair of connecting portions 621c of the connecting link acting groove 621 are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase. Similarly, the pair of connecting portions 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotationally driven, a force exerted on the connecting link member 644 from one connecting portion 621c of the connecting link acting groove 621 and a force acting on the connecting link member 644 from the other connecting portion 621c. Can be offset. Similarly, the force acting on the undulating link member 648 from one connecting portion 622c of the undulating link acting groove 622 and the force acting on the undulating link member 648 from the other connecting portion 622c can be offset. As a result, the force applied to the rotating member 640 can be made uniform as a whole, so that the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced. ..

In the present embodiment, the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link acting groove 622 are formed so as to have different phases. That is, in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 has a large diameter portion 622a or a small diameter of the undulation link action groove 622. In a state where the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is inserted through the connection portion 622c of the undulation link action groove 622 while being inserted into either one of the portions 622b, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is connected. It is inserted into either the large diameter portion 621a or the small diameter portion 621b of the working groove 621.

Since the connecting portions 621c and 622c are portions for changing the interval of the dividing member DV or displace the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647, the insertion portion receives a relatively large reaction force from the connecting portions 621c and 622c. By preventing the 644a and 648a from being inserted into the connecting portions 621c and 622c at the same time, the required driving force can be dispersed. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

Returning from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the drive mechanism 630 will be described. The drive mechanism 630 is a mechanism for rotationally driving the rotating member 640, and includes a drive motor 631, a pinion gear 632 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631, and a gear (first transmission gear) leading to the pinion gear 632. A central transmission body 634 having a transmission gear train in which 633a) is meshed, a gear 634a meshed with a gear at the end of the transmission gear train (second transmission gear 633b), and a gear 634a of the central transmission member 634 thereof. One-sided distribution gear train and other-side distribution gear train to which the first gear (first distribution gear 635a, 636a) is meshed with each other, and the last gear of those one-side distribution gear train and other-side gear train (third distribution It mainly includes a one-side rotation drive member 637 and another side rotation drive member 638 having gears 637a and 638a meshed with the gears 635c and 636c). The second distribution gears 635b and 636b are interposed between the first distribution gears 635a and 636a and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c, respectively.

The one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are members at the end of a transmission path (output end in the drive mechanism 630) for transmitting the rotation drive force generated from the drive motor 631, and are members of the drive motor 631. The rotation driving force rotates itself, and the rotation causes the rotating member 640 to rotate. Here, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 will be described with reference to FIG. 51.

51 (a) is a front view of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation member 638, and FIG. 51 (b) shows the one-side rotation member 637 and the other in the LIb-LIb line of FIG. 51 (a). It is sectional drawing of the side rotating member 638.

Since the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are members formed in the same shape as each other, only the one-side rotation drive member 637 will be described, and the other-side rotation drive member 638 will be described. Only reference numerals are given in the drawings of FIG. 51, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 47, the one-side rotation drive member 637 is formed in a disk shape, and the engaging portions 637b are recessed at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer edge portions thereof. It is formed.

The engaging portion 637b is a portion that engages with the engaged portion 641 (see FIG. 56) in the split member DV of the rotating member 640, and has a width (distance between the facing surfaces) from the open side toward the recessed back side. ) Is narrowed. Front view (axial view) is formed in a substantially V shape. As will be described later, by rotating the one-side rotation drive member 637, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641, and the rotating member 640 is transmitted. Can be rotated.

The one-side rotation drive member 637 is formed with a connecting wall 637c that partially connects the opposing inner surfaces of the engaging portion 637b. The connecting wall 637c is formed in a shape that curves in an arc shape in a front view (axial direction view) around the axial center of the one-side rotation drive member 637, and is also formed on the open side (one-side rotation drive member 637) of the engaging portion 637b. Only the inner surfaces of the outer edge side of the) are connected to each other, and the inner surfaces of the engaging portion 637b on the back side of the recess are not connected to each other.

Here, when the rotary member 640 is driven by the one-side rotary drive member 637, the engagement and disengagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 are intermittently repeated (see FIG. 74). Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 starts to engage with the engaging portion 637b, an impact load is input, and the one-side rotation drive member 637 may be damaged. On the other hand, when the weight of the one-side rotation drive member 637 increases, a large output is required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, since the connecting wall 637c is formed only on the open side of the engaging portion 637b, reinforcement against an impact load when the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 start to engage is reinforced. And weight reduction can be effectively achieved at the same time. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced while improving the durability of the one-side drive member 637.

It will be described back from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48. Each component of the drive mechanism 630 is disposed on the case member 610, except for the central transmission member 634 (see FIG. 53). On the other hand, the central transmission member 634 is rotatably held on the back surface side of the guide member 620. Here, the holding structure of the central transmission member 634 to the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIG. 52.

FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 600 cut in a plane including the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634. As shown in FIG. 52, the central transmitter 634 has a circular shape in the front view and is formed in a hat shape having a recessed central portion, and a gear 634a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the recessed portion in the center, and the outermost edge thereof. The overhanging portion 634b is formed so as to project outward in the radial direction in a flange shape.

On the back side of the guide member 620, a pair of holding collars 623 and 624 (see FIGS. 47 and 48) are superposed at three locations (that is, positions at 120 degree intervals) that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction. The overhanging portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 is slidably inserted between the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 facing each other. As a result, the central transmission member 634 can be rotatably held by the guide member 620 via the pair of holding collars 623 and 624.

That is, the displacement of the central transmission member 634 with respect to the guide member 620 in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52) can be regulated by abutting the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 on the outer peripheral surfaces of the central transmission member 634. The displacement of the central transmission member 634 with respect to the guide member 620 in the axial direction (left-right direction in FIG. 52) is regulated by abutting the overhanging portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 on the facing surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624. it can.

In this case, the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 are formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634). Therefore, the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 and the outer peripheral surfaces of the central transmission member 634 can be circumscribed (that is, point-contacted) with each other, so that the contact area between them can be reduced. As a result, the frictional resistance when the central transmission member 634 rotates can be reduced. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

Further, by adopting a structure for holding the outer edge side (overhanging portion 634b) of the central transmission member 634 in this way, the central recessed portion of the central transmission member 634 is pivoted to the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610. Since it is not necessary to support the pitcher and a space for arranging the parts for the shaft support is not required, a space for arranging the pitching device 650, which will be described later, can be secured accordingly.

Next, the operation of the drive mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a front view of the case member 610 and the drive mechanism 630, and shows a state in which the central transmission member 634 is viewed in cross section.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the drive mechanism 630, the central transmission member 634 is arranged at a position concentric with the axis O which is the center of rotation of the rotating member 640, and the second transmission is performed on the gear 634a of the central transmission member 634. The gear 633b and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c are arranged in a meshed state. The third distribution gears 635c and 636c are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase (that is, positions that face each other with the axis O in between).

Therefore, when the drive motor 631 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to the second transmission gear 633b via the pinion gear 632 and the first transmission gear 633a, and is centered with the rotation of the second transmission gear 633b. The transmission member 634 is rotated.

When the central transmission member 634 is rotated, the pair of first distribution gears 635a and 636a are rotated along with the rotation of the central transmission member 634, and the rotations are the second distribution gears 635b and 636b and the third distribution. It is transmitted to the gears 637a and 638a (see FIG. 48) of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 via the gears 635c and 636c, and the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 rotate. Will be done.

In this way, the central transmission gear 634 is meshed with the first distribution gear 635a and the second distribution gear 636a. Therefore, by rotating the central transmission gear 634 with the rotational driving force of the drive motor 631, the one-side rotation drive member The 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 can be rotated in a synchronized state. As a result, the drive of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

In this case, since the central transmission gear 634 is arranged concentrically with the axial center O of the rotating member 640, the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and other-side rotating drive members 637, 638 are viewed in the axial center O direction. In the above, it can be arranged inward (on the axial center O direction side) from the outer edge portion of the rotating member 640. That is, since the central transmission gear 634 and the rotation drive members 637 and 638 on one side and the other side do not protrude outward from the outer shape of the rotation member 640, the size can be reduced accordingly.

In the state where the guide member 620 is arranged on the case member 610, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are radially outward from the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. The 638b is exposed (see FIG. 49), and the engaged portion 641 in the split member DV of the rotating member 640 can be engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b. Therefore, by rotating the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement of the engaging portions 637b, 638b and the engaged portion 641. The rotating member 640 can be rotated.

In this case, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase (that is, positions that face each other with the axis O in between). Therefore, as will be described later, the position (engagement position) for applying the driving force to the rotating member 640 can be separated as much as possible to stabilize the rotation of the rotating member 640.

Further, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged in postures (rotation positions) in which the phases of the engaging portion 637b and the engaging portion 638b are different from each other. That is, in a state where one of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is not engaged with the engaged portion 641, the other of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is engaged with the engaged portion 641. (It is avoided that one and the other are disengaged at the same time). Therefore, as will be described later, it is possible to suppress the intermittent transmission of the driving force from the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 to the rotation member 640, and to stabilize the rotation of the rotation member 640.

It will be described back from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48. As described above, the rotating member 640 is a front view ring-shaped member that is rotated by receiving the driving force of the rotating mechanism 630, and is in a posture concentric with the central transmission member 634 and the guide member 620. It is arranged on the front side of the. In the present embodiment, the rotating member 640 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front. Here, the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60.

54 (a) is a front view of the rotating member 640, and FIG. 54 (b) is a side view of the rotating member 640 in the direction of the arrow LIVb of FIG. 54 (a). Further, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the rotating member 640 in the direction of arrow LV in FIG. 54 (b).

As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the rotating member 640 includes a plurality of (30 in this embodiment) dividing member DVs, and the plurality of dividing member DVs are connected to each other in an endless manner along the circumferential direction. As a result, it is formed in an annular shape in the front view.

In this case, the plurality of split member DVs are formed so that the distance between the plurality of split member DVs can be changed. That is, in the rotating member 640, there is a first section S1 in which the dividing members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval, and a second interval in which the dividing members DV are narrower than the first interval. A second section S2 connected in the circumferential direction is formed at. Between the first section S1 and the second section S2, the interval between the dividing members DV changes from the first interval in the first section S1 to the second interval in the second section S2 (or vice versa). A section is formed.

FIG. 56 (a) is a front perspective view of the split member DV, and FIG. 56 (b) is a rear perspective view of the split member DV. Further, FIG. 57 is an exploded front perspective view of the split member DV, and FIG. 58 is an exploded rear perspective view of the split member DV. In addition, in FIGS. 56 to 58, in order to understand the connecting structure of the dividing member DVs, the connecting link member 644 of the adjacent dividing members DV is schematically illustrated by using the alternate long and short dash line.

Here, in the present embodiment, the detected portion 641c is formed in the divided member DV of a part (15 in the present embodiment) of the plurality of divided member DVs, while the remaining divided member DVs The formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. The split member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed and the split member DV in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted have the same other configurations except for the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c. Therefore, in the following, the split member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed will be described, and the description of the split member DV in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the split member DV includes an engaged portion 641, a back side main body 642 in which the engaged portion 641 is arranged on the back side, and a front side of the back side main body 642. The front side main body 643 is arranged in, the connecting link member 644 whose base end side is rotatably supported between the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643, and the front side main body 643. It is displaceably arranged between the plate holding member 645 to be displaced, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 displaceably held by the plate holding member 645, and the front main body 643 and the plate holding member 645. It is mainly composed of an undulating link member 648.

As described above, the engaged portion 641 is a portion that is engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotational drive members 637 and 638 of the drive mechanism 630, and is formed in a substantially isosceles right triangle shape in the front view. The rear side main body 642 is arranged so as to project from the back surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 56B).

On the mounting surface side of the engaged portion 641 to the back side main body 642, an opposing portion 641a is formed between the engaged portion 641 and the back surface of the back side main body 642 at a predetermined interval, and the opposing portion 641a and the back side main body are formed. The outer edge portion of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the surfaces facing the 642. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lifting of the split member DV (one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642) from the front of the guide member 620.

Further, a pair of sliding rollers 641b formed in a columnar shape are rotatably supported on the mounting surface side of the engaged portion 641 on the back surface side main body 642. The sliding roller 641b can make its rotation axis orthogonal to the back surface of the back surface side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the dividing member DV) and can bring its outer peripheral surface into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. Arranged in a posture. As a result, the sliding resistance when the dividing member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620 can be reduced.

On the other hand, a plate-shaped detected portion 641c is formed overhanging on the side opposite to the mounting surface of the engaged portion 641 on the back surface side main body 642. The detected portion 641c is a plate-shaped portion detected by the detection sensor 684 arranged on the guide member 680, and is in a horizontal posture on the back surface of the back surface side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the dividing member DV). To.

The back surface of the back surface side main body 642 is placed on the front surface of the guide member 620, and is a portion that slides on the front surface of the guide member 620 when the rotating member 640 is rotated, and is formed in a rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front. In the state where the rotating member 640 is arranged on the guide member 620, the back surface side main body 642 is arranged in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. That is, each back side main body portion 642 is arranged in a radial linear shape centered on the axis O (see FIG. 54).

The back side main body 642 has a groove-shaped opening 642a and an undulating link opening 642b extending linearly along the longitudinal direction, and the front surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 57). A shaft support portion 642c that is formed and pivotally supports the base end side of the connecting link member 644 with the front side main body 643 (shaft support portion 643b), and a bent portion that protrudes from the back surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 58). 642d and.

The connecting link opening 642a is an opening through which the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 of the adjacent split member DV is slidably inserted, and the split member is inserted by inserting the insertion portion 644a into the connecting link opening 642a. The DV can be connected to the adjacent split member DV via the connecting link member 644. Further, the connecting link member 644 inserts the tip of the insertion portion 644a inserted through the connecting link opening 642a into the connecting link action groove 621 of the guide member 620.

The opening width of the connecting link opening 642a is set to a size equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644. Therefore, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link 644 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connecting link opening 642a.

When the dividing member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 receives an action from the connection link action groove 621 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a opens the connection link opening 642a. By sliding along the line, it is possible to allow the posture of the connecting link member 644 to change with the action from the connecting link action groove 621. As a result, the posture of the connecting link member 644 with respect to the back side main body 642 can be generated, and the distance between the dividing members DV can be increased or decreased.

The undulating link opening 642b is an opening through which the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is slidably inserted, and the undulating link member 648 guides the tip of the insertion portion 648a inserted through the undulating link opening 642b. It is inserted through the undulating link action groove 622 of 620.

The opening width of the undulating link opening 642b is set to a size equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the undulating link opening 642b.

When the dividing member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 receives an action from the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 648a opens the undulating link opening 642b. The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 can be raised and lowered by sliding along the above.

As described above, the shaft support portion 642c is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 57) of the back side main body 642, so that the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is viewed from the engaged portion 641 in front view. It can be pivotally supported at overlapping positions. Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 is driven by the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotational drive members 637 and 638 and the split member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacements are adjacent to each other. It can be easily transmitted to the split member DV to be performed via the connecting link member 644.

The bent portion 642d is projected from the back surface of the back surface side main body 642 on the other side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 58), and the protruding tip thereof is opposed to the back surface of the back surface side main body 642 at a predetermined interval. The inner edge portion of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the bent portion of the protruding tip and the facing surface of the back surface side main body 642. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lifting of the split member DV (the other side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642) from the front of the guide member 620.

Further, the bent portion 642d is arranged so that its base can be brought into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the inner edge of the guide member 620, and the distance between the base of the bent portion 642d and the sliding roller 641b described above is increased. The size is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the radial width of the guide member 620. As a result, the displacement of the dividing member DV in the radial direction of the guide member 620 can be regulated, so that the main body member DV (rear side main body 642) remains in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. Therefore, the guide member 620 can be displaced in the circumferential direction.

The front side main body 643 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view having substantially the same size as the back side main body 642, and is an undulation which is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction. A shaft support portion 643b formed on the back surface of one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 58) and supporting the base end side of the connecting link member 644 between the link slide groove 643a and the back side main body 642 (shaft support portion 642c). , A support plate 643c that is projected from the front and rotatably supports the partition plate 647.

The undulating link slide groove 643a is a linear groove in which the undulating link member 648 is slidably arranged, and extends in parallel with the undulating link opening 642b. That is, the undulating link member 648 is slid along the undulating link slide groove 643a to slide the insertion portion 648a along the undulating link opening 642b.

The width dimension of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 is smaller in the width dimension on the other side in the longitudinal direction than in the width dimension on the one side in the longitudinal direction in the front view. That is, it is formed in a front view wedge shape in which the width dimension of the portion located on the inner peripheral side is smaller than the width dimension of the portion located on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640. Therefore, the second interval in the second section S2 can be made smaller so that the divided members DV can be brought close to each other, and the space required for arranging the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In the second embodiment, in the second section S2, the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 are brought into contact with the adjacent back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 in the circumferential direction (see FIGS. 54 and 73). ..

The connecting link member 644 is a long member, and the base end side is rotatably supported by the shaft support portions 642c and 643b of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643, and a columnar insertion portion is provided on the front end side. 644a is formed. The insertion portion 644a is projected in a posture parallel to the rotation axis of the connecting link member 644, and as described above, the connecting link of the guide member 620 is provided through the connecting link opening 642a of the back side main body 642 in the adjacent split member DV. It is inserted into the working groove 621.

The diameter of the insertion portion 644a is set to be substantially the same as or slightly smaller than the groove width of the connecting link opening 642a and the connecting link working groove 621. Therefore, during the rotation of the rotating member 640, the displacement of the split member DV with respect to the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link 644 can be suppressed to a minimum, and the distance between the split member DVs can be easily maintained constant. As a result, the positional variation of the detected portion 641c can be suppressed, so that the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684 (see FIG. 71) can be improved.

The base end side (that is, the shaft support portions 642c and 643b of each main body 642 and 643) rotatably supported by the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 of the connecting link member 644 is from the connecting link opening 642a. Is also arranged at a position close to the engaged portion 641. In the present embodiment, the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is arranged at a position overlapping the engaged portion 641 in the front view (viewing in the axial center O direction of the rotating member 640).

As a result, the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 are engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV, and the rotation of the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 causes the engaging portions 641. When the split member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement of the split member DV can be easily transmitted to the adjacent split member DV via the connecting link member 644. As a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

The undulating link member 648 is a member that is slidably held in the undulating link slide groove 643a of the front body 643, and has a columnar insertion portion 648a formed on the back side and an action groove 648b on the front side. It is formed. The insertion portion 648a is projected in a posture parallel to the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644, and as described above, is formed in the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 via the undulating link opening 642b of the back side main body 642. It is inserted.

The action groove 648b is a portion for undulating the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 by acting on the actuated portion 646d of the display plate 646 by sliding displacement of the undulation link member 648, and is a portion of the undulation link member 648. It is formed in a groove shape extending linearly along the slide direction, and the actuated portion 646d of the display plate 646 is slidably inserted between the facing surfaces of the groove-shaped portion.

The display plate 646 has a plate portion 646a formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view, a shaft portion 646b and a connecting shaft 646c formed on one side of the plate portion 646a, and an action groove 648b of the undulating link member 648 facing each other. It is provided with a plate-shaped actuated portion 646d to be inserted between the surfaces. Since the acted portion 646d is formed by bending in a substantially S shape in front view, when the undulating link member 648 is slidably displaced, the acted portion 646d is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement. The display plate 646 can be rotated around the shaft portion 646b as the center of rotation.

The partition plate 647 is formed on a plate-shaped plate portion 647a formed in a front view trap shape, a pair of shaft portions 647b formed on one side of the plate portion 647a, and a pair of shaft portions 647b on the same side as the pair of shaft portions 647b. It is provided with a shaft support portion 647c that is formed and rotatably supports the connecting shaft 646c of the display plate 646.

Here, as described above, the rotating unit 600 is an effect device configured to imitate a roulette wheel in which a plurality of pockets rotate a wheel in which a plurality of pockets are connected in the circumferential direction and a thrown ball is dropped into one of the pockets. The space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 of the partition member DV of 1 and the partition plate 647 of the adjacent division member DV is used as a pocket, and the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) is red. Alternatively, a black color is added and different numbers (1 to 29) are displayed for each.

In the present embodiment, the display board 646 of 1 is colored green and a predetermined mark (star shape) is displayed. Further, as for the rotating member 640, only the display plate 646 located in the first section S1 is visible to the player. That is, the display board 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member arranged on the front side thereof, and is invisible to the player.

The plate holding member 645 includes a shaft support portion 645a that rotatably supports the shaft portion 646b of the display plate 646, and a shaft support portion 645b that rotatably supports the shaft portion 647b of the partition plate 647, and each of these shaft support portions. The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are rotatably supported on the upper surface side (front side) of the front side main body 643 by the shaft support by 645a and 645b.

In this case, since the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, the display plate 646 is rotated around the shaft portion 646b with the sliding displacement of the undulating link member 648. Then, the rotation is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, and the partition plate 647 is rotated around the shaft portion 647b. The rotation of the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

59 (a) and 59 (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the dividing member DV in the state of being arranged in the first section S1, and FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b) are views. It is a top perspective view and the bottom perspective view of the split member DV in the state of being arranged in the 2nd section S2. In addition, in FIGS. 59 and 60, in order to facilitate understanding, a state in which a part of the configuration is seen through is shown, and the connecting link member 644, the detected portion 641c, and the bent portion 642d are omitted. As shown in FIG. 59, in the state where the dividing member DV is arranged in the first section S1, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is formed in the small diameter portion 622b (see FIG. 50) of the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620. It is inserted. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slid-displaced to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the inner peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the axial center O side). As a result, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is arranged in the horizontal posture, while the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is arranged in the upright posture.

The horizontal posture is a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is parallel to the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the dividing member DV), and the standing posture is the plate of the partition plate 647. The portion 647a is in a posture of being orthogonally parallel to the back surface of the back surface side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the dividing member DV).

As shown in FIG. 60, in the state where the dividing member DV is arranged in the second section S2, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 has a large diameter portion 622a in the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 (see FIG. 50). Is inserted into. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slid-displaced on one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the outer peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the side opposite to the axis O). As a result, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted from the horizontal posture to the plate portion 647a side of the partition plate 647 and arranged in the inclined posture, and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is moved from the standing posture. The display plate 646 is tilted toward the plate portion 646a and arranged in an inclined posture.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c. Therefore, the display plate 646 is rotated by the sliding displacement of the undulating link member 648. The partition plate 647 can also be rotated via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c.

As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide the undulating link action groove and the undulating link member for each of the mechanism for rotating the display plate 646 and the mechanism for rotating the partition plate 647, and the undulations in both mechanisms. The link action groove and the undulating link member can be shared. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

Here, in the present embodiment, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is heavier than the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647. Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 60 (that is, the state in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is tilted downward), the state shown in FIG. 59 (that is, the display). When the plate portion 646a of the plate 646 is in the horizontal posture and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is in the upright posture), the rotational action of the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) is used. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and quickly.

That is, since the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward, it can form a horizontal posture by being rotated by its own weight in the direction of being tilted downward, and the rotation of the display plate 646 (own weight). Is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, so that the partition plate 647 can be lifted to form an upright posture. Therefore, even when the rotation is hindered by the adhesion of dirt, dust, etc., the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and quickly.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is set so that the overhang length of the plate portion 646a from the shaft portion 646b is larger than the overhang length of the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 from the shaft portion 647b. Therefore, the center of gravity of the display plate 646 in the plate portion 646a can be separated from the shaft portion 646b, and the center of gravity of the partition plate 647 in the plate portion 647a can be brought close to the shaft portion 647b. As a result, the state shown in FIG. 59 is formed. Can be performed more reliably and quickly by utilizing the weight of the display board 646.

It will be described back from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48. The pitching device 650 is a device for throwing a ball B into the rotating member 640, is housed in a central recess in the central transmission member 634 of the drive mechanism 630, and is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640. Here, the pitching device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 69.

61 and 62 are exploded front perspective views of the pitching device 650. In addition, in FIG. 62, the state in which the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670 is attached to the case body 651 is shown, and the passage member 655 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the pitching device 650 includes a case body 651 formed in a container shape with an open front side, an arm rotation mechanism 660 disposed inside the case body 651, and a holding piece infestation. It mainly includes a mechanism 670, a passage member 655 arranged on the front side of the case body 651, and a sphere B formed in a spherical shape from a translucent material.

The case body 651 has a substantially circular bottom wall portion 651a in front view, a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 651b erected from the bottom wall portion 651a toward the front, and a radially outer surface from the outer peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b. It is provided with an overhanging wall portion 651c formed by projecting in a flange shape toward the direction, and the overhanging wall portion 651c is fastened and fixed to the back side of the guide member 620, whereby the vertical tip (opening portion) of the outer wall portion 651b is provided. Is arranged at a position substantially aligned with the front surface of the rotating member 640 (plate portion 646a of the display plate 646).

A ball holding portion 652 is arranged in front of the bottom wall portion 651a. A spherical recess having a size corresponding to the outer diameter of the sphere B is formed on the front surface of the sphere holding portion 652, and the recess is used as a holding position (initial position) of the sphere B. That is, when the sphere B is arranged on the sphere holding portion 652, the sphere B is held between the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b and the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 (see FIG. 44).

In this case, the pitching device 650 is arranged in a posture in which the holding piece 677 of the holding piece infestation mechanism 670 is located at the lowermost position, and when the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is rotated, the ball B becomes an outer wall portion. The inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral passage 651c1) of 651b is rolled and held on the holding piece 677 at the protruding position of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670 (see FIG. 68). Here, the arm rotation mechanism 660 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65.

FIG. 63 is an exploded front perspective view of the arm rotation mechanism 660. Further, FIG. 64 is a front view of the pitching device 660 in a state where the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is arranged at the holding position, and FIG. 65 shows the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 arranged at the separated position. It is a front view of the pitching device 660 in the state of being In addition, in FIGS. 64 and 65, a state in which the front case 662 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is removed is shown for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, the arm rotation mechanism 660 includes a rear case 661 arranged on the bottom wall portion 651a of the case body 651, a front case 662 arranged on the front surface of the back case 661, and the front case 662. It includes a crank member 663 and an arm member 664 that are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the rear case 661 and the front case 662, and a drive motor 665 and a pinion gear 666 for driving the crank member 663 and the arm member 664. ..

The shafts 661a and 661b are projected from the rear case 661, and the crank member 663 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661a and the arm member 664 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661b. A gear 663a to which a pinion gear 676 is meshed is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the crank member 663, and a pin portion 663b is projected at a position eccentric from the center of rotation (shaft 661a). Further, in the arm member 664, a sliding groove 664a through which the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 is slidably inserted is extended in a straight line, and the center of rotation (shaft 661b) with respect to the sliding groove 664a. ) Is formed on the opposite side of the ring, and a front-view curved portion 664b is formed by dividing the ring shape in half.

Therefore, the drive motor 665 is rotationally driven in the forward or reverse direction, the crank member 663 is rotated via the rotation of the pinion gear 666 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 655, and the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 is rotated. By acting on the sliding groove 664a of the arm member 664, the arm member 664 can be rotated in one direction or the other direction with the shaft 661b as the center of rotation.

That is, the arm member 664 holds the curved portion 664b at a holding position (see FIG. 64) for holding the sphere B on the sphere holding portion 652 along the outer peripheral portion of the sphere holding portion 652, and holds the curved portion 664b on the sphere. It is possible to rotate (swing) with a separation position (see FIG. 65) at which the ball B is separated from the portion 652 and the ball B is dropped from the ball holding portion 652 to the inner peripheral passage 651c1.

In the present embodiment, a part of the inner peripheral surface of the curved portion 664b (a range of a central angle of approximately 90 degrees on the side (lower side) separated from the shaft 661b) is formed by the cantilever plate 664c. The cantilever plate 664c is a plate-like body that curves along the inner peripheral surface of the curved portion 664b, and a shaft 664c1 provided on the base end side thereof is rotatably supported by the curved portion 664b and is supported on the tip side. It is maintained in a posture of being lifted upward (inward in the radial direction) by the elastic force of the leaf spring 667a of the limit switch 667 arranged on the back surface side (outer peripheral surface side) of the limit switch 667.

Therefore, when the ball B is held by the ball holding portion 652 while the arm member 664 is arranged at the holding position, the cantilever plate 664c is pushed down with the shaft 664c1 as the center of rotation by the weight of the ball B. When the ball B is not held by the ball holding portion 652 while the limit switch 667 is turned on, the cantilever plate 664c is in the lifted posture as described above, and the limit switch 667 is turned off. As a result, the presence or absence of the ball B in the ball holding portion 652 can be detected.

In this case, the curved portion 664b of the arm member 664 and the recess of the ball holding portion 652 are formed in a size that allows the ball B to be displaced while the arm member 664 is arranged at the holding position. That is, the inner diameter of the curved portion 664b and the inner diameter of the recess of the sphere holding portion 652 are made larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is hit or shaken by the player and an external force (vibration) is input, the ball B can be displaced according to the input of the vibration. That is, when the sphere B is displaced (vibrated), the cantilever plate 664c can be displaced and the limit switch 667 can be turned on / off according to the vibration. As a result, by monitoring the state of the limit switch 667, it is possible to detect the input of an external force to the pachinko machine 10 by using the arm rotation mechanism 660.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 61 and 62. As described above, when the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is rotated to the separated position, the sphere B is rolled on the inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral passage 651c1) of the outer wall portion 651b, and the holding piece infestation mechanism 670 It is held on the holding piece 677 in the protruding position (see FIG. 68). In the holding piece retracting mechanism 670, the holding piece 677 is formed so as to be retractable between the protruding position and the immersion position, and when the holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersion position, the sphere B is formed into a plurality of rotating members 640. The pitch is thrown on any of the dividing member DVs (display board 646) of the above. Here, the holding piece infestation mechanism 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69.

FIG. 66 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670 when the holding piece 677 is arranged at the protruding position, and FIG. 67 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670 when the holding piece 677 is arranged at the immersion position. It is an exploded front perspective view of.

FIG. 68 (a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is arranged at a protruding position, and FIG. 68 (b) is a holding taken along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb of FIG. 68 (a). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the single-sided appearance mechanism 670. Further, FIG. 69 (a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is arranged at the immersion position, and FIG. 69 (b) is a line LXIXb-LXIXb of FIG. 69 (a). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the holding piece infestation mechanism 670 in.

As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670 is formed by being curved in an arc shape along the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651, and is arranged on the bottom wall portion 651a of the case body 651. A back case 671, a front case 672 arranged in front of the back case 671, a slide member 673 held so as to be slidable between the facing surfaces of the back case 671 and the front case 672, and a slide member thereof. It includes a drive motor 675 and a pinion gear 676 for driving the 673, and a holding piece 677 that appears and disappears with the slide displacement of the slide member 673.

The rear case 671 includes two sets of one-to-one sets of roller members 674 that are arranged to face each other at predetermined intervals, and holds the slide member 673 so as to be slidable between the facing sets of the roller members 674. Further, the rear case 671 includes a sliding base 671a having a rectangular plate shape in a top view formed by projecting from one end side (lower portion) in the circumferential direction toward the front side, and the upper surface of the sliding base 671a and the front base 672. Guides the slide displacement (protrusion to the front side and immersion to the back side) of the holding piece 677 with and from the lower surface (outer peripheral surface) of the holding piece.

A pin portion 673a protrudes from one end side (lower portion) in the circumferential direction of the slide member 673, and a rack gear 673b to which a pinion gear 676 is meshed is provided on the inner peripheral surface on the other end side (information portion) in the circumferential direction. It is engraved along. Further, a sliding groove 677a through which the pin portion 673a of the slide member 673 is slidably inserted is bent and extended in a substantially Z shape in the holding piece 677. That is, one end side (right side of FIG. 66) of the sliding groove 677a is offset to the front side of the other end side (left side of FIG. 66).

Therefore, the drive motor 675 is rotationally driven in the forward or reverse direction, and the pinion gear 676 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 675 is rotated to slide and displace the slide member 673 via the rack gear 673b, and slide the slide member 673. By acting the pin portion 673a of the member 673 on the sliding groove 677a of the holding piece 677, the holding piece 677 can be projected to the front side or immersed in the back side. That is, the holding piece 677 can be slidably displaced between the protruding position protruding toward the front side (see FIG. 68) and the immersion position immersed toward the back side (see FIG. 69).

Here, the upper surface of the holding piece 677 is located on the back side (right side of FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)) and is the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651 (that is, the inner peripheral passage 651c1). A curved surface 677b that is concentrically curved and smoothly connected to the inner peripheral passage 651c1 in the circumferential direction, and is connected to the edge of the curved surface 677b and heads toward the front side (left side of FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)). An ascending inclined surface 677c that is ascended according to the above, and a descending inclined surface 677d that is connected to the edge of the ascending inclined surface 677c and is ascended toward the front side are formed.

Therefore, in the state where the holding piece 677 is arranged at the protruding position (see FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b)), the holding piece 677 is dropped from the ball holding portion 652 and rolled on the inner peripheral passage 651c1 to bend the holding piece 677. The ball B that has reached the surface 677b is restricted from rolling to the front side (left side in FIG. 68 (b)) by the ascending inclination of the ascending inclined surface 677c, and is held on the holding piece 677 (curved surface 677b). Can be done.

On the other hand, when the holding piece 677 is immersed in the back side from this protruding position and placed in the immersive position (see FIGS. 69 (a) and 69 (b)), the front of the front case 672 causes the back side (FIG. 69 (b)). ) The ball B whose movement to the right side) is restricted to move over the ascending inclined surface 677c and is positioned on the descending inclined surface 677d as the holding piece 677 is displaced in the immersion direction (back surface side). As a result, the ball B can be rolled along the downward inclination of the descending inclined surface 677d, and the ball B can be thrown to the front side (divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

Since both sides of the curved surface 677b are smoothly connected to the inner peripheral passage 651c1, the ball B that has been dropped from the ball holding portion 652 and rolled on one of the inner peripheral passages 651c1 is curved by the holding piece 677. It can pass over the surface 677b and roll to the other inner peripheral passage 651c1. That is, the sphere B can be reciprocated between the inner peripheral passage 651c1 on one side in the circumferential direction and the inner peripheral passage 651c1 on the other side in the circumferential direction via the curved surface 677b. Further, since the curved surface 677b of the holding piece 677 is located below the inner peripheral passage 651c1, when the momentum of the sphere B is lost and the rolling is converged, the sphere B is positioned on the curved surface 677b. Can be made to.

It returns to FIG. 61 and will be described. As described above, the passage member 655 is arranged on the front side of the case body 651. The passage member 655 is located on the front side of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670, and the ball B thrown by the immersion operation (immersion to the immersion position) of the holding piece 677 is divided into the rotating member 640. The plate 646) includes a throwing passage 655a which is a passage for throwing a ball onto the plate 646) and a return passage 655b which is a passage for returning the ball B thrown from the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 to the ball holding portion 652.

The throwing passage 655a has a substantially U-shaped groove portion 655a1 having substantially the same width dimension as the descending inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece infestation mechanism 670 and extending to the front side, and the front surface from the groove portion 655a1. The front portion 655a2 which is connected to the side edge portion and is substantially flush with the display plate 646 in the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640, and the front portion 655a2 which is erected from both sides in the width direction and is formed in the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640. A pair of facing portions 655a3 facing each other at substantially the same spacing as the facing spacing of the partition plates 647 are provided.

Therefore, when the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is immersed in the immersion position, the sphere B that is rolled on the descending inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 is received by the groove portion 655a1 and the extending direction of the groove portion 655a1. By rolling along the line, the ball B can be thrown while suppressing rattling.

Further, since the front portion 655a2 is flush with the display plate 646 of the dividing member DV and the facing distance between the pair of facing portions 655a3 is substantially the same as the facing distance of the dividing member DV partition plate 647, the pitch is thrown. The formed sphere B can be smoothly arranged on the display board 646 of the dividing member DV. When the ball B is thrown, the rotating member 640 is stopped at a phase (rotational position) at which the partition plate 647 of the dividing member DV coincides with the facing portion 655a3 based on the detection result by the detection sensor 684 described later.

The return passage 655b has a rolling portion 655b1 as a rolling surface that rolls to the downstream side when the ball B sent from the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 is received on the upstream side, and the rolling portion 655b1 on the downstream side. It is provided with an erection portion 655b2 which is formed to be erected and curved so as to direct the rolling direction of the sphere B toward the back surface side.

In the front view of the pitching device 650, the rolling portion 655b1 is arranged on the inner peripheral side edge portion of the rotating member 640 on the upstream side and on the front side of the ball holding portion 652b on the downstream side. Further, the rolling portion 6551b1 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the upstream side to the downstream side and downwardly inclined toward the ball holding portion 652 on the downstream side.

The sphere B placed on the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 and conveyed in the circumferential direction with the rotation of the rotating member 640 is within the radial direction due to the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b of the guide member 680 described later. When the ball is pushed toward the upstream side of the return passage 655b, the ball B is rolled to the downstream side of the rolling portion 655b1 and dropped to the ball holding portion 652 while being guided by the upright portion 655b2. To.

It will be described back from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48. As described above, the guide member 680 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640. The guide member 680 is a member arranged along the lower portion of the rotating member 640, and guides the sphere B on the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 during transportation accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 640 (that is,). The sphere B is supported from below), and a detection sensor 684 for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 is held. Here, the guide member 680 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71.

FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the guide member 680, and FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the guide member 680. As shown in FIG. 70, the guide member 680 includes a base portion 681 disposed on the case member 610, a plate-shaped transmission plate 682 disposed on the front side of the base portion 681, and a back surface side of the transmission plate 682. The cantilever plate 683 arranged in the base portion 681 and a plurality of detection sensors 684 (six in the present embodiment) arranged in the base portion 681 are mainly provided.

The base portion 681 is a member formed by dividing the annular shape at a central angle of approximately 120 degrees (that is, a shape curved in a front view arc shape), and a guide surface 681a is formed on the inner peripheral surface side thereof. .. The guide surface 681a is arranged on the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member 640, and faces the sphere B arranged on the dividing member DV (that is, the space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647). That is, the ball B that is arranged on the split member DV of the rotating member 640 and is conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 is supported from below.

Further, on the inner peripheral surface side of the base portion 681, a return guide 681b connected to the downstream side (right side in FIG. 70) of the guide surface 681a is formed. The return guide 681b is a portion for sending the ball B conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 to the return passage 655b of the passage member 655, is formed to have a width dimension smaller than that of the guide surface 681a, and is formed in the radial direction. By being formed in a shape protruding inward, the rotating member 640 is disposed so as to face the dividing member DV (display plate 646) (see FIGS. 43 and 44).

Therefore, when the sphere B placed on the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 is conveyed in the circumferential direction with the rotation of the rotating member 640, the return guide is provided by the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) of the dividing member DV. The sphere B is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of 681b. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is further rotated, the sphere B is pushed out radially inward by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b, and is conveyed to the upstream side of the return passage 655b.

Here, even if the formation of the return guide 681b is omitted, if the rotating member 640 is rotated to a position where the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) is tilted downward toward the return passage 655b, the partition plate is formed. The ball B can be dropped into the return passage 655b along the downward slope of 647. However, in this case, since the ball B is conveyed upward by the time the ball B starts rolling due to its own weight, the drop position when the ball B is dropped becomes higher, and the partition plate 647 Since the ball B is rolled along the downward inclination and then dropped, the momentum when the ball B falls is large. Therefore, the return passage 655b may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, by providing the return guide 681b, the drop position when the ball B is dropped into the return passage 655b can be lowered, and the ball B slides on the return guide 681b. Since the ball is thrown to the return passage 655b while being carried, the throwing speed can be weakened. As a result, damage to the return passage 655b can be suppressed.

The transmission plate 682 is a portion facing the dividing member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 at a predetermined interval (interval in which the sphere B can be held), and a part of the upper edge side portion in the center in the width direction is formed. The passage member 655 is extended upward to a position facing the throwing passage 655a (front portion 655a2). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball B thrown from the pitching device 650 into the split member DV of the rotating member 640 from jumping out.

Further, the transmission plate 682 is not only the dividing member DV into which the ball B is thrown (that is, the dividing member DV having the same phase as the front portion 655a2 of the throwing passage 655a), but also the downstream side of the dividing member DV (of the ball B). Since the split member DV adjacent to the (downstream side in the transport direction) is also formed to have a size (width dimension) that allows it to partially face each other, the rampage of the ball B thrown from the throwing passage 655a can be caused by the transmission plate 682. It is possible to easily converge between them, and the ball B can be stably conveyed to the return guide 681b.

On the other hand, the transmission plate 682 has a size (width dimension) capable of facing the split member DV on which the ball B is thrown and the split member DV adjacent to the downstream side of the split member DV, and the split member DV to be thrown. And the split member DV located on the downstream side of the adjacent split member DV is not faced. That is, the ball B can be exposed between the edge of the transmission plate 682 on the downstream side in the transport direction (right side in FIG. 70) and the return guide 681b, so that the player can visually recognize the transport of the ball B. It can be done easily.

Since the transmission plate 682 is entirely formed of a light-transmitting material, the player can see through the member or the ball B located on the back surface side thereof. Therefore, the thrown ball B passes through the throwing passage 655a and is dropped between the display plate 647 of the dividing member DV and the transmission plate 682 facing each other, and is supported by the guide surface 681a by the rotation of the rotating member 640. The player can visually recognize a series of modes of transportation.

The cantilever plate 683 is a member that forms the inner peripheral surface of the base portion 681 together with the guide surface 681a, and is formed as a plate-like body that curves along the guide surface 681a (that is, the inner peripheral surface of the base portion 681). One end side of the cantilever plate 683 is rotatably supported by a shaft 685 on the base portion 681, and the other end side in the circumferential direction is rotatably supported by the elastic force of a leaf spring of a limit switch (not shown) arranged on the base portion 681. It is maintained in a lifted position upward (inward in the radial direction).

In the posture in which the other end side of the cantilever plate 683 in the circumferential direction is lifted upward, the limit switch is turned off, and when the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640, the ball B Due to the weight, the cantilever plate 683 is pushed down with the shaft 685 as the center of rotation, and the limit switch is turned on. Thereby, it can be detected that the ball B thrown from the pitching device 650 is arranged at an appropriate position (divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

On the other hand, when the sphere B is conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 and the weight of the sphere B acting on the cantilever plate 683 is equal to or less than a predetermined value, the cantilever plate 683 is lifted as described above. Is returned to, and the limit switch is turned off.

The detection sensor 684 is a sensor device for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640, and is formed as a non-contact sensor in which the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion are arranged to face each other, and the detection region (light emitting portion and the light receiving portion) thereof. The facing spaces of the portions) are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction while being positioned on the movement locus of the detected portion 641c of the dividing member DV in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54). The interval between the detection sensors 684 is set to be the same as the interval between the dividing members DV (detected portion 641c) in the first section S1 (first interval).

Therefore, a plurality of (six in this embodiment) dividing member DVs adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction can be arranged at positions corresponding to the detection sensors 684, and the rotating members 640 correspond to a predetermined amount (that is, the first interval). Each time the rotation amount) is rotated, the split member DV detected by each detection sensor 684 can be shifted in the circumferential direction.

In this case, as described above, the detected portion 641c is formed in the divided member DV of a part (15 in the present embodiment) of the plurality of divided member DV, while the remaining divided member DV is formed. The formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. Therefore, in the detection sensor 684 in which the dividing member DV on which the detected portion 641c is formed is arranged, the light received by the light receiving portion of the light emitted from the light emitting portion is blocked by the detected portion 641c, and the detection signal is turned off. The detection sensor 684 in which the dividing member DV on which the detected portion 641c is not formed can receive the light emitted from the light emitting portion by the light receiving portion, and the detection signal is turned on (see FIG. 76). As a result, as will be described later, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected based on the combination of the detection results of each detection sensor 684.

In the present embodiment, two detection results (on / off) based on the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c of the dividing member DV are performed by the six detection sensors 684, respectively, so 64 (= 2 to the 6th power). Street combinations can be formed. In this case, since the number of the split member DVs arranged is 30, as will be described later, the detection sensor 684 detects which of the plurality of split member DVs the split member DV is located at the reference position. It can always be determined based on the result.

Next, the operation of the rotating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 77. First, the operation of changing the interval between the dividing members DV when the rotating member 640 is rotated will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73.

FIG. 72 is a front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640. 73 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640 in the first section S1, and FIG. 73 (b) is a partial enlarged front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640 in the second section S2. It is an enlarged front view.

In addition, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, only the back side main body 642, the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648 among the components of the dividing member DV are shown in FIGS. 72 and 73. In addition, FIG. 73 shows a state in which the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 are hatched.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the rotating member 640 is a member rotatably formed with the axis O as the center of rotation (that is, along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620), and is a plurality of dividing members DV. Is formed in an endless shape in which the above are connected in the circumferential direction. That is, in each dividing member DV, the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is rotatably supported by the back side main body 642, while the insertion portion 644a on the tip end side of the connecting link member 644 is adjacent to the back side of the split member DV. It is inserted into the connecting link action groove 621 through the connecting link opening 642a in the main body 642.

As described above, in the back side main body 642 of the split member DV, the sliding roller 641b on one side in the longitudinal direction and the bent portion 642 on the other side in the longitudinal direction are in contact with the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the guide member 620. When the guide member 620 is moved in the circumferential direction, the posture with respect to the guide member 620 radiates from the posture in which the axis O is located on the extension line in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (that is, the axis O is the center). It is maintained in a linear posture). That is, only movement while maintaining that posture is allowed.

In this case, the large-diameter portion 621a of the connecting link action groove 621 is formed at a position closer to the base end side (rotatably axially supported side) of the connecting link member 644 than the small-diameter portion 621b. In a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the working groove 621 (see FIG. 73A), the connecting link member 644 is tilted with respect to the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642. As a result, the back side main bodies 642 can be separated from each other. That is, the distance between the dividing members DV (rear side main body 642) in the first section S1 can be set to a large distance (first distance).

On the other hand, since the small diameter portion 621b of the connecting link action groove 621 is formed at a position farther from the base end side (rotatably axially supported side) of the connecting link member 644 than the large diameter portion 621a, such connecting link action In a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is inserted into the small diameter portion 621b of the groove 621 (see FIG. 73B), the connecting link member 644 is placed on the back surface in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642. The side main bodies 642 can be brought close to each other. That is, the distance between the dividing members DV (rear side main body 642) in the second section S2 can be set to a small distance (second distance).

Here, the rotating member 640 is an effect device formed by imitating a roulette wheel as described above, and identification information such as numbers and marks is displayed on the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a). That is, the effect is performed by making the player visually recognize the identification information to be displayed on the display board 646. Therefore, considering the visibility of the player, it is preferable that the display board 646 (display of identification information) is large, and in order to secure variations in the effect, the number of display boards 646 (display of identification information) It is preferable that there are many types).

In this case, in consideration of the visibility of the player, the display of the identification information (that is, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646) needs to have a certain size or more, and the size is maintained. However, if the number of identification information displayed (the number of display boards 646) is increased, the diameter of the rotating member 640 becomes large and the rotating member 640 cannot be accommodated in the predetermined arrangement space, while the rotating member 640 is accommodated in the predetermined space. If the diameter is reduced, the number of identification information displayed (the number of display boards 646) is reduced, and it becomes impossible to secure variations in the effect.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first section S1 in which the dividing member DVs are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval and the interval narrower than the first interval in the first section S1 are set. As described above, the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) located in the first section S1 can be formed on the rotating member 640 with the second section S2 in which the dividing member DV is connected in the circumferential direction at intervals of 2. Visualize to the player (the display board 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member).

Therefore, as compared with the case where the plurality of divided member DVs are all connected at the first interval, the length of the rotating member 640 in the circumferential direction can be shortened, and the space required for arranging the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. At the same time, the display number of the identification information (that is, the display board 646) can be increased while ensuring a certain size or more. As a result, it becomes impossible to secure the visibility of the player and the variation of the effect.

Here, in the first section S1, the split member DV is such a display board because the plate portion 646a of the display board 646 is arranged in a horizontal posture (a posture parallel to the moving plane of the split member DV) as described above. The identification information displayed on the 646 can be easily seen by the player.

On the other hand, in the second section S2, the split member DV is in a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display board 646 is in a posture in which the tip side is lifted from the horizontal posture in the first section S1 as described above. Interference with DV can be suppressed, and the dividing members DV can be brought closer to each other by that amount. That is, the interval (second interval) between the dividing members DV in the second section S2 can be narrowed. As a result, the length of the rotating member 640 in the circumferential direction can be shortened, and the space required for its arrangement can be suppressed.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is displaced (rotated) on the upper surface of the front main body 643, and in the second section S2, the plate portion 646a is placed on the adjacent dividing member DV (plate holding). It can be lifted above the upper surface of the member 645) (that is, at a position where it does not interfere) (see FIG. 54). Therefore, the split member DV can be brought close to the position where the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 come into contact with each other. That is, the second interval in the second section S2 can be made narrower. As a result, the length of the rotating member 640 in the circumferential direction can be shortened, and the space required for arranging the rotating member can be suppressed.

Next, the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by the driving mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. 74 (a) to 74 (d) are state transition diagrams for each time the one-side rotation drive member 637 is rotated by 30 degrees, and the one-side rotation drive member 637 viewed from the front is shown.

Note that FIGS. 74 (b), 74 (c) and 74 (d) correspond to states rotated by 30, 60 and 90 degrees from FIG. 74 (a), respectively. Further, in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the engaged portion 641 of the dividing member DV is shown in a cross-sectional view, and the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 has a two-dot chain line. Illustrated with.

Here, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are formed in the same shape as each other as described above. In the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by these, the same driving operation will be described only by the driving operation by the one-side rotating driving member 637, and the description of the driving operation by the other-side rotating driving member 638 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the movement locus of the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 is partially the same as the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV. It is arranged at an overlapping position, and at the overlapping portion, the engaging portion 637b is made rotatable in a state of being engaged with the engaged portion 641. The circular shape of the movement locus of the engaging portion 637b is an inscribed circle having a smaller diameter than the circular shape of the moving locus of the engaged portion 641.

When the one-side rotation drive member 637 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 53), the rotation is transmitted to the split member DV via the engagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641. The split member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the movement is transmitted to the adjacent split member DV via each connecting link member 644, so that the rotating member 640 rotates. Rotated in the direction.

In this case, as described above, the engaged portion 641 of the dividing member DV is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (see FIGS. 57 and 58). That is, the engaged portion 641 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640 formed in an annular shape. Therefore, the amount of rotation of the rotating member 640 with respect to the unit rotation amount of the one-side rotation drive member 637 can be reduced (the amount of rotation of the one-side rotation drive member 637 required to rotate the rotation member 640 by the unit rotation amount can be increased. ). Therefore, the apparent reduction ratio can be reduced accordingly. In other words, since the driving force is applied to a position far from the axial center O of the rotating member 640, the rotational torque applied to the rotating member 640 can be increased. As a result, the rotary drive of the rotary member 640 (particularly, the rotary drive from the stopped state) can be stabilized, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

Here, the drive mechanism 630 includes a one-side rotation drive member 637 and a other-side rotation drive member 638, and they are arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force applied from the mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 can be dispersed at different positions in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640, and it is possible to suppress the application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided member DVs. That is, even when the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting a plurality of divided member DVs in an endless manner in the circumferential direction as described above, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase with each other in the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force from each rotation driving member 637, 638 can be applied to the two most separated positions of the rotating member 640 (plurality of divided member DVs), and as a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 is caused. Can be stabilized.

In this case, in the state of the dividing member DV, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 pivotally supported by the dividing member DV is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the connecting link action groove 621 of the guide member 620. There are three types, a second state inserted through the small diameter portion 621b, and a third state inserted through the connecting portion 621c. In the present embodiment, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other side The rotation drive member 638 can apply a driving force to the split member DV in the third state (that is, the engaging portions 637b and 638b can be engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV in the third state. ) Is placed.

As a result, a driving force can be applied to the dividing member DV in a state where the interval between the adjacent dividing member DV is changed from the first interval to the second interval (or vice versa). Since the split member DV receives a relatively large reaction force from the connecting portion 621c, the rotation of the entire rotating member 640 in which the plurality of split member DVs are endlessly connected (movement of each split member DV in the circumferential direction) is performed. By directly driving the split member DV that receives a relatively large reaction force from the connecting portion 621c by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, the plurality of split member DVs are endless. The entire rotating member 640 connected to the above can be stably displaced (rotated).

The period in which the driving force is transmitted from the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 to the division member DV completely coincides with the period in which the division member DV is in the third state described above. It is not necessary, and it is sufficient that the period in which the driving force of the former is transmitted and the period in which the latter is in the third state overlap at least in part.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link acting groove 622 are formed at positions having different phases. That is, when the dividing member DV is in the above-mentioned third state, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 arranged in the dividing member DV is formed in the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter portion 622b of the undulating link action groove 622. It is inserted.

Therefore, when the dividing member DV is moved in the circumferential direction of the guiding member 620, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 pivotally supported by the dividing member DV passes through the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link action groove 621. Later, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 passes through the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 (or vice versa).

As a result, the reaction force is not received from both the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link acting groove 622 at the same time, and the timing of receiving the reaction force can be different. As a result, the required driving force can be dispersed, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced accordingly.

Here, since the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged so that their phases (rotation positions of the engaging portions 637b and 638b) are different from each other, the displacement (rotation) of the rotation member 640 is performed. Can be stabilized. Here, the phase relationship between the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 will be described with reference to FIG. 75.

FIG. 75 is a state relationship diagram showing the relationship between the phase and the engagement or disengagement state of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 with respect to the split member DV. In FIG. 75, the upper state relationship diagram corresponds to the one-side rotation drive member 637, and the lower state relationship diagram corresponds to the other side rotation drive member 638, respectively. Further, in FIG. 75, the horizontal axis indicates the phase, and the vertical axis indicates the engaged or disengaged state.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 75, the first engaging portion 637b of the engaging portions 637b formed at three positions of the one-side rotation drive member 637 engages with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV. If the phase at the time of starting the above is defined as 0 ° (reference position), the one-side rotation drive member 637 has a th-order until the phase reaches approximately 100 ° (that is, until it rotates 100 ° from the reference position). The engaging portion 637b of 1 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV, and the driving force is transmitted to the split member DV, while the engagement is released while the phase is approximately 100 ° to 120 °. The transmission of the driving force to the dividing member DV is released.

After that, the second engaging portion 637b and the third engaging portion 637b of the engaging portions 637b formed at the three positions of the one-side rotation drive member 637 are the case of the first engaging portion 637b. The same engagement and disengagement states (ie, engagement between rotation angles of approximately 100 ° and disengagement between rotation angles of approximately 20 °) are repeated.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 75, with respect to the other side rotation drive member 638, each of the engaging portions 638b formed at the three positions is the same engagement and disengagement as in the case of the one side rotation drive member 637 described above. (That is, the engagement between the rotation angles of about 100 ° and the disengagement between the rotation angles of about 20 °) are repeated.

In this case, in this embodiment, as described above, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged so as to be out of phase with each other (rotational positions of the engaging portions 637b and 638b). To. That is, the other side rotation drive member 638 has a phase in which the first engaging portion 638b of the engaging portions 638b formed at the three locations starts engaging with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV. The first engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 is set to a phase delayed by approximately 40 ° from the phase (reference position) at which engagement starts.

As a result, while one of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 is disengaged from the split member DV (that is, the transmission of the driving force is released), one side is released. The phases (rotational positions) of the engaging portions 637b and 638b are set so that the other of the rotary drive member 637 or the other side rotary drive member 638 engages with the split member DV. As a result, it is possible to avoid forming a state in which the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are simultaneously disengaged from the split member DV. As a result, it is possible to suppress the intermittent transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 and stabilize the displacement of the rotating member 640.

That is, as described above, in the configuration in which the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting the plurality of dividing member DVs in an endless manner, the transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 becomes intermittent. Due to the transmission and release of the driving force, the distance between the dividing members DV is likely to be increased or decreased. Therefore, the posture of the rotating member 640 as a whole becomes unstable, and its displacement (rotation) becomes unstable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even if either one of the one-side rotation drive member 637 or the other side rotation drive member 638 is in the released state, the other is in the engaged state, and the driving force is applied to the rotation member 640. Can form a state in which is always transmitted, so that the distance between the dividing members DV can be easily kept constant. As a result, the posture of the rotating member 640 formed by connecting the plurality of divided member DVs in an endless manner can be stabilized, and the displacement (rotation) thereof can be stabilized.

Next, the operation of detecting the rotation position of the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76 is a state transition diagram for each unit rotation amount of the rotating member 640, and shows a state in which the arrangement of the detection sensor 684 and the dividing member DV is developed in a straight line.

In FIG. 76, for convenience of explanation, the reference numerals “A to F” are shown on the detection sensor 684, and the reference numerals “1 to 10, 30” are shown on the dividing member DV, and the detection sensor 684 is shown. The detection state is illustrated by the "on, off" sign. Further, in FIG. 76, the detected portion 641c is hatched for easy understanding.

Here, in the description of FIG. 76, each detection sensor 684 is referred to as a detection sensor A, a detection sensor B, ..., Using the symbols "A to F" and "1 to 10, 30" attached in the drawing. , The detection sensor F, and each division member DV is referred to as a first division member DV, a second division member DV, ..., A thirty division member DV, and distinguish between them.

As shown in FIG. 76A, when the rotating member 640 is rotated and the first dividing member DV reaches the phase (rotational position) that can be detected by the detection sensor A, the second dividing member DV to the sixth The dividing member DV is arranged in a phase that can be detected by the detection sensors B to F, respectively.

Therefore, in the detection sensors A, C to F, the light received by the light receiving portion of the light emitted from the light emitting portion is blocked by the detected portion 641c of the first dividing member DV and the third to sixth dividing member DV. While the detection state is turned off, the detection sensor B can receive the light emitted from the light emitting unit by the light receiving unit, and the detection state is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by a unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), the dividing member DV is rotated in the circumferential direction (FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b)). By moving to the left), the dividing member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one). Therefore, in the detection sensors B to E, the detection state is turned off by shading the third to seventh dividing members DV (detected portion 641c), while in the detection sensors A and F, the detection state is turned on. To.

As shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by a unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (b), the dividing member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed ( In the detection sensors A to D and F, the detection state is turned off by shading the third to sixth dividing members DV and the eighth dividing member DV (detected portion 641c), while the detection is detected. In the sensor E, the detection state is turned on.

After that, every time the rotating member 640 is rotated by a unit rotation amount, the dividing member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one), and this is the number of the dividing member DVs (this implementation). When it is repeated only (30 in the form) (that is, the rotating member 640 is rotated once), the state is restored to the state shown in FIG. 76 (a).

In this case, as described above, there are two types of the rotating member 640, one in which the detected portion 641c is formed and the other in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. By connecting these two types of dividing members DV in the circumferential direction, the detected portions 641c are arranged in a predetermined arrangement at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The predetermined arrangement is a combination of the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c (that is, the detection sensor A) even if any of the adjacent 6 dividing member DVs is taken out from the 30 dividing member DVs connected in the circumferential direction. It means an array in which the detection states of ~ F) are all different combinations.

Therefore, by creating a table of such a combination (a table in which the detection states of the detection sensors A to F and the dividing member DV to be detected at the time of detection are associated with each other) in advance and storing the table in the ROM, the detection sensor By referring to the table each time A to F perform detection, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be grasped. That is, it is possible to determine which of the plurality of (30 in this embodiment) dividing member DV is located at the reference position.

Here, the rotating member 640 is provided with a slit continuous in the circumferential direction, the slit is detected by the detection sensor 684, and the number of pulses of the pulsed signal is cumulatively added, based on the cumulatively added number of pulses. , The amount of rotation (phase) of the rotating member 640 from the reference position can also be detected. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a light reception failure of the light receiving portion of the detection sensor 684 or the like, a deviation occurs between the rotation amount of the rotating member 640 and the cumulative addition number of the number of pulses, and the phase of the rotating member 640 is accurate. Can no longer be detected. That is, if a detection failure occurs even once, it affects the subsequent detection result, and each time a detection failure occurs, the influence on the detection result is accumulated.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of detected portions 641c arranged at unequal intervals (predetermined arrangement) along the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 and the plurality of detected portions 641c are moved. Since a plurality of detection sensors 684 (detection sensors A to F) arranged on the locus are provided, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 is detected based on the combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F. be able to. That is, the phase of the rotating member 640 can be detected based only on the current detection result detected by the detection sensors A to F, and the past of the detection sensors A to F can be used to detect the phase of the rotating member 640. Since the detection result of the above is not required, even if a detection failure occurs in the past, it is not affected by the detection failure, and therefore the phase of the rotating member 640 can be accurately detected.

As described above, the interval between the detection sensors A to F is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the dividing members DV (detected portion 641c) in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54).

Therefore, each time the rotating member 640 is rotated by a rotation angle corresponding to the distance between the divided members DV, the combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F can be changed. That is, the phase (rotation position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected with the rotation angle corresponding to the distance between the divided members DV in the first section S1 as the minimum unit. As a result, the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to any of the split member DVs (that is, any pocket of the rotating member 640 that imitates the roulette wheel) among the plurality of split member DVs connected in the circumferential direction. be able to.

Further, in this way, the arrangement interval of the detection sensors A to F is set with reference to the interval of the dividing member DV in the first section S1 (that is, the detection sensors A to F are set in reference to the interval of the dividing member DV in the first section S1). By arranging the detected portion 641c of the above in a detectable position), the space required for arranging the detection sensors A to F is compared with the case where the interval of the dividing member DV in the second section S2 is used as a reference. Can be easily secured and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

In other words, when the detection sensors A to F are arranged at positions where the detected portion 641c of the dividing member DV in the second section S2 can be detected, a space for arranging the detection sensors A to F is secured. Therefore, there is a limitation in narrowing the interval (second interval) between the dividing members DV. On the other hand, since the detection sensors A to F are arranged on the first section S1 side, there is no limitation on the setting of the interval (second interval) of the dividing member DV in the second section S2, and the second interval is such. The interval between 2 can be a narrower interval. As a result, the space required for arranging the rotating member 640 can be suppressed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, two detection results (on / off) based on the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c of the dividing member DV are performed by the six detection sensors 684, respectively, and therefore 64 (= 2 to 6) combinations can be formed.

In this case, since the number of the divided member DVs is 30, it is sufficient to have 5 detection sensors 684 (that is, a combination of 32 (= 2 to the 5th power) can be formed). However, in this case, a state occurs in which all the detection results of the five detection sensors 684 are turned off (not shaded by the detected unit 641c), and therefore, in a predetermined phase (rotational position) corresponding to the state. , The timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 cannot be obtained.

On the other hand, by using the six detection sensors 684 as in the present embodiment, the detection result is off in all the detection sensors 684 of the six detection sensors 684 (a state in which the detection unit 641c does not block light). ) Can be avoided. That is, in at least one detection sensor 684 out of the six detection sensors 684, the detection result can be turned on (shielded by the detected unit 641), so that all phases (rotation) can be set. At the position), the timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 can be obtained.

FIG. 77 is a partially enlarged side view of the rotating member 640 in the first section S1. As shown in FIG. 77, in the first section S1, the display plate 646 of the dividing member DV has the plate portion 646a arranged in a horizontal posture and the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a (FIGS. 57 and 58). The side surface opposite to (see) (left side in FIG. 77) faces the side surface of the plate holding member 645 of the adjacent dividing member DV.

In the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is formed by bending the side surface of the plate portion 646a on the side opposite to the shaft portion 646b in an arc shape (see the enlarged portion in FIG. 77). Therefore, when the plate portion 646a is rotated around the shaft portion 646b and arranged in the horizontal posture, the display plate 646 has a plate holding member 645 of the split member DV adjacent to the side opposite to the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a. As a result, the distance between the side surface of the plate portion 646a opposite to the shaft portion 646b (arc-shaped side surface) and the side surface of the plate holding member 645 can be further narrowed.

As a result, in the first section S1, when the dividing member DV and the adjacent dividing member DV try to relatively displace in the direction of narrowing the interval (first interval) between them, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 Since the side surface is in contact with the side surface of the plate holding member 645, such relative displacement can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detected portions 641c of the divided member DV from being displaced in the direction of narrowing their intervals, and as a result, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy by the detection sensor 684.

On the other hand, in the first section S1, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 ends the connecting link opening 642a in the back side main body 642 of the adjacent dividing member DV (the end on one side in the extension direction, FIG. 73 (a). ) Since it is located on the lower side (see FIG. 73 (a)), when the dividing member DV and the adjacent dividing member DV try to relatively displace in the direction of widening their distance (first distance), The phase displacement can be regulated by abutting the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 with the end of the connecting link opening 642a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detected portions 641c of the divided member DV from being displaced in the direction of widening their intervals, and as a result, the detection accuracy by the detection sensor 684 can be improved.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 83. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the tip of the first passage forming member 520 is always open has been described, but the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment is arranged at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. , A tip wall member 2560 that opens and closes a passage. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 78 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 78 shows a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position.

As shown in FIG. 78, the left swing unit 2500 includes a base member 2510 that discharges a ball to the rear on the right side of the front view of the first wall portion 513, an extension direction of the distribution base member 2521, and an elongated hole 2521d. It is mainly composed of a first passage forming member 2520 whose extension direction is substantially linear, and a tip wall member 2560 that opens and closes the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

The base member 2510 includes a lateral flow passage 2515 extending rearward from the right side of the guide wall portion 513a. Although the outer shape of the introduced cylindrical portion 552 is different from the outer shape of the introduced cylindrical portion 552 in the first embodiment, the technical idea thereof is the same, and thus the description thereof will be omitted in the present embodiment.

The side flow passage 2515 is a passage for discharging the ball that has reached the first wall portion 513 in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position.

The first passage forming member 2520 includes a distribution base member 2521 and a passage cover member 2522. The distribution base member 2521 includes a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 2521a forming one side of the flow passage of the sphere, an elongated hole 2521d extending along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and a gap V1. The second distribution convex portion 2521g which is arranged to face the distribution convex portion 521e on the right side of the front view, and the back side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g on the right side of the front view toward the front side of the hanging plate portion. It is provided with a discharge recess 2521h recessed from the side surface.

The hanging plate portion 2521a has a recessed portion 2521a2 in which a portion of the lower side wall surface facing the passage cover member 2522 (left side in FIG. 78) is cut and recessed at the lower end portion thereof, and a passage cover member at the lower end portion. A shaft support hole 2521a3 formed in a circular shape in a direction facing the passage cover member is provided on the side opposite to the 2522.

The recessed portion 2521a2 is a recessed portion that forms an opening on the lower side surface of the first passage forming member 2520 jointly with the recessed portion 2522b1 of the passage cover member 2522. The tip wall member 2560 passes through the opening formed by the recessed portion 2521a by a rotational operation.

The shaft support hole 2521a3 is a hole in which the main body portion 2561a of the tip wall member 2560 is pivotally supported by a pin member on a rod, and is arranged at a position (coaxial position) corresponding to the shaft support hole 2522a2 of the passage cover member 2522. To.

The second distribution convex portion 2521g is a portion having substantially the same shape as the distribution convex portion 521e, and is a portion that distributes the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 to the left and right. The discharge recess 2521h is arranged with a space equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere between it and the first wall portion 513, reaches the first wall portion 513, and reaches the right side of the front view of the second distribution convex portion 2521g. The sorted balls are introduced from the discharge recess 2521h into the side flow passage 2515, and then discharged out of the game area.

The passage cover member 2522 extends in a plate shape from both ends of the plate-shaped plate-shaped portion 2522a that is covered on the front side of the distribution base member 2521 and the plate-shaped portion 2522a in the lateral direction toward the back side. The upper and lower wall portions 2522b to be formed are mainly provided.

The plate-shaped portion 2522a includes the ball receiving portion 522a1 described above in the first embodiment and the shaft support hole 2522a2 coaxially bored with the shaft support hole 2521a3 of the distribution base member 2521 at the lower tip portion. Be prepared. The shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 are holes that rotatably support the tip wall member 2560.

The upper and lower wall portions 2522b are recessed at a position facing the recessed portion 2521a2, and include a recessed portion 2522b1 that constitutes an opening through which a ball can pass jointly with the recessed portion 2521a2.

The tip wall member 2560 is disposed between the distribution base member 2521 and the passage cover member 2522 at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and rotates into a rod-shaped pin member coaxially with the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2. It mainly includes a main body member 2561 having a substantially Z-shaped front view that is coaxially supported, and a torsion spring 2562 that urges the main body member 2561 clockwise in the front view.

The torsion spring 2562 is configured such that one arm is fixed to the tip of the passage cover member 2522, and the other arm abuts on the locking pin 2561e projecting from the tip wall member 2560 to the back surface side.

The main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. 79 (a) and 79 (d) are front views of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560, and FIG. 79 (b) is a top view of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560, FIG. 79. (C) is a cross-sectional view of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 in the LXXIXc-LXXIXc line of FIG. 79 (b). In FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (d), the shape of the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 79 (a), the first passage forming member 2520 is in the release position ( The state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged is shown in FIG. 79 (d), and the state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged in the connecting position (see FIG. 81) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 has a tubular main body portion 2561a coaxially supported with the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 (see FIG. 78) and a radial direction from the main body portion 2561a. The plate-shaped plate portion 2561b formed in a straight line, the flow-down hole 2561c formed in the thickness direction of the plate portion 2561b with a diameter equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the side opposite to the main body portion 2561a of the plate portion 2561b. A curved wall portion 2561d extending from the end of the main body portion 2561a along an arc centered on the main body portion 2561a, and a locking pin projecting at the tip portion of the curved wall portion 2561d in parallel with the axial direction of the main body portion 2561a. 2561e and a push-in portion 2561f which is a portion arranged on the opposite side of the curved wall portion 2561d with the main body member 2561a as a boundary and is formed in a shape smaller than the opening of the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520. Mainly prepare.

The plate portion 2561b is formed so that the radial length (extension direction length) of the main body portion 2561a is longer than the dimension in the lateral direction (longitudinal direction in FIG. 80) of the opening at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. To. As a result, the rotation stop position of the tip wall member 2560 in the urging direction of the torsion spring 2562 (see FIG. 78) can be set to a position where the plate portion 2561b and the upper side wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b come into contact with each other (FIG. FIG. 79 (d)).

In the released state (see FIG. 79 (d)), the curved wall portion 2561d stops the flow by causing the ball to collide with the contact wall 2561d1 which is arranged to face the ball flowing down the first passage forming member 2520. On the other hand, in the connected state, the ball is allowed to pass by moving below the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball that has passed through the flow-down hole 2561c is arranged on the back side of the contact wall 2561d1. By rolling over 2561d2, it has the role of smoothing the subsequent flow.

Next, the operation of the left swing unit 2500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. 80 to 82 are front views of the left swing unit 2500. In addition, in FIGS. 80 to 82, the cover member 550 is not shown, in FIG. 80, a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position is shown, and in FIG. A state in which the one passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount is shown, and FIG. 82 shows a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at a connecting position. Further, in FIGS. 80 to 82, the first passage forming member 2520 is shown by an outline line at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g is shown.

As shown in FIG. 80, when the first passage forming member 2520 is set to the release position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and reached the first wall portion 513 is on the right side of the front view of the second distribution convex portion 2521 g. The first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise, and the discharge recess 2521h is arranged on the front side of the side flow passage 2515, and stays between the discharge recess 2521h and the first wall portion 513. As a result, the ball can flow down the side flow passage 2515, and the ball is discharged out of the game area. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from being supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 80, the ball introduced into the discharge recess 2521h stays in the discharge recess 2521h until the first passage forming member 2520 rotates, so that the next ball enters the discharge recess 2521h. It can be prevented, and the next sphere can be kept outside the rotation locus of the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521 g (upper side in FIG. 80).

In the ball fastened to the outside of the rotation locus of the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521g (upper side in FIG. 80), the first passage forming member 2520 rotates clockwise in the front view, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g guides the ball. By being arranged along the wall portion on the right side of the wall portion 513a, it is introduced to the left side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g and supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. To. As a result, even if a plurality of balls reach the first wall portion 513 in the state shown in FIG. 80, the balls introduced into the discharge recess 2521h can be kept as one.

As shown in FIG. 80, in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position, the first passage is formed from the base end portion (left end portion in FIG. 80) toward the tip end portion (right end portion in FIG. 80). The member 2520 is configured to be tilted upward. Therefore, even if the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated with the supplied ball remaining between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, the ball reaches the state shown in FIG. 80. Flows toward the base end due to the action of gravity, so that the ball can be prevented from falling from the tip end.

As shown in FIG. 81, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in a state between the release position and the connection position, the ball that has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 has a second distribution convex. Riding on the tip of the part 2521g, the flow is stopped. As a result, when the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged in a state between the release position and the connecting position, the ball is supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. Can be prevented.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined downward toward the tip end portion. Therefore, when the opening of the tip portion is always open, the sphere is brought into the state shown in FIG. 81 with the sphere remaining between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. May fall from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball may be bitten by another unit (rotating unit 600 or the like (see FIG. 5)), causing a malfunction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the tip wall member 2560 is arranged in the opening of the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520, and the curved wall portion 2561d functions as a lid of the opening. Can be reliably prevented from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

As shown in FIG. 82, when the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the connecting position, the ball that has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 is left in front of the second distribution convex portion 2521 g. It is distributed to the direction, moved to the front side through the gap V1 (see FIG. 78), supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, and extends in the extension direction of the first passage forming member 2520. Flow down along.

At the connecting position, the pushing portion 2561f of the tip wall member 2560 and the wall surface of the accommodating recess 422f of the drive side slide member 420 abut (the wall surface of the accommodating recess 422f is arranged on the displacement locus of the pushing portion 2561f), and the tip ends. The curved wall portion 2561d of the wall member 2560 is rotated in the direction of projecting to the outside of the first passage forming member 2520 (counterclockwise in FIG. 82). That is, since the rotation of the tip wall member 2560 is generated by the change in the position of the first passage forming member 2520, the driving force of the tip wall member 2560 can be shared with the driving force of the first passage forming member 2520. As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

At this time, at the connecting position, the tip wall member 2560 is rotated to a posture in which the plate portion 2561b is in a surface position with respect to the upper and lower wall portions 2522b, so that the ball reaching the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is smoothed. The ball can be thrown into the flow-down hole 2561c (without bouncing as in the case where a step is formed between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b and the plate portion 2561b).

The sphere that has passed through the flow-down hole 2561c is guided to the sensor member 422c of the drive-side slide member 420 by rolling the rolling wall 2561d2 of the curved wall portion 2561d. That is, the curved wall portion 2561d has a role of stopping the ball that has reached the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 and a role of guiding the ball sent from the first passage forming member 2520 through the flow-down hole 2561c. Also used for.

At the connecting position (see FIG. 82), the plate portion 2561b is positioned with the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, so that the plate portion 2561b is positioned before reaching the connecting position. It is assumed that the plate portion 2561b has entered the inner side (upper side of FIG. 82) of the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. That is, the ball can pass through the flow-down hole 2561c only after reaching the connecting position (a state in which the ball is stopped by the curved wall portion 2561d is ensured until the connecting position is reached).

As a result, even if the first passage forming member 2520 starts to rotate from the connecting position to the releasing position in a state where the sphere remains inside the first passage forming member 2520, the sphere is at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. It is possible to surely prevent it from falling from. This is maintained even when a plurality of balls are thrown in a row.

A case where a plurality of balls are continuously thrown to the first passage forming member 2520 will be described with reference to FIG. 83. 83 (a) to 83 (c) are partial front views of the left swing unit 2500 and the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. In addition, in FIGS. 83A to 83C, the spherical passages of the first passage forming member 2520 and the second passage forming member 422 are partially cross-sectionally viewed, and in FIG. 83A, the first passage is viewed. The state in which the forming member 2520 is arranged at the connecting position is illustrated, and in FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (b) from the state shown in FIG. 83 (a). In FIG. 83 (c), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (b) from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), and the tip wall member 2560 is rotated and partitioned. The state is illustrated.

Further, in FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (c), a sphere flowing down in a row at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated as an example.

As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the pushing portion 2561f is in contact with the accommodating recess 422f in the connected state, and the recessed portion 2561f1 is provided on the lower side of FIG. 83 (a) starting from the contacted position. The recessed portion 2561f1 is recessed on the shaft support portion 516 side of the arc C21 centered on the shaft support portion 516 (see FIG. 37). Therefore, from FIG. 83 (a), as the first passage forming member 2520 rotates, the tip wall member 2560 starts to rotate due to the urging force of the torsion spring 2562. In FIG. 83 (a), the sphere arranged on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d is referred to as a feed ball P21, and the sphere arranged on the left side is referred to as a residual sphere P22.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the first passage forming member 2520 is about to rotate, the tip wall member 2560 rotates, so that the curved wall portion 2561d enters the inside of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. As a result, the residual sphere P22 is brought into contact with the contact wall 2561d, and the flow of the residual sphere P22 is stopped.

On the other hand, since the feed ball P21 is arranged on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d, the flow is not stopped by the contact wall 2561d, and passes through the flow hole 2561c to the outside of the first passage forming member 2520. It is possible to throw a ball.

In this case, the feed ball P21 may be lifted to the upper end of the curved wall portion 2561d (see FIG. 83B), but the upper wall portions of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b are arranged to face each other in the moving direction of the curved wall portion 2561d. Therefore, the feed ball P21 is pushed by the wall portion thereof, so that the feed ball P21 can be ensured to pass through the flow-down hole 2561c. As a result, the diameter of the opening of the flow hole 2561c can be suppressed to the same level as the diameter of the sphere, and the flow path of the ball flowing down the flow hole 2561c can be stabilized.

As shown in FIG. 83 (c), from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (c), and the curved wall portion 2561d is the drive side slide member 420. Even if the feed ball P21 remains on the curved wall portion 2561d side when moved above the curved wall portion 422f1, the rolling wall 2561d2 functions as a rolling portion of the feed ball P21, and the rolling wall thereof. The feed ball P21 is allowed to flow down while the distance between the lower end portion of 2561d2 and the upper end portion of the curved wall portion 422f1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere (the first passage is formed during the period until the feed sphere P21 partitions the flow down). By stopping the member 2520 at the position shown in FIG. 83 (c) or slowing down the speed near FIG. 83 (c)), it is ensured that the sphere flows down from the first passage forming member 2520 to the second passage forming member 422. can do.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 88. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the third symbol display device 81 is arranged at the center position in the left-right direction of the driven side slide member 430 has been described, but the liquid crystal elevating unit 3400 in the third embodiment displays the third symbol. The device 81 is arranged on the left side of the driven side slide member 3430 in the left-right direction. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

84 to 88 are front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 3400 according to the third embodiment, in which the elevating and lowering operations of the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 3430 are illustrated in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 84 to 88, the left and right members of the cover member 470 are not shown, and the vicinity of the lowering restricting member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 is partially enlarged.

Further, in FIG. 84, immediately after the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 comes into contact with the driven side slide member 3430 is shown, and in FIG. 85, the rack 452 is raised from the state shown in FIG. 84 to raise the drive side slide member 420. And the state in which the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged in the ascending position is shown, and in FIG. 86, the state in which only the driving side slide member 420 is lowered and arranged in the lowered position from the state of FIG. 85 is shown. Then, the driven side slide member 3430 is dropped from the state shown in FIG. 86, and the separation action surface 434b, which is the lower side surface of the hook-shaped portion 434, and the separation inclined portion 417f of the ascending restricting member 417 are brought into contact with each other and the ascending regulating member is brought into contact with each other. A state in which the 417 is rotated by a predetermined amount is shown, and in FIG. 88, a state in which the driven side slide member 3430 is further dropped from the state shown in FIG. 87 and the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged in the lowered position is shown. ..

As illustrated in FIGS. 84 to 88, the liquid crystal elevating unit 3400 includes a base member 410, a drive side slide member 420, a driven side slide member 3430, a drive device 440, a transmission device 450, and a lower front surface. It mainly includes a plate portion 460, a cover member 470, and a solenoid 3480 that is arranged on the front side of the cover member 470 and operates in a manner of preventing the driven side slide member 3430 from falling.

In the base member 410, the lowering regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 are arranged only on the left side portion in the front view, and the arrangement of the right side portion in the front view is omitted.

The driven side slide member 3430 has a third symbol display device 81 at a position eccentric to the left in the front view from the left-right center position, and is formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, and the left-right direction of the main body member 3431. Functional parts 432 arranged at both ends, guide holes 433 that are holes formed in the functional parts 432 in the vertical direction and through which the guide rod 451 is inserted, and lower ends of the functional parts 432 that rise in the left-right outward direction. An inclined hook-shaped portion 434, and a fall prevention portion 435 extending to the back side inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end of the functional portion 432 (the side close to the other guide hole 433). Mainly prepared.

The main body member 3431 includes a locking convex portion 3431a that is projected to the left in the front view at the upper end portion thereof. The locking convex portion 3431a is a portion that is locked to the solenoid 3480 arranged on the front side of the cover member 470 to prevent the cover member from falling. The locking convex portion 3431a is inclined downward as its upper surface toward the tip in the convex direction.

The solenoid 3480 includes a rod member 3481 that can appear and disappear on the right side in the front view, and the lower surface of the rod member 3481 is tilted upward toward the tip in the overhanging direction. The solenoid 3480 is in an immersive state when energized and in an extended state when it is not energized. In the overhanged state, the tip of the rod member 3481 is projected toward the left and right center side from the tip of the locking convex portion 3431a. Consists of.

As shown in FIG. 84, the third symbol display device 81 is arranged closer to the left side in the front view. As a result, while securing the size of the third symbol display device 81, the areas divided into the left and right sides of the third symbol display device 81 are collected in one place (to the right of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. 84). By configuring it as a large area, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the size of the movable member that can be arranged in the vacant area.

Since the third symbol display device 81 is arranged closer to the left side in the front view, the load applied to the rack 452 from the driven side slide member 420 is asymmetrical (the left side is larger). Since the left and right racks 452 are connected by the drive-side slide member 420, the asymmetry of the load on the rack 452 tends to tilt the postures of the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 84, the wiring storage member 423 is arranged at the lower end on the left side in the front view of the second passage forming member 422. At this time, since the center of gravity position G31 of the wiring storage member 423 is arranged to the left from the center position of the drive side slide member 420, the drive side is affected by the weight of the wiring accommodated in the wiring storage member 423 and the wiring storage member 423. The slide member 420 may be loaded and tilted counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

In this way, the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are easily tilted counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are prevented from rattling during the ascending / descending operation. It can be limited to rattling between the state in which the 452 maintains the horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) and the state in which the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are tilted counterclockwise when viewed from the front (drive-side slide). It is possible to prevent the member 420 and the rack 452 from tilting clockwise from the horizontal position.

Therefore, the lowering restricting member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 arranged on the left side in the front view guide the ascending / descending operation of the driving side slide member 420 and the rack 452 while effectively suppressing the inclination of the driving side sliding member 420 and the rack 452. To do. On the other hand, since the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are not tilted to the right side of the front view, it is not necessary to dispose the lowering regulation member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 outside the functional portion 432 on the right side of the front view. Costs (material costs and assembly man-hours) can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 85, when the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged in the raised position, the wiring storage member 423 rises as compared with the state shown in FIG. 84, and its center of gravity position G31 is compared with the state shown in FIG. It is moved to the left in front view.

Therefore, the load in the direction in which the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are tilted counterclockwise when viewed from the front becomes large, and the meshing relationship between the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 may deteriorate.

On the other hand, in the state where the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged in the ascending position, the convex plate 453a is brought into contact with and supported by the descending restricting member 415. As a result, it is possible to prevent the postures of the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 from tilting counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 85, when the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged in the raised position, the locking convex portion 3431 gets over the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the locking convex portion 3431 is placed on the rod member 3481. ..

At this time, the rod member 3481 is pushed in the left-right direction along the inclination of the upper surface of the locking convex portion 3431, so that the locking convex portion 3431 gets over the rod member 3481. As a result, the locking convex portion 3431 can be placed on the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 without conducting electricity to the solenoid 3480.

As shown in FIG. 86, even if the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered while the driven-side slide member 3430 is arranged in the ascending position, the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 keeps the locking convex portion 3431a of the driven-side slide member 3430. By supporting, the driven side slide member 3430 is prevented from moving downward in conjunction with the drive side slide member 420, and the driven side slide member 3430 is maintained in the raised position.

At this time, the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged at a position where the third symbol display device 81 is closer to the left side in the front view from the center position, and the center of gravity is closer to the left side, so that the solenoid 3480 is only on the left side. Also, it is possible to prevent the driven side slide member 3430 from falling.

That is, when the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is in the center in the left-right direction, the driven side slide member 3430 may wobble both clockwise and counterclockwise due to vibration and the like. If the driven side slide member 3430 is tilted clockwise in the front view while the solenoid 3480 is only on the left side, the locking convex portion 3431a may slip off from the rod member 3481.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the position of the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is closer to the left side in the front view, the driven side slide member 3430 is tilted clockwise from the horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) due to vibration or the like. Is suppressed.

Therefore, the locking convex portion 3431a is likely to incline in the direction close to the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the contact between the locking convex portion 3431a and the rod member 3481 is maintained, so that the locking convex portion 3431a is the rod member 3481. It is suppressed from slipping off.

Therefore, the driven side slide member 3430 can be stably maintained in the ascending position without disposing the solenoids 3480 on both the left and right sides of the driven side slide member 3430, so that the number of solenoids 3480 arranged can be reduced. , The operation of the driven side slide member 3430 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 87, when the solenoid 3480 is energized and the rod member 3481 is immersed, the driven side slide member 3430 falls. In the process of dropping the driven side slide member 3430, since the positions of the hook-shaped portion 434 and the lowering regulating member 415 are displaced in the front-rear direction, the hook-shaped portion 434 is caught by the lowering regulating member 415 and causes a malfunction. It can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 87, the hook-shaped portion 434 falls in a state of being in contact with the separated inclined portion 417f of the ascending restricting member 417, whereby the ascending regulating member 417 is rotated outward (counterclockwise in FIG. 87). Release state).

As shown in FIG. 88, when the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged in the descending position, the ascending restricting member 417 is rotated inward (clockwise in FIG. 88), and the engaging claw portion 417e of the ascending restricting member 417 and The hook-shaped portion 434 and the hook-shaped portion 434 are arranged so as to face each other in the vertical direction (engaged state).

As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, since the ascending restricting member 417 is rotated with respect to the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven side slide member 3430, the state changes from the disengaged state to the engaged state, so that there is no change in posture. The load and posture change amount required to change the disengaged state and the engaged state are increased as compared with the case of engaging with (such as when the disengaged state and the engaged state are changed by the elasticity of the member). be able to. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the engaged state in which the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven side slide member 3430 and the ascending regulating member 417 are engaged with each other.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the ascending restricting member 417 is rotated by the fall of the driven side slide member 3430. That is, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive device in order to form the engaged state of the ascending regulating member 417. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the facing wall portion 422f2 projects from the lower end portion of the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 at the downwardly inclined position has been described, but the driving side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment is curved. The facing wall portion 4422f2 arranged to face the wall portion 422f1 is configured as a wall portion on a plane extending in the vertical direction. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 89 (a) is a partial front view of the drive-side slide member 4420 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 89 (b) is a side view of the drive-side slide member 4420 in the direction of the arrow LXXXIXb of FIG. 89 (a). 89 (c) is a partial front view of the drive-side slide member 4420. In FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (c), the drive-side slide member 4420 is cross-sectionally viewed at the center position in the front-rear direction (vertical direction of the paper surface in FIG. 89 (a)) of the connecting member 4424. Further, FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b) show a downward tilted state of the connecting member 4424, and FIG. 89 (c) shows an upward tilted state of the connecting member 4424.

The connecting member 4424 includes an extended claw portion 4424f extending from the lower end portion of the upper side wall portion 424b to the right side in the front view.

The extended claw portion 4424f is arranged to face the curved wall portion 422f1 in an upwardly inclined state, is recessed and curved in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1, and is curved in a front-rear direction (FIG. 89) as shown in FIG. 89 (b). (B) Left-right direction) A pair of recessed portions are provided in the intermediate portion.

The second passage forming member 4422 includes an opposing wall portion 4422f2 that is arranged to face the curved wall portion 422f1. The facing wall portion 4422f2 is a plate portion extending in the vertical direction along the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the recessed portion is arranged so as not to interfere with the extending claw portion 4424f, and the recessed portion is arranged in FIG. 89 (a). In the state, it is extended to a position where it overlaps with the extended claw portion 4424f.

According to the present embodiment, in the downward tilted state shown in FIG. 89 (a), a portion (protrusion portion or the like) that is damaged by the collision of the sphere with the sphere is not arranged, so that the first passage forming member When a ball is thrown from 520 to the connecting member 4424, it is possible to prevent the member from being damaged by colliding with the ball.

Since the extending claw portion 4424f and the facing wall portion 4422f2 guide the ball in the upward tilted state shown in FIG. 89B, it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged in the vicinity of the sensor member 422c.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a game machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the upper end portion (the radial outer portion of the distribution convex portion 521e) of the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is opened has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the cover member that covers the open portion of the upper end of the first passage forming member 520 opens the side to which the sphere is supplied and the side to which the sphere is supplied in the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e. The other side may operate in the form of a lid. In this case, it is possible to prevent foreign matter other than the sphere from being mixed into the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the connecting member 424 comes into contact with the first passage forming member 520 and is rotated has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the arrangement of the connecting member 424 may be omitted. In this case, the product cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts of the members required for connecting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422. Further, instead of the connecting member 424, a rubber-like elastic body having an internal passage may be arranged. In this case, the displacement between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is absorbed by the deformation of the shape of the rubber-like elastic body due to the contact of the first passage forming member 520 with the rubber-like elastic body. be able to.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the drive-side slide member 420 is driven by the single-layer rack 452 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the rack that drives the drive-side slide member 420 is composed of two front and rear layers, the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down by the front rack, and the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down by the rear rack. And may be configurable. In this case, when only one of the two-layer racks is in contact with the driven side slide member 430 in the vertical direction, the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 move up and down in conjunction with each other. It is possible to switch between the case where the drive-side slide member 420 passes through the driven-side slide member 430 and moves up and down independently.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b project outward from the circle formed by the tooth roots of the other gear teeth has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the abutting portion 351b or the receiving portion 354b may be recessed toward the center of the circle formed by the roots of the other gear teeth, and the other may be projected so as to be longer.

In each of the above embodiments, the portion that comes into contact with the contact portion 351b is an adjacent gear tooth 354c having a gear tooth shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a portion having a shape different from the gear tooth shape may be formed, and the portion and the contact portion 351b may be in contact with each other.

In each of the above embodiments, the portion that comes into contact with the contact portion 351b is the receiving portion 354b in which the tooth shape is not formed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a surface that comes into contact with the contact portion 351b may be formed by partially scraping the gear teeth of the portion formed by the tooth shape.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the entire overlapping portion of the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b comes into contact with each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the surface contact area may be reduced by providing a recessed portion recessed toward the rotation axis at an intermediate position between the contact portion 351b or the receiving portion 354b.

In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right ascending control members 417 come into contact with the drive side slide member 420 at the same timing has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the left and right rising restricting members 417 may be brought into contact with the driving side slide member 420. In this case, a left-right asymmetrical load can be applied to the drive-side slide member 420, and the drive-side slide member 420 is tilted even when the center of gravity of the drive-side slide member 420 is closer to either the left or right side (one of the left and right sides). It can be suppressed.

In the second embodiment, the case where the tip wall member 2560 is arranged at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mode in which a blower for blowing wind from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 toward the base end side is arranged, or a mode in which a magnetic force generator is provided at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 to attract a sphere by magnetic force. Alternatively, the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 may be vibrated in the rotational direction. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

In the second embodiment, the case where the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined upward toward the tip side in the released state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an intermediate portion that sinks between the base end portion and the tip end portion of the first passage forming member 2520 may be provided (may be formed in a U shape). In this case, if the sphere remains inside the first passage forming member 2520 in the released state, the sphere can be fastened to the intermediate portion (the position closer to the tip portion than the base end portion), so that the state changes to the communication state. At that time, the period from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 until the ball is thrown can be shortened.

In the third embodiment, the case where the lowering regulation member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 are arranged on one side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lowering regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the base member 410, respectively, and the elastic coefficients of the torsion springs 415d and 417g for urging the descending regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 are set on the left side. There may be a difference between the torsion springs 415d and 417g arranged and the torsion springs 415d and 417g arranged on the right side. At this time, the elasticity of the torsion springs 415d, 417g arranged on the right side of the front view is compared with the torsion springs 415d, 417g arranged on the left side of the front view (the side where the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is closer). It is preferable to reduce the coefficient. In this case, the load that causes the driven side slide member 3430 to change its posture in the counterclockwise direction (the direction in which the driven side slide member 3430 is tilted due to the bias of the center of gravity) by the lowering regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 arranged on the right side is While suppressing, when the attitude of the driven side slide member 3430 changes clockwise due to the sudden vertical movement of the driven side slide member 3430, the attitude change can be suppressed.

In the third embodiment, the case where the driven side slide member 430 is dropped after the drive side slide member 420 is arranged in the lowered position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driven side slide member 430 may be dropped while the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at an intermediate position. In this state, control (control of repeatedly switching between the ascending operation and the descending operation) may be performed in such a manner that the driving side slide member 420 is operated in the direction opposite to the operating direction of the driven side slide member 430. In this case, the drive-side slide member 420 can make the driven-side slide member 430 bounce (repeatedly bounce, etc.).

In each of the above embodiments, the split member DV in which the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621 is connected by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638. Although the case of driving has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the split member DV in which the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the connecting link action groove 621 is inserted on one side. It may be driven by the rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638. In this case, since the distance between the split member DV that applies the driving force and the adjacent split member DV is widened, the adjacent split member DV, the one-side rotation drive member 637, and the other-side rotation drive member 638 Interference can be suppressed, and the diameters of these one-side rotation drive members and the other-side rotation drive member can be increased accordingly. As a result, the drive torque applied to the split member DV (rotation member 640) from the one-side rotation drive member and the other side rotation drive member can be increased.

In each of the above embodiments, the period during which the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV and the engaging portion 638b of the other side rotation driving member 638 are the split members. Although the case where the period of engagement with the driven portion 641 of the DV overlaps (see FIG. 75), the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 or the like or the like. While one of the engaging portions 638b of the side rotation driving member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV, the other is disengaged and the engaging portion of the one-side rotation driving member 637. While the other of the engaging portion 638b of the 637b or the other side rotation driving member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV, one may be disengaged.

In this case, it is possible to prevent the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation driving member 638 from being simultaneously engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV. .. That is, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 or the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation driving member 638 can be alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641. As a result, the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

That is, where a phase shift occurs between the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 due to dimensional tolerances, assembly tolerances, drive tolerances of the drive motor 631, etc., a plurality of split members In the rotary member 640 formed by connecting the DVs in an endless manner, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotary drive member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotary drive member 638 are simultaneously engaged with the split member DV. If a phase shift occurs while engaged with the portion 641, one section of the rotating member 640 in the circumferential direction is in a compressed state and the other section is in a pulled state, so that the displacement of the rotating member 640 is unstable. It becomes.

On the other hand, as described above, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation driving member 638 are alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV. Therefore, even if the phase shift occurs, it is possible to avoid the influence of the phase shift on the rotating member 640. As a result, even if the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting a plurality of divided member DVs in an endless manner, its displacement can be stabilized.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the split member DV is connected in an endless manner in the rotating unit 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the split member DV is connected in an endless manner (from one end to the other end). Of course, it is possible to connect the split member DV and not connect one end and the other end). In this case, for example, the split member DV connected in an endped manner may be displaced (moved) along the endless orbit in each of the above embodiments, or may be present along the endd orbit. The split member DV connected in an end shape may be reciprocally displaced (reciprocated).

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<About the concept of the invention as an example of a structure in which the rotation of the second gear 352 is regulated by the locking arc portion 351c>
The transmission in a gaming machine including a driving means, a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means, and a displacement member that is displaced between an ascending position and a descending position by the driving force transmitted by the transmitting member. The member includes a first gear and a second gear that is meshed with the first gear and is arranged on the displacement member side of the driving force transmission path with respect to the first gear. The gear includes an abutting portion formed in a part of the tooth profile, and in a state where the displacement member is arranged at an elevated position, a predetermined tooth of the second gear is attached to the abutting portion of the first gear. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the rotation of the second gear in the downward direction of the displacement member is restricted by being brought into contact with the gear.

Here, a game machine including a driving means, a transmission member for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and a displacement member displaced between an ascending position and a descending position by the driving force transmitted by the transmitting member. Are known. For example, the transmission member is formed by a rack and pinion mechanism, the rotation of the pinion driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the displacement member is moved up and down between the descending position and the ascending position by the linear motion of the rack. (Patent Document 1: For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-80941). In this case, when the driving force of the driving means is released while the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position, the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. Therefore, it is necessary to continuously apply the driving force of the driving means, and there is a problem that the energy consumption when holding the displacement member in the raised position increases. On the other hand, by providing a crank mechanism as a part of the driving means and utilizing the dead center of the crank mechanism, the displacement member is prevented from being lowered from the ascending position by its own weight even if the driving force of the driving means is released. A structure is also known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-140602), but in this case, there is a problem that the entire transmission member becomes large due to the presence of the crank mechanism.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the first gear includes a contact portion formed in a part of the tooth profile thereof, and when the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, the first gear contacts the first gear. When the predetermined teeth of the second gear are brought into contact with the portion, the rotation of the second gear in the descending direction of the displacement member is restricted, so that the displacement member is still present even if the driving force of the driving means is released. It is possible to suppress the descent by its own weight. Therefore, the energy consumption when the displacement member is held in the raised position can be suppressed. Further, since the structure for holding the displacement member in the raised position can be formed by the first gear and the second gear, and the crank mechanism does not need to be separately provided, the transmission member can be downsized. it can.

In the game machine A1, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed in a part of the tooth profile thereof, and in a state where the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, the second gear is in contact with the first gear. The gaming machine A2, characterized in that the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises is restricted by abutting the receiving portion of the two gears.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, when the receiving part of the second gear comes into contact with the contact part of the first gear, the displacement member rotates in the rising direction of the second gear. Is regulated, that is, when the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position, the rotation of the second gear is regulated in both forward and reverse directions, so that the displacement member held in the ascending position rattles. Can be suppressed.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that, in a state where the displacement member is arranged in an ascending position, rotation of the first gear in a direction in which the displacement member is lowered is allowed.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1 or A2, in the state where the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position, the rotation of the first gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is allowed. It is not necessary to separately perform an operation for releasing the contact between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear, and the first gear is rotated by the driving force of the driving means to move to the ascending position. The held displacement member can be lowered. That is, the rotation of the second gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is restricted, while the rotation of the first gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is allowed. Therefore, when the displacement member tries to descend from the ascending position by its own weight, the predetermined teeth of the second gear come into contact with the contact portion of the first gear, thereby restricting the rotation of the second gear and restricting the rotation of the displacement member. Can be held in the ascending position. On the other hand, when the first gear is rotated, the second gear is rotated along with the rotation, and the displacement member can be lowered.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear is formed so as to be meshable with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in a direction for raising the displacement member. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the tooth depth is lower than the teeth of the first gear and the predetermined teeth of the second gear can come into contact with the tooth tip surface thereof.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear meshes with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in the direction of raising the displacement member. It is possible to form the gear, and the tooth depth is lower than that of the first gear so that the predetermined tooth of the second gear can come into contact with the tooth tip surface of the first gear. Therefore, the first gear is raised in the direction of raising the displacement member. Is rotated, and when the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position, the second gear can be rotated in the direction of ascending the displacement member through the contact portion and the tooth engagement of the predetermined teeth. As a result, a state in which the predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the contact portion of the first gear (a state in which the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear). It can be formed reliably.

A5 of the game machine A4, wherein the contact portion of the first gear has a tooth thickness larger than that of the teeth of the first gear.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the contact portion of the first gear has a larger tooth thickness than the teeth of the first gear, so that the predetermined teeth of the second gear come into contact with each other. A possible area can be secured. Therefore, the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear in the state where the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position can be relaxed (the allowable amount can be increased). As a result, it is possible to reliably form a state in which the predetermined teeth of the second gear can come into contact with the contact portion of the first gear.

Further, the contact portion of the first gear is a portion that receives a predetermined tooth of the second gear and regulates the rotation of the second gear (that is, supports the weight of the displacement member), and the tooth thickness is Since it is enlarged, strength can be secured.

In the game machine A4 or A5, the contact portion of the first gear is formed by bending the tooth tip surface into an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the first gear. ..

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4 or A5, the contact portion of the first gear is formed with its tooth tip surface curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation center of the first gear. Therefore, the strength of the first gear can be improved while allowing the first gear to rotate until the predetermined teeth of the second gear can come into contact with the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear. Can be planned.

Further, when the second gear is rotated in the direction of lowering the displacement member and the predetermined teeth of the second gear are brought into contact with the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear, the predetermined of the second gear is specified. The direction of the force acting on the contact portion of the first gear from the tooth is set to the direction toward the rotation axis of the first gear, and it is possible to easily suppress the rotation of the first gear. As a result, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends can be easily regulated, and even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the displacement member can be reliably suppressed from being descended by its own weight.

In the game machine A6, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed in a part of the tooth profile thereof.
In the state where the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position, the contact portion of the first gear comes into contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, so that the first displacement member in the ascending direction. A game machine A7 characterized in that the rotation of gears is regulated.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, the second gear is provided with a receiving portion formed in a part of the tooth profile thereof, and the first gear is in a state where the displacement member is arranged in the raised position. Since the contact portion of the gear is brought into contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises is restricted, so that the receiving portion of the second gear is replaced with the displacement member. It can function as a stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after being placed in the raised position.

In the game machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear has a concave portion on the side facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the second gear, and the arc of the contact portion of the first gear. A game machine A8 characterized in that it is formed by being curved in an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to that of the shape.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear is concave on the side facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the second gear, and the first Since it is formed by being curved in an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to the arc shape of the contact portion of the gear, when the contact portion of the first gear is in contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, both surfaces are surfaced. The contact portion of the first gear can be abutted by hitting, and the contact portion of the first gear can be firmly received by the receiving portion of the second gear. As a result, the receiving portion of the second gear can be reliably exerted its function as a stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after the displacement member is arranged in the raised position.

Further, since the receiving portion of the second gear is curved in an arc shape that is concave toward the rotation axis of the second gear, the tooth height on both sides in the tooth thickness direction can be increased, and the strength of the receiving portion can be increased. Can be enhanced. As a result, damage to the receiving portion of the second gear when receiving the contact portion of the first gear can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines A4 to A8, when the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, the engagement between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear is released, and The gaming machine A9, wherein the displacement member is located at the end of a movable range in the ascending direction.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A4 to A8, in the state where the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear Since the meshing of the displacement member is released and the displacement member is located at the end of the movable range in the ascending direction, the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position by the rotation of the first gear in the direction of raising the displacement member. Later, while stopping the second gear, only the first gear can be rotated in the direction in which the displacement member rises. As a result, a predetermined tooth of the second gear can come into contact with the contact portion of the first gear (a state in which the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear). Can be reliably formed.

<About the concept of the invention in which the structure connecting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is an example>
The first passage member and the second passage member formed so that the sphere can pass through are provided, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other. A communication state in which a ball can be thrown from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member. In a game machine capable of forming a separated state in which is non-communication, the first passage member or the first passage member or the first passage member is displaceably arranged at one end of one end of the first passage member or the second passage member. 2. The gaming machine B1 is provided with a connecting member that communicates between one end of the first passage member and one end of the second passage member in a state of being displaced by being in contact with the other of the two passage members.

Here, the first passage member and the second passage member formed so that the sphere can pass through are provided, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other. A communication state in which a ball can be thrown from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member so that the first passage member and the second passage member are not. There is known a game machine capable of forming a separated state that is considered to be communicative (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-171636). In this case, it is inevitable that the stop position when the first passage member is displaced and the arrangement position of the second passage member vary due to the dimensional tolerance and the assembly tolerance of each part. Therefore, in the communicating state, the positions of one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are displaced from each other, which makes it difficult to stably throw the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. was there.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, it is disposed at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and is displaced by being in contact with the other of the first passage member or the second passage member. In the case, since the connecting member for communicating between the one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member is provided, even if the positions of the ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are displaced, one end of each is provided. The displacement can be absorbed by the displacement of the connecting portion between the two. Thereby, the throwing of the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized. Further, as the first passage member is displaced, the first passage member abuts on the connecting member to displace the connecting member, so that the driving force for displaceing the first passage member can also be used and the connecting member is displaced. It is not necessary to separately provide a driving force for causing the displacement.

In the game machine B1, the connecting member includes one side wall portion and the other side wall portion that are arranged so as to face each other with an opening at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member. When it is located on the displacement locus of the first passage member, the first passage member is displaced, and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connecting member. 2. The gaming machine B2, wherein the connecting member is displaced so that the other side wall portion of the connecting member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, when the first passage member is displaced and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connecting member. Since the connecting member is displaced and the other side wall portion of the connecting member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member, the one side wall portion and the other side wall portion of the connecting member are placed in the communicating state. , The first passage member and the second passage member can be brought closer to one end, and the misalignment between one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member can be easily absorbed. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the communication state is formed by rotating the first passage member with one end thereof as the rotation tip side, and the connecting member is a rotation shaft parallel to the rotation axis of the first passage member. When the first passage member is rotated and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connecting member, the connecting member is rotated and said. The gaming machine B3, wherein the other side wall portion of the connecting member is close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, a communication state is formed by rotating the first passage member with one end thereof as the rotation tip side, and the connecting member is the first passage. Since the rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the member is provided, the displacement (rotation) of the connecting member due to the displacement (rotation) of the first passage member can be smoothly performed. Further, by utilizing the rotational motion of both, the other side wall portion of the connecting member can be brought closer to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

In the game machine B2 or B3, in the communication state, one of the facing surfaces of the one side wall portion and the other side wall portion has a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. The gaming machine B4 is a rolling surface when a ball is thrown, and in the communicating state, one of the facing surfaces is downwardly inclined from the first passage member to the second passage member.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2 or B3, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the ball at the communicating portion between the first passage member and one end of the second passage member. That is, since the communicating portion between the one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member is a portion where the positional deviation becomes large, where the ball throwing becomes unstable, a rolling surface of the ball is formed in the communicating portion. Since one of the facing surfaces is inclined downward from the first passage member to the second passage member, the ball can be rolled and the thrown ball can be stabilized.

In any of the game machines B1 to B4, in the communicating state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be thrown from one end of the first passage member, and in the released state, in the first passage member. The gaming machine B5 is provided with a ball throwing regulating means for restricting the ball from being thrown from one end of the first passage member.

Here, in the released state, one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member are not communicated. Therefore, in such a state, for some reason, the first When a ball is supplied to the passage member, the ball that has passed through the first passage member may fall out of the game area. Further, even if the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the communicating state, if the ball stays in the first passage member for some reason and shifts to the released state in that state, the first passage member There is a risk that the ball that stayed in the game will fall into the game area. If the ball falls out of the game area, it may hinder the movement of movable members such as gears and crank mechanisms, and the ball may be pinched, resulting in damage to the movable members.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B4, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be thrown from one end of the first passage member in the communicating state. In addition, in the released state, a ball throwing regulating means for restricting the ball in the first passage member from being thrown from one end of the first passage member is provided. Therefore, for example, when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, Even when the ball stays in the first passage member and shifts from the communication state to the release state, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.

In the game machine B5, a cover body is provided at one end of the first passage member, which allows the passage of a ball in the communicating state and restricts the passage of the ball in the released state, and the cover body regulates the throwing of the ball. A game machine B6 characterized by forming means.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, one end of the first passage member is covered as a ball throwing regulation means that allows the ball to pass in the communicating state and regulates the ball in the released state. Since the body is arranged, for example, even when a ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the ball stays in the first passage member and shifts from the communication state to the released state, the first passage It is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the member.

In the game machine B5, the urging member that applies an urging force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position that restricts the passage of the ball and acts on the cover body with the displacement of the first passage member. The gaming machine B7 is characterized by comprising, at least, an action member that displaces the cover body in a direction that allows the ball to pass through when the communication state is formed.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, an urging member that applies urging force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position that restricts the passage of the ball is provided, so that the cover body is covered in the released state. It is possible to prevent the body from being inadvertently displaced, and as a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. On the other hand, when the communication state is formed, the cover body is displaced in a direction that allows the ball to pass through, so that the ball can be thrown from the first passage member to the second passage member.

In this case, the displacement of the cover body in the direction allowing the passage of the sphere is performed along with the displacement of the first passage member by the action of the acting member. It can also be used as a driving means for the displacement, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The working member is located on the displacement locus of the cover body due to the displacement of the first passage member, and abuts on the cover body displaced along the displacement locus to resist the urging force of the urging member. A driving force that displaces the cover body in a direction that allows the ball to pass through (for example, a second passage member, a connecting member, a member fixed to the game board, etc.) or a driving means that displaces the first passage member. Is transmitted to the cover body, and the cover body is also displaced together with the displacement of the first passage member (for example, a gear or a rack pinion that converts the driving means and the driving force into rotary motion or linear motion and transmits the force to the cover body, etc. ) Is illustrated.

The game machine B8 is characterized in that, in the game machine B5, the ball throwing regulating means arranges the first passage member in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is at the uppermost position in the released state.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the throwing regulating means arranges the first passage member in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is at the top in the released state. Even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the ball stays in the first passage member and shifts from the communication state to the released state, the ball moves out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. It can be suppressed from falling.

It should be noted that the first passage member arranged in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is at the uppermost position in the released state does not need to have the entire first passage member ascending and inclined, and the first passage member of the first passage member. There may be a region that is horizontal or has a downward slope.

In the game machine B5, the ball throwing regulating means is arranged in a posture in which the first passage member is inclined upward from the other end to one end of the first passage member in the released state. Game machine B9.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the ball throwing regulating means arranges the first passage member in a posture of ascending and tilting from the other end to one end of the first passage member in the released state. Therefore, for example, even when a ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the ball stays in the first passage member and shifts from the communication state to the released state, the ball is transmitted from one end of the first passage member. Can be easily suppressed from falling out of the game area.

Further, when the communication state is formed, the entire first passage member can be formed in a downwardly inclined state from the other end toward one end, so that the ball can be easily thrown from the first passage member to the second passage member. , It is possible to prevent the ball from staying in the middle. Therefore, when the release state is entered, it is possible to prevent the ball remaining in the first passage member from falling into the game area.

In any of the game machines B1 to B9, a case body having an upstream passage and a downstream passage formed so that the ball can pass through, and a one-sided position for distributing the ball flowing down from the upstream passage to the first passage and The case body is formed with both sides in the displacement direction of the distribution member open so as to include a distribution member that displaces a ball flowing down from the upstream passage between other side positions that distribute the ball to the downstream passage. A game machine B10 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B9, the case body is formed so that both sides in the displacement direction of the distribution member are open, so that the case body can be moved to one side position or the other side position. Even when a sphere flows down between the distribution member and the case body that are displaced toward the direction, it is possible to prevent the flowing sphere from being sandwiched between the distribution member and the case body.

In the game machine B10, the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and when the communication state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member, the distribution member is arranged at the one side position. The gaming machine B11 is characterized in that when the released state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member, the distribution member is arranged at the other side position.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effect of the game machine B10, a distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and the displacement member is arranged at one side position and the other side position according to the displacement of the first passage member. Therefore, the driving means for displacing the first passage member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the distribution member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Here, in the structure in which the distribution member is displaced independently of the first passage member, for example, when the displacement state of the distribution member and the first passage member is deviated due to the occurrence of control failure, the release state is released. The ball is distributed to the first aisle member (that is, the distribution member is arranged at one side position), and the ball may fall out of the game area from one end of the first aisle member. On the other hand, in the game machine B10, since the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, the displacement states of the distribution member and the first passage member can always be synchronized. Therefore, even if a control failure occurs, it is possible to prevent the ball from being distributed to the first passage member in the released state (that is, when the released state is formed, the distribution member is always in the other side position. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.

In the game machine B11, the first passage member includes a wall portion for partitioning a passage through which a ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member is used as the distribution member.

According to the game machine B12, in addition to the effect of the game machine B11, the first passage member includes a wall portion for partitioning the passage through which the ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member is used as a distribution member. , Parts can be standardized to reduce the cost of parts. Further, by using the wall portion that divides the passage through which the spheres pass as a distribution member, the distributed spheres can be surely flowed down into the passage.

<About the concept of the invention as an example of a structure that regulates the bounce of the driven side slide member 430>
A guide member extending in the vertical direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and capable of being displaced along the guide member, and the displacement member are supported at the descending position. A support member and an elevating member formed so as to be able to elevate along the guide member are provided, and the displacement member is raised from the descending position to the ascending position by being pushed up by the elevating member as the elevating member rises. At the same time, in a gaming machine in which the displacement member is lowered from the ascending position to the lowering position by its own weight as the elevating member is lowered, when the displacement member is lowered to the lowering position, the displacement member is moved in the ascending direction. A game machine C1 characterized by including a rise regulating member that regulates displacement.

Here, a guide member extending in the vertical direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and capable of being displaced along the guide member between the ascending position and the descending position, and the displacement member being supported at the descending position. The support member and the elevating member formed so as to be able to elevate along the guide member are provided, and the displacement member is raised from the descending position to the ascending position by being pushed up by the elevating member as the elevating member rises. There is known a gaming machine in which a displacement member is lowered from an ascending position to a descending position by its own weight as the elevating member is lowered (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-233494). In this case, the displacement member lowered by its own weight along the guide member is maintained in the lowered position by being placed on the support member and supported by the support member. However, since the displacement member is mounted on the support member and can be displaced in the ascending direction along the guide member, rattling is likely to occur due to disturbance, and the posture of the displacement member in the descending position. There was a problem that it was unstable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, since the ascending regulating member that regulates the displacement of the displacement member in the ascending direction when the displacement member is lowered to the descending position is provided, the displacement member is along the guide member at the descending position. Displacement in the ascending direction can be regulated, and rattling caused by disturbance can be suppressed. As a result, the posture of the displacement member in the descending position can be stabilized.

The game machine C1 includes an urging means for urging the ascending restricting member in a direction close to the displacement member, and the displacement member comes into contact with the ascending restricting member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. A separating action portion that displaces the ascending restricting member in a direction away from the displacement member, and the ascending restricting member that allows the ascending restricting member to be displaced in a direction closer to the displacement member at the descending position. A gaming machine C2 comprising an engaging portion to be engaged.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the displacement member includes a separation action portion that displaces the ascending regulating member in a direction away from the displacement member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight, and a lowering position. Since it is provided with an engaging portion that engages with the ascending restricting member, the restricting state by the ascending regulating member can be formed only by the operation of lowering the displacement member to the descending position by its own weight, and the restricting state by the ascending regulating member is formed. It is not necessary to separately provide a drive source for this purpose. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, the engagement between the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion is performed after allowing the ascending restricting member to be displaced in the direction closer to the displacement member, so that the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion are engaged accordingly. The force required to disengage and the displacement of the rise restricting member can be increased. As a result, even when a disturbance is input, it is possible to easily maintain the engagement between the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion.

In the game machine C2, the game machine C3 is characterized in that the disengagement between the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the elevating member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the disengagement between the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the elevating member, so that the displacement member is disturbed. Even when is input and tries to rattle, it is possible to prevent the engagement portion between the ascending restricting member and the displacement member from being inadvertently disengaged.

Further, since the engagement between the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is released by raising the elevating member, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive source for disengaging the ascending / descending member. The drive source for raising and lowering the member can also be used as the drive source for disengaging the engaging portion between the ascending regulating member and the displacement member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. ..

Further, when a drive source for disengaging the engagement portion between the ascending restricting member and the displacement member is separately provided, for example, due to the occurrence of poor control, the engaging portion between the ascending restricting member and the displacement member There is a risk that the elevating member will rise and push up the displacement member in a state where the engagement of the member is not disengaged. Since it can be performed according to the operation of pushing up the displacement member with the elevating member as the elevating member rises, when the displacement member is pushed up by the elevating member, the engagement portion between the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is engaged. Can form a state in which is surely released.

In the game machine C3, when the elevating member is lifted, the elevating member comes into contact with the ascending regulating member and displaces the ascending regulating member so that the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member are engaged with each other. The gaming machine C4 comprising a disengaging action portion for disengaging the engagement.

Here, the engagement between the ascending restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member can be disengaged by the pushing force when pushing up the displacement member as the elevating member moves up and down. In this case, the pushing force is used. It is necessary to make the engagement state to the extent that it can be disengaged, which makes strong engagement difficult. Further, in this case, when the engagement is released, vibration is generated due to the reaction, and the posture of the displacement member becomes unstable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, the elevating member abuts on the ascending regulating member and displaces the ascending regulating member when the elevating member is ascended. Since it is provided with a releasing action portion that disengages the engaging portion between the member and the displacement member, the disengagement is reliably performed even when the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member are firmly engaged. be able to. In other words, since a strong engaging state can be formed, rattling of the displacement member due to disturbance can be suppressed, and the posture of the displacement member in the descending position can be stabilized. Further, the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized by suppressing the vibration due to the reaction when the engagement is released.

In the game machine C3 or C4, the ascending restricting member is attached to the elevating member that elevates and elevates the displacement member between the descending position and the ascending position in a state where the displacement member is disengaged from the engaging portion. A game machine C5 characterized by being brought into contact with each other.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3 or C4, the ascending restricting member moves the displacement member between the descending position and the ascending position when the engagement portion of the displacement member is disengaged. Since it comes into contact with the elevating member for elevating and lowering, it functions as a guide guide and can suppress rattling when the elevating member is moved up and down. As a result, the posture of the displacement member that moves up and down with the lifting member can be stabilized.

In the game machine C5, the lift restricting member that comes into contact with the lift member is urged by the urging means in a direction close to the lift member.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of the game machine C5, the ascending regulating member abutting on the elevating member is urged by the urging means in the direction close to the elevating member, so that the elevating member is urged in a certain direction. It can be urged to stabilize its posture. Further, the rattling of the elevating member can be suppressed by the elastic buffering action of the urging means.

In the game machine C6, a driving means, a pinion rotationally driven by the driving means, and a rack to which the pinions are meshed are provided, and the rack is arranged on the elevating member, and the elevating member is the elevating member. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the rack is urged by the urging means in a direction away from the pinion via an ascending restricting member.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, the rotary motion of the pinion rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the elevating member is moved up and down along the guide member by the linear motion. To. In this case, since the elevating member is urged in the direction in which the rack is separated from the pinion via the ascending regulating member, the distance between the rack and the tooth surface of the pinion can be stabilized. That is, when the elevating member rattles in the direction in which the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion is narrowed, the urging force of the urging means acts in the direction in which the distance is widened, while the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion is widened. When the elevating member rattles, it can be regulated by the guide structure by the guide member that the interval spreads beyond a certain level. Therefore, the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion becomes narrow, and it is possible to prevent the tooth engagement resistance from becoming excessive.

A gaming machine C8, wherein any of the gaming machines C1 to C7 includes a lowering regulating member that regulates the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction when the elevating member pushes the displacement member up to the ascending position.

According to the game machine C8, in any of the game machines C1 to C7, when the elevating member pushes up the displacement member to the ascending position, the elevating member is provided with a lowering regulating member that regulates the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction. The provided displacement member and elevating member can be supported by the descent restricting member. As a result, the driving force for holding the displacement member in the ascending position can be unnecessary, so that the energy consumption of the driving means for driving the elevating member can be suppressed.

Further, since the regulation by the lowering regulation member is performed by raising the elevating member, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive source for forming the regulation by the lowering regulation member, and the drive source for raising and lowering the elevating member is not required. Can also be used as a drive source for forming the regulation by the descending regulation member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the game machine C8, the game machine C9 is characterized in that the restriction by the lowering regulation member is released by lowering the lowering member.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of the game machine C8, the release of the regulation by the lowering regulation member is performed by lowering the elevating member, so that it is necessary to separately provide a drive source for releasing the regulation. Therefore, the drive source for raising and lowering the elevating member can also be used as the drive source for releasing the regulation of the descent restricting member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when a drive source for releasing the regulation by the lowering regulation member is separately provided, for example, the elevating member is lowered and driven in a state where the regulation by the lowering regulation member is not released due to the occurrence of control failure. Where there is a risk of overload acting on the source or damage to the descent restricting member, etc., according to the game machine C9, the regulation by the descent restricting member can be released in accordance with the descent operation of the elevating member. When lowering the elevating member, it is possible to form a state in which the regulation by the lowering regulating member is surely released.

If the lowering regulating member is not an elevating member but a structure that regulates the displacement of the displacement member in the descending direction, the structure in which the regulation is released by the lowering regulating member as the elevating member descends is complicated. However, according to the gaming machines C8 and C9, since the descent regulating member has a structure that regulates the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction, the release of the regulation by the descent regulating member is accompanied by the descent of the elevating member. The structure to be performed can be simplified.

In the game machine C8 or C9, in a state where the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction is restricted by the descending regulating member, the ascending regulating member is brought into contact with the elevating member, and the descending regulating member is attached to the elevating member. The gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the abutting direction and the direction in which the ascending regulating member is abutted on the elevating member are different directions.

According to the game machine C10, in the game machine C8 or C9, the direction in which the lowering regulating member is in contact with the elevating member and the direction in which the ascending regulating member is in contact with the elevating member are different directions. The regulating member and the ascending regulating member can suppress the rattling of the elevating member in different directions. As a result, the posture of the elevating member can be effectively stabilized.

In the game machine C10, a driving means, a pinion rotationally driven by the driving means, and a rack to which the pinions are meshed are provided, and the rack is arranged on the elevating member, and the lowering regulating member is The gaming machine C11 is characterized in that it comes into contact with the elevating member from a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.

According to the game machine C11, the rotational motion of the pinion rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the elevating member is moved up and down along the guide member by the linear motion. In this case, the rack (elevating member) can be displaced in the direction parallel to the tooth surface with respect to the pinion, and the lowering restricting member is brought into contact with the elevating member from the direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack. Therefore, it is possible to regulate that the rack (elevating member) is displaced with respect to the pinion in the direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.

In any of the game machines C1 to C11, when the displacement member is arranged in the descending position, the ascending restricting member and the supporting member can come into contact with the displacement member from one side and the other side sandwiching the guide member. A game machine C12, which is characterized in that it is arranged in each of the above.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C11, when the displacement member is arranged in the descending position, the ascending restricting member and the supporting member sandwich the guide member on one side and the other side. Since they are arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the displacement members from the ground, rattling in either direction of the displacement member with respect to the guide member is regulated by the contact of the ascending regulating member or the supporting member. it can. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the displacement member arranged at the descending position from rattling due to the disturbance.

In any of the game machines C1 to C12, when the displacement member is arranged in the descending position, the support member and the ascending restricting member come into contact with the displacement member while changing their positions along the extending direction of the guide member. The gaming machine C13 is characterized in that the support member is arranged so as to be possible and the support member is arranged above the ascending restricting member.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C11, when the displacement member is arranged in the descending position, the support member and the ascending regulating member are positioned along the extending direction of the guide member. Since the displacement members are arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the displacement members, the rattling of the displacement members in the oblique direction can be regulated by the contact with the ascending regulating member and the supporting member. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the displacement member arranged at the descending position from rattling due to the disturbance.

Further, since the support member is arranged above the ascending regulating member, the supporting member does not hinder the elevating and lowering of the elevating member, and a space for the elevating member to ascend and descend can be secured. Therefore, the degree of freedom in design can be ensured.

<About the concept of the invention in which the structure in which the detected portion 641 of the rotating member 640 is detected by the detection sensor 684 is an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a movable member formed movably and a detecting means for detecting a moving position of the moving member, the detecting means is arranged on the moving member at unequal intervals along the direction of movement. The gaming machine D1 is characterized by including a plurality of detected portions provided and a plurality of detection sensors arranged on the movement locus of the detected portions.

Here, a gaming machine including a moving member rotatably formed and a detecting means for detecting a rotational position of the moving member is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-46667). According to this gaming machine, the detecting means includes a plurality of slits formed at equal intervals on the outer periphery of the moving member, and a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion arranged to face each other with the slits interposed therebetween, and the light receiving portion receives light. The number of pulses of the pulsed signal is cumulatively added, and the amount of rotation (that is, the rotation position) of the moving member from the reference position is detected based on the cumulatively added number of pulses. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a light reception failure of the light receiving portion or the like, the rotation position of the moving member and the cumulative addition number are deviated, and the rotation position of the moving member cannot be accurately detected. There was a problem. That is, when a detection failure occurs, the subsequent detection result is affected, and each time a detection failure occurs, the influence on the detection result is accumulated.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the detection means is arranged on a plurality of detected portions arranged on the moving member at unequal intervals along the direction of movement, and on the movement locus of the detected portions. Since the plurality of detection sensors provided are provided, the moving position of the moving member can be detected based on the combination of the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors. That is, the moving position of the moving member can be detected based only on the current detection results detected by the plurality of detection sensors, and the past detection result of the detection sensor is required to detect the moving position of the moving member. Therefore, the moving position of the moving member can be accurately detected.

In the game machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the moving direction, and the detected portion is among the plurality of divided members. It is characterized in that the plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the divided members, which are arranged in a part of the divided members and not in the remaining divided members. Game machine D2.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the moving direction to be detected. Is arranged on a part of the divided members and not on the remaining divided members, and the plurality of detection sensors are arranged based on the arrangement interval of the divided members. Therefore, each time the moving member is displaced by the amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the divided members, the combination of the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors can be changed. That is, the moving position of the moving member can be detected with the moving amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the dividing member as the minimum unit.

When a plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the dividing members, the plurality of detection sensors are arranged at positions corresponding to any of the plurality of dividing members. Means that. That is, it means that each of the plurality of detection sensors is arranged at a position where the presence / absence of the detected portion of the corresponding dividing member can be detected.

In the game machine D2, the moving member has a first section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected at a first interval, and a second section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a narrower interval than the first interval. A second section connected to the first section is formed, and the plurality of detection sensors have an interval based on the arrangement interval of the dividing members in the first section, and the movement locus of the detected portion in the first section. A game machine D3 characterized by being arranged on the top.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the moving member includes a first section in which a plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a plurality of divided members are more than the first interval. Since the second section connected at the second interval, which is a narrow interval, is formed, the length of the moving member can be shortened as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed.

In this case, since the plurality of detection sensors are arranged on the movement locus of the detected portion in the first section at intervals based on the arrangement interval (first interval) of the dividing members in the first section, It is possible to easily secure the space required for arranging the detection sensor. In other words, when setting the arrangement interval (second interval) of the dividing members in the second section, it is not necessary to consider the space for the arrangement of the detection sensor, and therefore, the second interval is set more. Can be set at narrow intervals. As a result, the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed from this point as well.

In the game machine D3, the split member includes a main body member on which the detected member is arranged, and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to each of the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member. By displacement of the link member with respect to the main body portion of the main body member and the adjacent split member, the distance between the split member and the adjacent split member is increased or decreased, and the link member is displaced in the first section. The gaming machine D4, characterized in that it reaches the end and is restricted from being displaced in a direction in which the split member is displaced in a direction to widen the distance from the adjacent split member.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, both ends of the split member can be displaced to each of the main body member on which the detected member is arranged and the main body member of the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member. By providing a link member connected to the main body member and the link member being displaced with respect to the main body portion of the main body member and the adjacent split member, the distance between the split member and the adjacent split member is increased or decreased. And the structure for forming the second section can be simplified.

In this case, in the first section, since the link member reaches the displacement end and the dividing member is restricted from being displaced in the direction of widening the distance from the adjacent dividing member, the detection is performed in the direction of widening the distance. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the position of the portion. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

The game machine D4 includes a base member in which the split member is displaceably arranged, and the base member guides the main body guide portion and the link member that guide the main body member when the split member is displaced. The link guide portion acts on the link member when the main body member is guided by the main body guide portion of the base member and is displaced, and the link guide portion is adjacent to the main body member. The gaming machine D5, characterized in that the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member of the dividing member is changed.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the base member includes a main body guide portion for guiding the main body member and a link guide portion for guiding the link member when the split member is displaced, and links. When the main body member is guided by the main body guide portion of the base member and displaced, the guide portion acts on the link member to change the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent split member. The distance between the divided members can be increased or decreased as the posture of the link member changes. That is, the first section and the second section can be formed by increasing or decreasing the distance between the dividing members while moving the moving member.

In the game machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guide portion of the base member, and the guided portion of the link member is slidably inserted through the link guide portion of the base member. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that it is formed in a groove shape and the groove width is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guide portion of the base member, and the link guide portion of the base member is guided by the link member. Since the portion is formed in a groove shape to be slidably inserted and the groove width is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member, the link member can be easily maintained at the displacement end in the first section. As a result, it is possible to reliably regulate the displacement of the dividing member in the direction of widening the distance from the adjacent dividing member, and suppress the positional variation of the detected portion in the direction of widening the distance. The detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

In any of the game machines D4 to D6, the split member includes a displacement member displaceably arranged on the main body member, and in the first section, the split member is brought into contact with the main body member of the adjacent split member. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced to a position, and the displacement member is restricted from being displaced in a direction in which the distance between the split member and the adjacent split member is narrowed.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D4 to D6, the dividing member includes a displacement member displaceable on the main body member, and in the first section, the adjacent dividing member Since the displacement member is displaced to the position where it comes into contact with the main body member, and the displacement of the dividing member in the direction of narrowing the distance from the adjacent dividing member is restricted, the detected portion in the direction of narrowing the distance. It is possible to suppress the positional variation of. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

<About the concept of the invention as an example of a structure for adjusting the distance between the divided members DV in the moving member 640>
In a gaming machine provided with a movable member formed so as to be movable, the moving member is formed by having a plurality of divided members and connecting the plurality of divided members along a moving direction, and the moving member is formed. Is a second section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected at a first interval and a second section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected at a second interval which is narrower than the first interval. A game machine E1 characterized in that a section is formed.

Here, a game machine including a moving member formed rotatably is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, a plurality of identification information is displayed on the front surface of the moving member along the circumferential direction, and the identification information arranged at a predetermined position is visually recognized by the player to perform the effect. However, in consideration of the visibility of the player, it is necessary to secure a certain size or more of the identification information. Therefore, if the number of displayed identification information is increased, the diameter of the moving member becomes large, which is necessary for the arrangement. While the space is increased, if the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of identification information displayed is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, the moving member has a first section in which a plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval and a plurality of divided members at an interval narrower than the first interval. Since the second section connected at the second interval is formed, the length of the moving member can be shortened as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed. That is, while securing the number of the dividing members, the space required for arranging the plurality of dividing members can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, when the identification information is displayed on each of the divided members, the space required for arranging the moving members can be suppressed while securing the number of displayed identification information.

In the game machine E1, the split member includes a main body member and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to each of the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member, and the link member is the main body member and The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by being displaced with respect to the main body portion of the adjacent divided member.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the split member includes a main body member and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to each of the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member. In addition, since the link member is displaced with respect to the main body portion of the main body member and the adjacent split member, the distance between the split member and the adjacent split member is increased or decreased, so that the first section and the second section are formed. The structure of can be simplified.

The game machine E2 includes a base member in which the split member is displaceably arranged, and the base member guides the main body guide portion and the link member that guide the main body member when the split member is displaced. The link guide portion acts on the link member and is adjacent to the main body member when the main body member is guided by the main body guide portion of the base member and is displaced. The gaming machine E3 characterized by changing the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member of the dividing member.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the base member includes a main body guide portion for guiding the main body member and a link guide portion for guiding the link member when the split member is displaced, and links. When the main body member is guided by the main body guide portion of the base member and displaced, the guide portion acts on the link member to change the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent split member. The distance between the divided members can be increased or decreased as the posture of the link member changes. That is, the first section and the second section can be formed by increasing or decreasing the distance between the dividing members while moving the moving member.

In the game machine E2 or E3, the dividing member includes a displacement member displaceably arranged on the main body member, and the displacement member has a posture of being tilted toward an adjacent dividing member in the first section. At the same time, the gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the posture in the second section is more upright than the posture in the first section.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2 or E3, the displacement member is in a posture of being tilted toward the adjacent split member in the first section, so that the displacement member is visually recognized by the player. It can be made easier. Therefore, for example, when the identification information is displayed on the displacement member, the visibility of the identification information to the player can be improved. Further, in the first section, since the distance between the dividing members is widened, it is possible to secure a space for the displacement member to tilt, and the displacement member can be increased in size accordingly. Therefore, from this point as well, the visibility of the displacement member, that is, the visibility of the identification information can be improved.

On the other hand, in the second section, the displacement member has an upright posture rather than the posture in the first section, so that the displacement member can be separated from the main body member of the adjacent split member, and the main body members can be separated by that amount. Can be brought closer and their spacing narrowed. That is, the second interval in the second section can be narrowed. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed.

In the game machine E4, the displacement member is displaceably disposed on the upper surface of the main body member, and in the second section, the displacement member is disposed above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent split member. The game machine E5.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, the displacement member is displaceably arranged on the upper surface of the main body member, and in the second section, above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent split member. Since it is arranged, interference with the displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, the main body members can be brought close to each other until they come into contact with each other, and the distance between them can be made narrower. That is, the second interval in the second section can be made narrower. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed.

In the game machine E3, the main body guide portion of the base member is characterized in that its trajectory is formed in a circular shape.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the trajectory of the main body guide portion of the base member is formed in a circular shape, so that the main body member is displaced by being guided by the main body guide portion of the base member. Can be simplified.

In the game machine E3, the trajectory of the dividing member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape connects all the plurality of dividing members in the circumferential direction at the first interval. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that it has the same radius as when it is arranged in a circular shape.

Here, the first section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval and the plurality of dividing members are connected in the circumferential direction at the second interval which is narrower than the first interval. When the second section is formed on the moving member (hereinafter referred to as "the former case"), the moving member is compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval (hereinafter referred to as "the latter"). Since the length in the circumferential direction of the above can be shortened, the space required for arranging the plurality of divided members can be suppressed while securing the number of the divided members. However, when the trajectories of the plurality of dividing members are formed in a circular shape, the radius in the former case is smaller than the radius in the latter case. Therefore, for the player who visually recognizes the dividing member of the first section in the former case, the actual number as the total number of the dividing members forming the moving member based on the number and the radius of the dividing member in the first section. Reminiscent of fewer numbers.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the trajectory of the dividing member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape covers all the plurality of dividing members. Since it is equivalent to the radius when connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval and arranged in a circle, the number of a plurality of dividing members is secured and the space required for arranging the plurality of dividing members is suppressed. At the same time, the player can be reminded of a number corresponding to the actual number as the total number of the divided members forming the moving member.

<Concept of the invention using the drive mechanism 630 as an example>
A moving member formed by connecting a base member on which a guide portion is extended and a plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member, and a driving force are applied to the moving member. The guide portion of the base member is provided with a driving means, and the guide portion of the base member acts on the split member to set the distance between the divided members to the first distance, and the guide portion is more than the first guide portion. The driving means includes a rotary driving member having an engaging portion that can engage with the split member, and the driving means is provided with a second guide portion that sets a gap between the split members in a narrow second gap. A game machine F1 characterized in that a plurality of divided members are displaced along a guide portion of the base member by rotating the member while engaging the engaging portion with the divided member.

Here, a game machine including a moving member formed rotatably is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, a plurality of identification information is displayed on the front surface of the moving member along the circumferential direction, and the identification information arranged at a predetermined position is visually recognized by the player to perform the effect. However, in consideration of the visibility of the player, it is necessary to secure a certain size or more of the identification information. Therefore, if the number of displayed identification information is increased, the diameter of the moving member becomes large, which is necessary for the arrangement. While the space is increased, if the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of identification information displayed is reduced.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application forms a moving member by connecting a plurality of divided members, and the section in which the plurality of divided members are connected to the moving member at the first interval is narrower than the first interval. By forming a section in which a plurality of dividing members are connected at the second interval of the interval, as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval, the number of the dividing members is secured and the plurality of the dividing members are connected. The space required for arranging the dividing members can be suppressed, that is, when the identification information is displayed on each dividing member, the space required for arranging the moving members can be suppressed while securing the number of displayed identification information. I came up with.

However, a moving member to which a plurality of dividing members are connected is connected to a section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected at a first interval and a plurality of dividing members at a second interval narrower than the first interval. There is a problem that it is difficult to displace the moving member with respect to the base member while forming the section to be formed.

On the other hand, in the game machine F1, the guide portion of the base member is narrower than the first guide portion that sets the distance between the divided members to the first distance by acting on the divided member and the first distance. The second guide portion for setting the distance between the divided members is provided at the second interval, and the drive means includes a rotary drive member having an engaging portion that can be engaged with the split member, and the rotary drive member engages with the rotary drive member. By rotating the portions while engaging them with the dividing members, the plurality of dividing members are displaced along the guide portions of the base members, so that the intervals between the dividing members are wide and narrow (the first interval). The moving member can be displaced with respect to the base member while forming the section (the section and the section of the second interval) in the moving member.

In the game machine F1, the game machine F2 is characterized in that a plurality of the engaging portions are formed on the rotation drive member.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, a plurality of engaging portions are formed on the rotation drive member, so that the efficiency of transmitting the driving force from the rotation drive member to the moving member is improved. Can be done.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the moving member is formed by connecting the plurality of divided body members in an endless manner in the circumferential direction, and the driving means includes two rotating driving members, and the rotation of the two. The gaming machine F3, wherein the driving member is arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1 or F2, the rotation drive members 2 are arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member, so that the rotation drive member is imparted to the moving member. The driving force can be distributed to different positions in the circumferential direction of the moving member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members and stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

In the game machine F3, the trajectories of the plurality of dividing members displaced along the guide portion of the base member are circular, and the rotation driving members of the second are 180 degrees out of phase in the circular orbits. A game machine F4 characterized in that it is arranged at a vertical position.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, the trajectories of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member are circular, and the rotational drive members 2 are circular trajectories. Since they are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase with each other, the driving force from the rotary driving member can be applied to the two most separated moving members (plurality of dividing members), and as a result. , The displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

In the game machine F3 or F4, the rotation drive member of the second is the engaging portion of the other rotation drive member while the engagement portion of one rotation drive member is not engaged with the division member. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the engaging portions are arranged in different phases so as to be engaged with the dividing member.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3 or F4, the rotation drive member of 2 is the other while the engaging portion of one rotation drive member is not engaged with the split member. Since the engaging portions of the rotary drive member are arranged so as to be engaged with the split member so that the phases of the engaging portions are different from each other, the engaging portion of one rotary drive member and the other rotary drive member It is possible to prevent the engaging portions from being disengaged from the split members at the same time, and it is possible to prevent the transmission of the driving force from the rotational driving member to the moving member to be intermittent. As a result, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

That is, in the configuration in which a plurality of dividing members are connected in an endless manner as in the present invention, when the driving force is intermittently transmitted from the rotary driving member to the moving member, the dividing member is divided as the driving force is transmitted and released. Since the distance between the members is increased or decreased, the posture of the moving member as a whole becomes unstable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F5, either one of the engaging portion of one rotation driving member and the engaging portion of the other rotation driving member is always engaged with the split member, and the moving member is always driven. Can form a transmitted state, so that the distance between the dividing members can be easily kept constant. As a result, even a moving member formed by connecting a plurality of divided members in an endless manner can stabilize the posture. That is, the displacement can be stabilized.

In any of the game machines F1 to F5, the plurality of dividing members include an engaged portion to which the engaging portion of the rotation driving means is engaged, and the engaged portion is a trajectory of the plurality of divided members. The gaming machine F6, which is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the above.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include an engaged portion to which the engaging portion of the rotation driving means is engaged, and the engaged portion thereof is provided. Since the portions are arranged on the outer peripheral side of the track of the plurality of divided members, the amount of rotation of the moving member (plurality of divided members) with respect to the amount of rotation of the rotation driving member can be reduced. That is, since the reduction ratio can be reduced, the drive torque applied from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be increased accordingly.

In any of the game machines F1 to F6, the rotation driving member is arranged at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the dividing member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions. A game machine F7 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F3 to F6, the rotation drive member is a split member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions, that is, between the split members. Since the engaging portion is arranged at a position where it can be engaged with the split member guided in a state where the interval is widened, interference between the adjacent split member and the rotation drive member can be suppressed, and the rotation drive member can be suppressed accordingly. The diameter of the can be increased. As a result, the drive torque applied from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be increased.

In any of the game machines F3 to F7, the guide portion of the base member acts on the split member displaced along the guide portion, so that the distance between the divided members is set to the first distance or the second. A third guide portion for transitioning from the interval of the above to the second interval or the first interval is provided, and the rotation driving member is attached to the dividing member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions. A game machine F8 characterized in that an engaging portion is arranged at a position where it can be engaged.

According to the game machine F8, in the game machine according to any one of the game machines F1 to F7, the rotation drive member is a split member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions, that is, an adjacent split member. Since the engaging portion is arranged at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member whose distance from the member is changed from the first interval or the second interval to the second interval or the first interval, the guide portion The split member that receives a relatively large reaction force from the (third guide portion) can be directly driven by the rotation drive member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the moving member formed by connecting the plurality of divided members from bending in the middle, and to stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

In any of the game machines F1 to F8, the dividing member is a main body member displaced along the guide portion, one end of which is rotatably connected to the main body member, and the main body member of an adjacent split member. The split member and the other end are provided with a link member whose ends are slidably connected, and one end and the other end of the link member are rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent split member, respectively. The distance between the adjacent split members is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotation drive member is a main body member of the split member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent split member is slidably connected. The gaming machine F9 is also characterized in that one end of the link member is engaged at a position close to a portion rotatably connected.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F8, the dividing member is rotatably connected to the main body member displaced along the guide portion and one end to the main body member. A link member whose other end is slidably connected to the main body member of the adjacent split member is provided, and one end and the other end of the link member are rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent split member, respectively. As a result, the distance between the split member and the adjacent split member is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotation drive member is the main body member of the split member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent split member is slidably connected. Since one end of the link member is engaged at a position closer to the rotatably connected portion than the portion to be connected, when the main body member of the split member is driven by the rotation drive member and displaced along the guide portion, The displacement of the main body member can be easily transmitted to the main body member of the adjacent split member via the link member. As a result, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

The game machine F4 or F5 is characterized in that the game machine F4 or F5 is provided with a drive gear that is arranged concentrically with a circle that is a trajectory of the plurality of divided members and is meshed with each of the rotational drive members.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of the game machine F4 or F5, the two rotation drive members are provided with drive gears that are meshed with each other. Therefore, by rotating the drive gears, the two rotation drive members are synchronized. It can be rotated in the state of being As a result, the rotation of the moving member can be stabilized. In this case, since the drive gear is arranged concentrically with the circle which is the trajectory of the plurality of division members, the drive gear and the rotational drive member 2 are moved members (plurality of division members) in the front view of the base member. It can be arranged inward from the outer circumference of the movement locus of. That is, since the drive gear and the rotary drive member 2 do not protrude outward from the outer shape of the moving member, the size can be reduced accordingly.

A game machine K1 characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine in any one of the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, and F1 to F10. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine K2, characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, and F1 to F10. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, and F1 to F10, the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. The featured game machine K3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board 330 Elevating body (displacement member)
341 Drive motor (drive means)
351 1st gear (1st gear, part of transmission member)
351b Contact part 352 2nd gear (2nd gear, part of transmission member)
354b Receiving part 354c Adjacent gear tooth (predetermined tooth)
413 Locking part (support member)
415 Lowering regulation member 417 Ascending regulation member 417c Release convex part (release action part)
417g torsion spring (urging means)
420 Drive side slide member (part of lifting member)
422 Second passage forming member (second passage member, working member)
422b Shaft branch (rotating shaft)
422f Containment recess (part of working member)
424 Connecting member 424a Cylindrical part (rotating shaft)
424b Upper side wall (one side wall)
424c Lower side wall (other side wall)
430, 3430 Driven side slide member (displacement member)
434a Engagement surface (engagement part)
434b Separation action surface (separation action part)
441 Drive motor (drive means)
442 Drive gear (pinion)
451 Guide rod (guide member)
452 rack (part of lifting member)
453 Contact wall (part of lifting member)
510, 2510 Base member (part of case body)
512 shaft support hole (rotating shaft)
515, 2515 Flow passage (downstream passage)
520, 2520 First passage forming member (first passage member)
521,521 Sorting base member (sorting member)
521c Shaft branch (rotating shaft)
521e Distribution convex part (wall part)
550 cover member (part of case body)
552 Introduction cylinder (upstream passage)
2560 Tip wall member (ball throwing regulation means, cover body)
2562 Torsion spring (biasing member)
620 Guide member (base member, main body guide part)
621 Connecting link action groove (link guide part, guide part)
621a Large diameter part (1st guide part)
621b Small diameter part (second guide part)
621c connection part (third guide part)
630 Drive mechanism (drive means)
634 Central transmission member (drive gear)
637 One-sided rotation drive member (rotation drive member)
637b Engagement part 638 Other side rotation drive member (rotation drive member)
638b Engagement part 640 Rotating member (moving member)
DV split member 641 Engagement part 641c Detected part (detection means)
642 Back side main body (main body member)
643 Front side main body (main body member)
644 Connecting link member (link member)
644a Insertion part (guided part)
646 Display board (displacement member)
684 Detection sensor (detection means)
S1 1st section S2 2nd section

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a communication state in which one end of a first passage member and a second passage member formed so that a ball can pass is communicated with each other and a separated state in which one ends are separated from each other. ing. (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-171636

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that it is difficult to stably throw a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of stabilizing the throwing of a ball from a first passage member to a second passage member. To do.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first passage member and a second passage member formed so that a ball can pass through, and at least the first passage member is displaced, whereby the said game machine. A communication state in which one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other so that a ball can be thrown from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is the second. It is possible to form a separated state in which the first passage member and the second passage member are not communicated with each other by being separated from one end of the passage member, and at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member. A connecting member that is displaceably arranged and that communicates between one end of the first passage member and the second passage member in a state of being displaced by being in contact with the first passage member or the other of the second passage member. To be equipped.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the upper elevating unit. It is a front view of the upper elevating unit. It is a front view of the upper elevating unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the upper elevating unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the upper elevating unit. (A) is a front view of the first gear, (b) is a rear view of the first gear, (c) is a front view of the second gear, and (d) is a second gear. It is a rear view of. It is a front view of a lifting body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a lifting body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a lifting body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a lifting body and a transmission device. It is a front perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the drive side slide member. It is a rear view of the drive side slide member. (A) is a front perspective view of the connecting member, (b) is a front view of the connecting member in the direction of arrow XXVIb of FIG. 26 (a), and (c) is an arrow of FIG. 26 (a). It is a rear view of the connecting member in the XXVIc direction view. It is a rear view of the 2nd passage forming member and the connecting member. It is a rear view of the 2nd passage forming member and the connecting member. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a side view of the liquid crystal elevating unit in the direction view of arrow XXX of FIG. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and a left swing unit. It is a front perspective view of the left swing unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of the rocking operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the swinging operation unit. It is a front view of the rocking operation unit. It is a partial front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit and the left swing unit. It is a partial front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit and the left swing unit. It is a front view of a rotating unit. It is a front perspective view of a rotating unit. It is a front view of the rotating unit in a state where a guide member is removed. It is a front perspective view of the rotating unit in a state where a guide member is removed. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating unit. It is a front view of the rotating unit in a state where a rotating member, a part of a pitching device, and a guide member are removed. It is a front schematic diagram of a guide member. (A) is a front view of the one-side rotation drive member and the other-side rotation member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the one-side rotation member and the other-side rotation member in the LIb-LIb line of FIG. 51 (a). is there. It is sectional drawing of the rotating unit cut in the plane including the rotating shaft of a central transmission member. It is a front view of a case member and a drive mechanism. (A) is a front view of the rotating member, and (b) is a side view of the rotating member in the direction of arrow LIVb of FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 54 (b) is a rear view of the rotating member in the direction of arrow LV in FIG. 54 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of the split member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the split member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a split member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the split member. (A) and (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the split member in the state of being arranged in the first section. (A) and (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the split member in a state of being arranged in the second section. It is an exploded front perspective view of a pitching device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a pitching device. It is an exploded front perspective view of an arm rotation mechanism. It is a front view of the pitching device in a state where the arm member of an arm rotation mechanism is arranged in a holding position. It is a front view of the pitching device in a state where the arm member of an arm rotation mechanism is arranged at a separated position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece appearance mechanism in a state where a holding piece is arranged in a protruding position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism in a state where a holding piece is arranged in an immersion position. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at a protruding position, and (b) is a partial enlargement of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism in the LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb line of FIG. 68 (a). It is a cross-sectional view. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at the immersion position, and (b) is a partial enlargement of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism in the LXIXb-LXIXb line of FIG. 69 (a). It is a cross-sectional view. It is a front perspective view of a guide member. It is a rear perspective view of a guide member. It is a front view of a guide member and a rotating member. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotating member in the first section, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotating member in the second section. (A) to (d) are state transition diagrams for each rotation of the one-side rotation drive member by 30 degrees. It is a state relation figure which shows the relationship between the engagement or disengagement state of one side rotation drive member and the other side rotation drive member with respect to a split member, and a phase. (A) to (c) are state transition diagrams for each unit rotation amount of the rotating member. It is a partially enlarged side view which enlarged the part in the 1st section of a rotating member. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the main body member of the tip wall member, (b) is a top view of the main body member of the tip wall member, and (c) is the line LXXIXc-LXXIXc of FIG. 79 (b). It is sectional drawing of the main body member of the tip wall member, (d) is the front view of the main body member of a tip wall member. It is a front view of the left swing unit. It is a front view of the left swing unit. It is a front view of the left swing unit. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the left swing unit and the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. (A) is a partial front view of the drive-side slide member in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a side view of the drive-side slide member in the direction of arrow LXXXIXb of FIG. 89 (a), and (c). Is a partial front view of the drive side slide member.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 88, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a ball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. .. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged in the front direction, and by sliding it in the back direction against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 54b is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one time. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time is not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and has a third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured in. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, balls to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (overhanging state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (retracted). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" ”Is easy to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (retracted state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

A second variable winning device 82a is arranged on the upper left of the first winning opening 64, and a second specific winning opening 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the second variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) so that the ball cannot win a prize in the second specific winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the second variable winning device is opened (expanded) at the time of a specific jackpot (for example, 15R probability variable jackpot), the ball is put into a special gaming state in which it is easy to win the second specific winning opening 82. Can be done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. , The left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100 and 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of a specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. 7 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIGS. 8 to 10 are front views of the operating unit 200.

In addition, in FIGS. 6 and 7, the state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged in the descending position is shown in FIG. 9, in which the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the first passage forming member of the left swing unit 500 are shown. The state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 600 is connected to the 520 is shown in FIG. 10, and the state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 600 is arranged in the raised position is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 6 to 10, a state in which the upper elevating unit 300 is arranged at the ascending position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 10, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 210 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the back case 210, an upper elevating unit 300, a liquid crystal elevating unit 400, and a left swing unit. The 500, the rotating unit 600, and the light emitting decorative member 700 are housed respectively.

The back case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 211 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side open. The bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210 is provided with a recess having a substantially circular shape in the center thereof, and the rotating unit 600 is housed in the recess. The liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged on the front side of the rotating unit 600, and the upper elevating unit 300, the left swing unit 500, and the decorative light emitting member 700 are the upper edge portion, the left side edge portion, and the lower side edge portion of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. It is arranged in each part.

The upper elevating unit 300 includes elevating bodies 330 in which a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) are arranged side by side in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 8), and the elevating bodies 330 are independently arranged in the height direction (FIG. 8). It is formed so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction (see FIGS. 12 and 13). In the state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged in the descending position, when the elevating body 330 is arranged in the elevating position, almost the entire surface of the third symbol display device 81 is visible (see FIG. 8), while the elevating body When the 330 is arranged in the lowered position (see FIG. 12), a part of the third symbol display device 81 is made invisible by the elevating body 330.

The liquid crystal elevating unit 400 has a pair of guide rods 451 arranged in a vertical posture with the axes along the vertical direction and arranged at predetermined intervals in the width direction, and both ends in the width direction of the guide rods 451. It includes a drive-side slide member 420 and a driven-side slide member 430 that are supported so as to be slidable, and a drive motor 441 that moves the drive-side slide member 420 up and down, and the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down by the drive motor 441. As a result, the driven side slide member 430 is driven up and down.

That is, when the drive-side slide member 420 is raised, the drive-side slide member 420 pushes the driven-side slide member 430 upward while resisting the action of gravity, while the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered. The driven side slide member 430 is lowered by its own weight as the drive side slide member 420 is lowered.

The drive-side slide member 420 is provided with the second passage forming member 422, and the driven-side slide member 430 is provided with the display device 81 on the FIG. 3 side. When the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged at the connecting position between the ascending position and the descending position, the second passage forming member 422 can be connected to the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 (FIG. FIG. 9). Further, when the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged in the raised position, the upper region of the third symbol display device 81 is arranged on the back side of the upper elevating unit 300 (see FIG. 10).

The left swing unit 500 includes a first passage forming member 520 that swings in a direction in which the tip side is moved up and down with the base end side as the center. When the first passage forming member 520 is swung in the direction of lifting the tip side, the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connecting position (see FIG. 9), and the tip side is connected to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. When it is swung in the direction of swinging down the tip side, it is arranged at the release position (see FIG. 10), and the connection of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 with the second passage forming member 422 is released.

The ball flowing down the game area can flow into the left swing unit 500, and the left swing unit 500 flows into the left swing unit 500 when the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connecting position (see FIG. 9). The ball is sent to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520, while the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the release position (see FIG. 10). , The inflowed ball is sent to the game area through a passage to be described later provided separately from the first passage forming member 520.

The rotating unit 600 is an effect device configured to imitate a roulette wheel. That is, a member (rotary member 640) corresponding to a wheel (rotary disk) formed rotatably, and the wheel are divided in the circumferential direction and colored in red or black, and different numbers are displayed. A portion corresponding to a pocket (display plate 646 and a partition plate 647) is provided, and a ball B thrown from a device on the inner peripheral side of the wheel (throwing device 650) is included in a portion corresponding to a plurality of pockets. Formed to fall into either.

In the state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged in the descending position (see FIG. 8), almost the entire rotating unit 600 is shielded from the player by the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, while the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is in the connecting position. In the arranged state (see FIG. 9), a part (lower part) of the member corresponding to the wheel is exposed, and in the state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged in the raised position (see FIG. 10), the wheel In addition to a part of the corresponding member (lower part), the ball B held on the inner peripheral side of the member corresponding to the wheel and the path from when the ball B is thrown to when it falls into the part corresponding to the pocket It is exposed and these are made visible to the player.

The light emitting decorative member 700 includes a case body formed of a light-transmitting material and a plurality of LEDs arranged inside the case body, and a mode of light emitted from the LEDs (for example, a light emitting LED). By changing the number and light emission time), the effect of light emission is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 20, detailed configurations of the upper elevating unit 300, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, the left swing unit 500, the rotating unit 600, and the light emitting decorative member 700 will be described. First, the upper elevating unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 20.

FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300, and FIGS. 12 and 13 are front views of the upper elevating unit 300. It should be noted that in FIGS. 11 and 12, all the elevating bodies 330 arranged side by side in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 12) are arranged in the ascending position, and in FIG. 13, all the elevating bodies 330 are lowered. The state of being arranged at the position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, in the upper elevating unit 300, a plurality of elevating bodies 330 (four in the present embodiment) are arranged in the width direction of the horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped base member 310, and each elevating body 330 is arranged. It is configured to be movable up and down between the ascending position (see FIG. 12) and the descending position (see FIG. 13). Next, the configuration of the drive mechanism of each elevating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15.

FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300, and FIG. 15 is a rear disassembled perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, in the upper elevating unit 300, the base member 310 is provided with a space for accommodating the transmission device 350 between the horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped base member 310 and the base member 310. A rear cover 320 that is fastened and fixed to the back side, and an elevating body 330 in which a rack 332 is housed between the base member 310 and the back cover 320 and a circular effect portion 331 is arranged on the front side of the base member 310. Mainly, a drive device 340 that is fastened and fixed to the back cover member 320 to generate a driving force required for raising and lowering the elevating body, and a transmission device 350 that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device 340 to the elevating body 330. Be prepared.

The cover member 310 is a semicircular recessed portion 311 having a semicircular shape in which the center of a circle is arranged at the lower end and recessed from the front side side surface to the back side, and a rack 332 of the elevating body 330 from the back side side surface. It is provided with a guide rib 312 that is projected in a rib shape toward a position with a slight gap in the left-right direction.

The semicircular recessed portion 311 is configured with a radius slightly larger than the outer diameter of the effect portion 331 of the elevating body 320, and the center of the circle of the semicircular recessed portion 311 and the center of the effect portion 331 are vertically linear. It is placed at the position that matches with. As a result, when the effect portion 331 moves upward, it is possible to move to the front side of the position where the effect portion 331 interferes with the semicircular recessed portion 311 on the front side of the base member 310, and the vertical width of the base member 310 is secured. , It is possible to secure a large ascending movement width of the effect unit 331.

The guide rib portion 312 is a rib-shaped portion extending in the vertical direction, and is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right side surfaces of the rack 332 of the elevating body 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11). As a result, it is possible to prevent the elevating body 330 from moving in the left-right direction (translation or tilting operation) during the elevating movement.

Further, by configuring the semicircular recessed portion 311 as a recess recessed from the front side to the back side, the area where the back side can be made invisible is increased as compared with the case where the space penetrates in the front-rear direction. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large area for arranging the mechanical portion (a portion such as a gear or a motor that is not intended to be visually recognized by the player).

The back cover 320 has a main body portion 321 formed in a case shape with the front side and the lower side open, a cylindrical shaft support portion 322 projecting from the main body portion 321 to the front side, and the front surface from the shaft support portion 322. A guide hole 323, which is a long hole drilled in a position where the extension direction is aligned with the vertical direction at a position shifted in the left-right direction in view, and a shaft support portion from the bottom of the periphery where the upper shaft support portion 322 is projected. A rib-shaped locking portion 324 along the radial direction of 322 is provided.

The shaft support portion 322 is a portion that pivotally supports the pair of gear members 351 and 352 of the transmission device 350, and the guide hole 323 is a hole that guides the elevating operation of the elevating body 330.

The locking portion 324 is arranged on the upper side in the vertical direction and the lower side in the vertical direction with respect to the shaft of the upper shaft support portion 322, and in a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position or the descending position, respectively, the first The end of the locking arc portion 351c of the gear 351 is a portion that can be brought into contact with each other in the rotational direction.

The elevating body 330 includes an effect unit 331 formed in a circular plate shape, and a rack 332 fixed to the back surface of the effect unit 331 and extended in the vertical direction at a position with a gap from the back side side surface of the effect unit 331. , Equipped with.

The effect unit 331 is a portion in which a circular liquid crystal panel is arranged inside a circular outer frame, and an effect is produced by displaying a pattern or a figure on the liquid crystal panel.

The rack 332 includes a slide shaft 332a that is convexly provided on the back surface side and is projected to a position where it is inserted into the guide hole 323 of the back cover 320.

The slide shaft 332a is not a mode in which a plurality of the slide shafts 332a are convexly provided, but a mode in which one is projected. Therefore, since the number of guide holes 323 arranged can be reduced to one, it is possible to secure a large moving distance of the rack 332 while suppressing the arrangement space of the guide holes 323 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rack 332 can come into contact with the guide rib portion 312 in the left-right direction, the rack 332 can be in the left-right direction even if the rack 332 is connected to the guide hole 323 at one position. It is possible to prevent tilting to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effecting unit 331 from swinging in the left-right direction when the elevating body 330 moves up and down, and it is possible to prevent the distance between the second gear 352 and the rack 332 from fluctuating and the toothing relationship from deteriorating. be able to.

The drive device 340 includes a drive motor 341 which is a drive source fastened and fixed to the back cover 320, and a drive gear 342 which is rotated by the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 341 and transmits a drive force to the transmission device 350. ..

The transmission device 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 322 and meshed with the drive gear 342, and is meshed with the first gear 351 and the rack 332 and pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 322. It includes a second gear 352.

As described above, since the plurality of (four in the present embodiment) elevating bodies 330 each include an independent drive motor 341, in addition to the operation in which all the elevating bodies 330 interlock and move up and down, each elevating body 330 is used. It can be raised and lowered individually. Since the technical idea of each elevating body 330 is common, the elevating body 330 arranged at the left end of FIG. 11 will be described below, and the other elevating bodies 330 will be omitted.

Next, the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) is a front view of the first gear 351, FIG. 16 (b) is a rear view of the first gear 351 and FIG. 16 (c) is a front view of the second gear 352. 16 (d) is a rear view of the second gear 352.

As shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the first gear 351 has a main body portion 351a having a through hole through which the shaft support portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted and gear teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface. And, on the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 351a, the overhang length of about half of the tooth length of the gear teeth (extending to the pitch circle C1 in which the contacts of the teeth to be meshed are connected) is extended to the portion where the formation of the gear teeth is omitted. A contact portion 351b that is formed overhanging in the radial direction with an overhang length) and a locking portion that is convexly provided in an arc shape centered on the axis along a direction parallel to the axis from the back surface side surface of the main body portion 351a. It includes an arc portion 351c.

The contact portion 351b has an arc shape whose tip surface in the radial direction has a radius r centered on the central axis of the main body portion 351a, and has a tooth thickness (arc) equivalent to two to three gear teeth formed on the main body portion 351a. The angle formed by the center of the tooth is composed of tooth thickness in the range of about 45 to 60 degrees). That is, since the formation length in the circumferential direction of the main body 351a is longer than the tooth thickness of one gear tooth, the strength in the circumferential direction can be secured as compared with the gear teeth of the main body 351a.

The locking arc portion 351c is a portion whose tip in the circumferential direction can be brought into contact with the locking portion 324 (see FIG. 14) of the back cover 320 in the circumferential direction, and regulates the rotation angle of the first gear 351. There is a role.

As shown in FIGS. 16 (c) and 16 (d), the second gear 352 is composed of two layers of gears having different tooth shapes on the front side and the back side, and is formed in a donut plate shape. And the deformed gear portion 354 formed on the front side of the intermediate plate 353 and having a partially deformed tooth profile, and the spur gear shape formed on the back side of the intermediate plate 353 and meshed with the rack 332 (see FIG. 15). The transmission gear unit 355 is provided.

The intermediate plate 352 is formed so as to project radially outward from the tips of the gear teeth of the deformed gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. Therefore, the mating member (first gear 351 or rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) to be meshed with the mating member (first gear 351 or rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) can be brought into contact with each other by overlapping in a direction parallel to the tooth surface (see FIG. It is possible to suppress the movement of the 330 in the direction parallel to the tooth surface during the ascending / descending operation.

The deformed gear portion 354 is a portion that is meshed with the first gear 351 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11), has a through hole through which the shaft support portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted, and has gear teeth on the outer peripheral surface. The main body portion 354a to be formed, the receiving portion 354b formed overhanging the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a where the formation of gear teeth is omitted, and one end of the receiving portion 354b (on the right side of FIG. 16C). An adjacent gear tooth 354c, which is adjacent to the end), is provided.

The receiving portion 354b is located on the counterclockwise side when viewed from the front from the adjacent gear tooth 354c along the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a (the side where the first gear 351 engages with the adjacent gear portion 354c when the elevating body 330 is moved upward). ) Is a portion formed at an arrangement angle (about 30 to 50 degrees) equivalent to two gear teeth, and the tip surface of the contact portion 351b in a state where the transmission device 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 322. The tooth length of the adjacent gear tooth 354c is formed between the curved wall portion 354b1 formed to be curved along the arc shape of the radius r formed by the tooth, and the curved wall portion 354b1 and the tooth surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a connecting wall portion 354b2 formed with a tooth length of about half of that (a tooth length extending up to a pitch circle C2 connecting the contact points of teeth to be toothed). Therefore, the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the connecting wall portion 354b2 side has an overhang length of about half the radial overhang length of the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the opposite side of the connecting wall portion 354b2. It is formed so as to project radially from the connecting wall portion 354b2 in a state of being integrally formed with the connecting wall portion 354b2.

As shown in FIG. 16C, in a state where the transmission device 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 322, the second gear 352 is a curved wall along an arc shape having a radius r formed by the tip surface of the contact portion 351b. When the portion 354b1 is arranged, the adjacent gear tooth 354c is arranged outside the arc having a radius r (the second gear 352 side) (the adjacent gear tooth 354c has a radius r). The formation is limited to a position that does not interfere with the circle).

Next, the elevating operation of the elevating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20. Since the operation path of the ascending operation and the descending operation is the same, the ascending operation will be described here, and the description of the descending operation will be omitted.

17 to 20 are front views of the elevating body 330 and the transmission device 350 in which the ascending operation of the elevating body 330 is illustrated in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 17, the state in which the elevating body 330 is arranged in the descending position is shown, and in FIG. 18, the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. The state in which the distance increasing operation is performed and the circumferential end of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 begins to mesh with the adjacent gear tooth 354c of the second gear 352 is shown, and FIG. 19 shows the state shown in FIG. The state immediately after the first gear 351 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view and the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise in the front view so that the end face of the contact portion 351b in the circumferential direction and the adjacent gear tooth 354c are disengaged. Illustrated, FIG. 20 shows a state in which only the first gear 351 is rotated by a predetermined amount clockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the elevating body 330 is moved up and down by transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) to the rack 332 via the drive gear 342 and the transmission device 350. To. More specifically, the driving force of the drive gear 342 is transmitted from the first gear 351 meshed with the drive gear 342 to the deformed gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 meshed with the first gear 351. The rotation of the second gear 352 is transmitted to the rack meshed with the transmission gear portion 355 (see FIG. 16D) of the second gear 352, so that the elevating body 330 moves up and down.

In the lowered position shown in FIG. 17, the slide shaft 322a (see FIG. 15) of the rack 332 is arranged at the lower end of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15) of the back cover 320. Therefore, it is possible to mechanically prevent the rack 332 from moving further downward.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 17, the first gear 351 comes into contact with the circumferential end of the locking arc portion 351c of the first gear 351 and the locking portion 324 on the lower side of the back cover 320. The rotation of the rack 332 in the clockwise direction (the direction in which the rack 332 is lowered) is mechanically prevented.

As a result, even if the drive gear 342 is over-rotated due to poor control of the drive motor 341 or the like, and a load is generated to further rotate the first gear 351 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. By mechanically preventing the rotation of the first gear 351, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the second gear 352, and the situation where the rack 332 descends can be avoided. Therefore, the slide shaft 322a (FIG. FIG. 15) is pressed against the lower side surface of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15), and the slide shaft 322a or the guide hole 323 can be prevented from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the process of ascending the elevating body 330, the circumferential end face of the contact portion 351b whose peripheral tooth thickness is made larger than that of other gear teeth meshes with the adjacent gear tooth 354c. Therefore, the load transmitted in the reverse direction from the second gear 352 to the first gear 351 (load due to the weight of the elevating body 330) can be received by the contact portion 351b, which has a higher strength than the other gear teeth. , The durability of the first gear 351 can be improved.

Since the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 projects to the pitch circle C1 and the connecting wall portion 354b2 of the second gear 352 extends to the pitch circle C2, the contact portion 351b is connected in the state of FIG. It is approached to a position where it rubs against the wall portion 354b2. Therefore, the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be brought into contact with each other at a portion close to the tooth root of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, and the durability of the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be improved.

Further, since one side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c is connected to the connecting wall portion 354b2 in the circumferential direction, the strength against the load received from the circumferential direction is improved as compared with the other gear teeth. In other words, since the radial overhang length of the side surface on the connecting wall portion 354b2 side is shortened, the resistance to deformation of the adjacent gear tooth 354c in the direction perpendicular to the tooth length direction is increased, and the connecting wall portion is formed. Since the 354b2 is integrally formed with the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the total tooth thickness of the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the connecting wall portion 354b2 as a portion that receives the force applied to the adjacent gear tooth 354c is increased. , The resistance to the circumferential deformation of the adjacent gear tooth 354c increases. As a result, it is possible to prevent the adjacent gear teeth 354c from being damaged when receiving the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

As shown in FIG. 19, immediately after the elevating body 330 is arranged in the raised position, the arcuate tip portion of the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear tooth 354c come into contact with each other. In this state, since the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 are not in contact with each other in the circumferential direction of the first gear 351, the transmission of the driving force in the rotational direction of the first gear 351 to the second gear 352 is released. To.

Therefore, the force supporting the weight of the elevating body 330 meshed with the second gear 352 is not transmitted from the first gear 351 and the elevating body 330 starts to move in the falling direction, so that the second gear 352 moves the rack 332. It starts to rotate in the direction of downward operation (counterclockwise in FIG. 19).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, since the contact portion 351b is arranged in the range in the direction in which the adjacent gear tooth 354c rotates (inside the circle formed by the tip of the adjacent gear tooth 354c), the second gear When rotating the 352, it is necessary to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

Since the outer peripheral shape of the contact portion 351b is an arc shape centered on the central axis of the main body portion 351a, the load applied to the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 351b is an axial component toward the axial side of the first gear 351. It is decomposed into Fa and a circumferential component Fb along the tangential direction of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

The axial component Fa is not in a direction in which the first gear 351 can rotate, and in a state where the rigidity of the first gear 351 is ensured (in a structure that does not expand and contract in the radial direction), the abutting portion is formed by the axial component Fa. It is difficult to push 351b out of the movement locus of the adjacent gear teeth 354c.

The circumferential component Fb faces the rotation direction of the first gear 351 but slips between the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the contact portion 351b because the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the contact portion 351b come into contact with each other at a point. It is difficult to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the circumferential component Fb because the first gear 351 is difficult to rotate.

Therefore, since the contact portion 351b is prevented from being pushed to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the second gear 352 is prevented from rotating, and the second gear 352 and The state of the elevating body 330 is maintained.

Both the abutting portion 351b and the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b are formed from an arc shape having a radius r centered on the first gear 351 and, as shown in FIG. 19, the circumference of the first rotating gear 351. Since the contact is made against the surface along the direction, the rotation of the first gear 351 can be firmly received by utilizing the entire area of the curved wall portion 354b1. As a result, even if the stop of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) is delayed after the elevating body 330 reaches the ascending position, it is possible to prevent the first gear 351 from over-rotating, and the drive motor 341 is stopped. It is possible to prevent the delay from affecting the operation mode of the elevating body 330.

As shown in FIG. 20, the first gear 351 rotates and stops until the locking arc portion 351c comes into contact with the upper locking portion 324. From FIG. 18 to FIG. 20, since the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 pushes the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the second gear 352 is rotated, so that the adjacent gear tooth The 354c is aligned with respect to the second gear 352, and in the state shown in FIG. 20, a state in which the adjacent gear teeth 354c abuts on the tooth tip surface of the contact portion 351b can be reliably formed.

From the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, since the elevating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position, it is restricted that the second gear 352 rotates in the direction in which the rack 332 is moved ascending (clockwise in FIG. 20). Will be done. Therefore, even if the first gear 351 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 19 with respect to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 does not rotate. Therefore, it is possible to reliably form a state in which the tooth tip surface of the contact portion 351b faces the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

As shown in FIG. 20, in a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position, the curved wall portion 354b1 of the second gear 352 follows an arc shape having a radius r formed by the tip surface of the abutting portion 351b. Since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are arranged outside the arc of radius r (second gear 352 side) in the arranged posture, only the first gear 351 is rotated in the same rotation direction (from the state shown in FIG. 19). It can be rotated in the counterclockwise direction (FIG. 19).

At this time, the tooth thickness of the contact portion 351b is thicker than that of the other gear teeth (approximately the thickness of two to three gear teeth), so that the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is moderately adjusted. can do. That is, for example, even if the first gear 351 stops in a phase intermediate between the state shown in FIG. 19 and the state shown in FIG. 20, the relationship between the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b is the same. It is possible to regulate the rotation of the second gear 352.

Further, it is possible to regulate the rotation of the second gear 352 in both directions while keeping the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 loose. That is, even if the second gear 352 is about to rotate clockwise in FIG. 20, the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b comes into contact with the tooth tip surface of the abutting portion 351b, so that the direction of the load is adjacent to the above-mentioned details. The rotation of the second gear 352 is restricted as in the case of contact between the set gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b. Therefore, since the rack 332 is restricted from moving in both the up and down directions when the elevating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling in the elevating body 330. It is difficult to regulate both the upper and lower directions (particularly, the regulation in the ascending direction) with the conventional crank mechanism, and it is achieved for the first time by the gear shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 as in the present embodiment. It is a thing.

As described above, due to the relationship between the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352, it is possible to prevent the second gear 352 from rotating while the elevating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position. It is not necessary to continuously apply the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) with a magnitude equal to or larger than its own weight in order to maintain the above position, and energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, it is possible to maintain the elevating body 330 in the ascending position by using the dead center of the crank mechanism, but in that case, there is a problem that the crank mechanism becomes large in size corresponding to the moving distance of the elevating body 330. there were. In the present embodiment, the crank mechanism is not required, and the rotation of the second gear 352 can be regulated by the relationship between the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352, so that the transmission portion can be miniaturized.

A method of releasing the restriction on the rotation of the second gear 352 will be described. In the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, another member that interferes with the contact portion 351b is not arranged in the rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 20) when the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 is rotated in the opposite direction. Therefore, the rotational operation in the direction in which the elevating body 330 of the first gear 351 is lowered (clockwise in FIG. 20) is allowed.

When the first gear 351 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 20 to the state shown in FIG. 19 and further rotated in the same direction, the restriction on the rotation direction of the second gear 352 is released (the contact portion 351b of the contact portion 351b). (The tip surface is separated from the adjacent gear tooth 354c), and the elevating body 330 can be lowered. That is, the rotation restriction of the second gear 352 can be released by the rotation operation of the first gear 351, and the first gear 351 can be made to perform another operation in order to release the rotation restriction of the second gear 352. Since it is unnecessary, the structure of the first gear 351 can be simplified.

Next, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 33. FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. As shown in FIG. 21, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is composed of a drive-side slide member 420 that has an effect portion 422a having a circular liquid crystal portion and moves up and down, and a member that moves up according to the drive-side slide member 420. A driven side slide member 430 including a third symbol display device 81 is provided, and the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are communicated with a common guide rod 451 and are configured to operate in the same direction. Will be done.

FIG. 22 is a front exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. As shown in FIG. 22, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 includes a base member 410 composed of a pair of long plate-shaped members, a drive-side slide member 420 configured to be capable of elevating and lowering in the vertical direction, and driving thereof. Generated from a driven side slide member 430 that is arranged above the side slide member 420 and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction, a drive device 440 that generates a driving force for the drive side slide member 420 to move up and down, and the drive device 440. A transmission device 450 having a pair of guide rods 451 that transmit the driving force to the drive-side slide member 420 and guide the operation of the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430, and the lower ends of the pair of base members 410. The lower front plate member 460, which is connected to the drive-side slide member 420, and the cover member 470, which is arranged on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and on the front side of the upper part, are mainly provided. ..

The base member 410 is a U-shaped recess that is arranged at positions that vertically coincide with each other in the vertical direction of the main body member 411 that is configured as a vertically long plate-shaped member and the upper and lower ends of the main body member 411 and is open to the front. A member of the guide rod support portion 412, which is arranged inside the vertical line drawn from the guide rod support portion 412 (the side closer to the other base member 410) and extends to the front side of the main body member 411. The first shaft branch 414, which is projected in a cylindrical shape on the front side of the main body member 411 on the opposite side of the locking portion 413 with the vertical straight line drawn from the stop portion 413 and the guide rod support portion 412, and its first. A descent restricting member 415 that is pivotally supported by the shaft support 414 and regulates the descent operation of the drive side slide member 420, and a cylindrical shape that is arranged below the first shaft support 414 and is projected on the front side of the main body member 411. It mainly includes a second shaft branch 416 and a lift restricting member 417 that is pivotally supported by the second shaft branch 416 and regulates the climbing operation of the driven side slide member 430.

The guide rod support portion 412 is a portion that supports both ends of the guide rod 451 of the transmission device 450, and is formed with an opening width that can accommodate the guide rod 451. In the present embodiment, the cover member 470 is fastened and fixed to the base member 410, so that the opening on the front side of the guide rod support portion 412 is closed, and the guide rod 451 is fixed to the guide rod support portion 412.

The locking portion 413 is a portion that comes into contact with the lower side surface of the fall prevention portion 435 of the driven side slide member 430 in the vertical direction, and the driven side slide member 430 further descends from the contact state. To regulate.

The lowering restricting member 415 and the ascending restricting member 417 rotate with the elevating operation of the driving side slide member 420 and have a role of restricting the movement of the driven side sliding member 430, which will be described in detail later.

The drive-side slide member 420 is a member whose left and right ends are fastened and fixed to the rack 452 of the transmission device 450, and is moved up and down by the slide operation of the rack 452.

The driven side slide member 430 does not have an independent driving device, and its left and right ends are supported by guide rods 451 so as to be slidable, and the driven side slide member 420 moves up and down in accordance with the elevating operation of the driving side slide member 420. The driven side slide member 430 includes a main body member 431 having a third symbol display device 81 and being elongated in the left-right direction, functional units 432 arranged at both ends of the main body member 431 in the left-right direction, and the functional parts thereof. A guide hole 433 that is a hole drilled in the 432 in the vertical direction through which the guide rod 451 is inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 434 that extends upwardly and inclined in the left-right outward direction at the lower end of the functional portion 432. A fall prevention portion 435 extending to the back side inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end of the functional portion 432 (the side close to the other guide hole 433) is mainly provided.

The hook-shaped portion 434 is a portion hooked on the ascending regulating member 417. In a state where the driven side slide member 430 is arranged in the descending position, the ascending restricting member 417 wraps around and is hooked on the engaging surface 434a which is the upper side surface of the hook-shaped portion 434 (see FIG. 29). It is possible to prevent the member 430 from moving in the ascending direction (for example, it is possible to prevent the member 430 from bouncing due to the reaction of falling). Further, since the hook-shaped portion 434 is tilted upward and the engaging claw portion 417e of the rising restricting member 417 is formed in parallel with the inclination, the engagement between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the rising regulating member 417 causes the hook-shaped portion 434 to be tilted in the left-right direction. Wobble can also be suppressed.

The shape of the tip of the hook-shaped portion 434 (outside the tip of the engaging claw portion 417e in the state shown in FIG. 29 (the portion on the right side of FIG. 29)) is based on the movement locus of the engaging claw portion 417e. Is also shaped to fit below. Therefore, even in a state where the engaging claw portion 417e and the hook-shaped portion 434 are engaged with each other and a load is applied to each other, the ascending regulating member 417 can be rotated.

The drive device 440 includes a drive motor 441 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and a drive gear 442 that is rotated by the drive force of the drive motor.

In the transmission device 450, a pair of guide rods 451 fixed to the guide rod support portion 412 of the base member 410, and the drive side slide member 420 supported by the guide rods 451 so as to be slidable are fastened and fixed, and the drive gear 442. Mainly includes a rack 452 meshed from the inside (inside of the pair of drive gears 442) and a vertically elongated plate-shaped contact wall 453 extending from the vicinity of the tooth root of the rack 452 to the front side.

The contact wall 453 has a role of rotating the ascending restricting member 417 to the release side and a role of moving the rack 452 away from the drive gear 442 by receiving the urging force of the ascending restricting member 417. To do.

The left and right ends of the lower front plate member 460 are fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and the central portion is bent in a manner offset to the back side by a predetermined amount as compared with the left and right ends. A main body member 461 having a shape, a guide hole 462 bored in the left half of the main body member 461 along the left-right direction (in a manner of ascending and tilting toward the outside), and extending above the main body member 461. It is mainly provided with a tubular passage portion 463 which is a tubular member to be formed and whose upper end portion is opened to the front side.

The guide hole 462 is a long hole in which the slide shaft 423b of the wiring storage member 423 is slidably guided.

The tubular passage portion 463 is a tubular member through which a ball can pass, and forms a second passage of the drive side slide member 420 in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at a connecting position (see FIG. 31). It is a member through which a ball flowing down through the member 422 passes.

The detailed configuration of the drive-side slide member 420 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. FIG. 23 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive-side slide member 420, FIG. 24 is an exploded rear perspective view of the drive-side slide member 420, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the drive-side slide member 420.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the drive-side slide member 420 is a disk having a main body member 421 formed as a plate-shaped member elongated in the left-right direction and an effect portion 422a composed of a circular liquid crystal. A second passage forming member 422 in which a portion is fastened and fixed to the central portion of the main body member 421 from the front side and a groove through which a ball can pass is extended from the disk portion to the left in the front view, and a second passage thereof. A wiring storage member 423 whose one end is pivotally supported at the lower left end of the forming member 422 and whose other end is supported by a guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460, and a second flow path forming member 422. Mainly includes a connecting member 424 which has a passage portion which is pivotally supported by the shaft and penetrates along the circumferential direction of the shaft and serves as a portion for introducing a sphere into the groove portion 422b of the second flow path forming member 422.

The main body member 421 is opened to the front side to a guide portion 421a forming a part of a tubular portion through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted and a portion extending to the left in the front view from the central portion. It mainly includes a groove portion 421b arranged so as to be inclined downward to the left in the embodiment, and a discharge opening 421c formed through the groove portion 421b at the lower left end portion having a size equal to or larger than the diameter of a sphere in the front-rear direction. ..

The guide portion 421a is a groove portion having an arcuate cross section that is opened to the back side and extends in the vertical direction, and the guide rod is closed by closing the opened portion with a rack 452 (see FIG. 22) of the transmission device 450. A tubular portion through which 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted is formed.

The groove portion 421b is a member that forms a sphere passage jointly with the second passage forming member 422, and the sphere that has flowed down along the groove portion 421b is discharged to the back surface side of the main body member 421 through the discharge opening 421c. To.

The second passage forming member 422 includes an effect portion 422a composed of a circular liquid crystal, and a shaft support portion 422b that is projected in a cylindrical shape from a disk portion arranged on the back side of the circular liquid crystal to the back side. A sensor member 422c that is arranged below the shaft support portion 422b and detects the passage of a sphere, and a groove that opens to the back side with a width that allows the sphere that has passed through the sensor member 422c to flow down, in the front-rear direction with the groove portion 421b. A shape capable of accommodating a groove portion 422d having the same shape, a guide portion 422e forming a tubular portion through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted, and a connecting member 424 between the shaft support portion 422b and the sensor member 422c. Mainly includes a storage recess 422f recessed in.

The shaft support portion 422b is a portion where the connecting member 424 is pivotally supported. In the state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the connecting position, after the ball flowing down the left swing unit 500 passes through the sensor member 422c via the connecting member 424, the ball passes through the passage formed by the grooves 422d and 421b. To do.

The wiring storage member 423 is a member that accommodates wiring that extends from the lower front member 460 or the like and is connected to the effect portion 422a or the like, and is a length that is pivotally supported by the left lower end portion of the second passage forming member 422 in the front view. It mainly includes a main body portion 423a which is a rod-shaped portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a cylindrical slide shaft 423b which is projected from the lower end portion of the main body portion 423a to the back surface side.

The main body portion 423a is a member for accommodating wiring in an inner portion formed in a U-shaped cross section, and is configured in a curved shape so as to be convex in a direction away from the second passage forming member 422 in the longitudinal direction. To. As a result, the wiring can be loosened along the curved shape in the vicinity of the shaft support position with the second passage forming member 422, and it is possible to prevent the wiring from being bent and broken.

The slide shaft 423b is a rod-shaped portion inserted into the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460.

Next, the configuration of the connecting member 424 will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (a) is a front perspective view of the connecting member 424, FIG. 26 (b) is a front view of the connecting member 424 in the direction of arrow XXVIb of FIG. 26 (a), and FIG. 26 (c) is a front view. 26 (a) is a rear view of the connecting member 424 in the direction of arrow XXVIc.

As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), the connecting member 424 extends in the radial direction of the tubular portion 424a formed in a tubular shape and pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 422b and the tubular portion 424a thereof. The plate-shaped upper side wall portion 424b to be provided and the curved plate-shaped lower side wall portion 424c arranged to face the upper side wall portion 424b with a length equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere below the front view of the upper side wall portion 424b. And the connecting cover 424d that connects the back side ends of the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c and is laid between the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c, and is wound and connected to the tubular portion 424a. The member 424 is mainly provided with a torsion spring 424e that gives a downward (counterclockwise direction) urging force to the member 424.

The upper side wall portion 424b is formed in such a manner that the width increases from the radial end portion of the tubular portion 424a toward the axis of the tubular portion 424a, and the side surface is formed along a straight line in FIG. 25 (b). It is a plate-shaped part.

The lower side wall portion 424c is a plate-shaped portion formed to be curved along an arc centered on the axis of the tubular portion 424a, and a space having a length through which a sphere can pass is provided between the lower side wall portion 424c and the upper side wall portion 424b. Arranged.

The connecting cover 424d is a plate member that prevents the ball passing through the connecting member 424 from spilling to the back surface side. The open portion of the connecting member 424 formed on the opposite side (front side) of the connecting cover 424d is closed by the bottom portion of the accommodating recess 422f of the second passage forming member 422 coming into contact with the front side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from spilling from the open portion of the connecting member 424.

The operation of the connecting member 424 with respect to the second passage forming member 422 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. 27 and 28 are rear views of the second passage forming member 422 and the connecting member 424. Note that FIG. 27 shows a downwardly inclined state in which the open portion composed of the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c of the connecting member 424 faces the left-right direction, and FIG. 28 shows the connection as compared with the state of FIG. 27. The upward inclined state in which the open portion composed of the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c of the member 424 faces diagonally upward is shown, and FIG. 27 corresponds to the separated state (see FIG. 41) described later, and FIG. 28 shows. Corresponds to the communication state (see FIG. 42) described later.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the connecting member 424 can rotate around the shaft support portion 422b in a state of being accommodated in the accommodating recess 422f of the second passage forming member 422, and the second passage forming member 422 can rotate. The front side end faces of the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c are brought into contact with the bottom portion of the accommodating recess 422f.

The accommodating recess 422f is formed in a portion of the connecting member 424 facing the lower side wall portion 424c in the state shown in FIG. 27 in an arc shape centered on the shaft support portion 422b along the outer diameter of the lower side wall portion 424c. The curved wall portion 422f1 to be formed and the surface arranged to face the curved wall portion 422f1 are recessed in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1 and smoothly connected to the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 in an upwardly inclined state (see FIG. 42). A facing wall portion 422f2 having a curved surface to be formed is provided.

Since the curved wall portion 422f1 is in surface contact with the lower side wall portion 424c in the downward inclined state of the connecting member 424 in the radial direction, the positional deviation of the connecting member 424 in the axial radial direction can be suppressed.

Therefore, even if the fitting between the shaft support portion 422b and the tubular portion 424a of the connecting member 424 is loosened (a state where the gap is large, for example, a state where the dimension has a gap between 0.5 mm and 1 mm), the connecting member When the 424 is tilted downward, the posture of the connecting member 424 can be maintained with high accuracy by the contact between the lower side wall portion 424c and the curved wall portion 422f1.

On the other hand, when the fitting of the shaft support portion 422b and the tubular portion 424a of the connecting member 424 is loosened, the operating resistance generated in the shaft support portion is reduced, so that the connection is made unless a load from other members is generated. The member 424 can be reliably maintained in the downward tilted state by the action of gravity and the urging force of the torsion spring 424e. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the connecting member 424 is maintained in an upwardly inclined state even though no load is generated from other members.

The facing wall portion 422f2 is a portion that guides the ball from the connecting member 424 to the sensor member 422c. In the present embodiment, the sphere can be smoothly guided to the sensor member 422c by bending the surface that faces the curved wall portion 422f1.

The upward tilted state is formed in a communicating state in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the connecting member 424 are communicated with each other. In this state, since the lower side wall portion 424c is separated from the opening of the sensor member 422c, the ball that has passed by rolling the lower side wall portion 424c of the connecting member 424 rolls on the curved wall portion 422f1 and of the sensor member 422c. It passes through the opening and flows down the groove 422d.

On the other hand, the downward tilting state is formed in a separated state in which the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 of the left swing unit 500 are separated from each other. In this state, the lower side wall portion 424c projects to the inside of the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the lower end portion of the lower side wall portion 422c and the wall surface of the accommodating recess 422f arranged to face the lower end portion thereof (sensor member 422c). By setting the dimension between the sphere and the wall surface extending vertically upward to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere, it is possible to prevent the sphere from passing through the connecting member 424 (the sphere is ejected from the lower end portion).

Therefore, as will be described later, even if the sphere reaches the connecting member 424 in the separated state, the flow of the sphere can be stagnant at the connecting member 424.

Next, the elevating and lowering operations of the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 33. First, the positional relationship between the drive-side slide member 420, the driven-side slide member 430, and the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

29 is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, and FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 in the direction of arrow XXX of FIG. 29. In addition, in FIGS. 29 and 30, the state in which the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are arranged in the descending position is shown, and the illustration of the pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 is omitted. The transmission member 450 is visible. Further, in FIG. 29, the lowering regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 on the right side of the front view are partially magnified, and the rack immediately before the contact wall 453 and the release convex portion 417c of the ascending regulating member 417 come into contact with each other. The outer shape of 452 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the driven side slide member 430, the fall prevention portion 435 is brought into contact with the locking portion 413 of the base member 410 from below at the lowered position, and the hook-shaped portion 434 is raised. It comes into contact with the regulating member 417 from above. As described above, since the driven side slide member 430 is restricted from moving in both the vertical direction, it is possible to prevent the driven side slide member 430 from rattling in the vertical direction at the descending position.

Further, the ascending restricting member 417 and the locking portion 413 are arranged with the guide rod 451 inserted through the guide hole 433 sandwiched between them, and they can come into contact with the functional portion 432 of the driven side slide member 430. It is possible to prevent the portion 432 from rattling in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the guide rod 451 (the left-right direction in FIG. 29). Therefore, even if the driven side slide member 430 is disturbed at the moment when it is placed in the lowered position or when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by the player, the driven side slide member 430 rattles. Can be suppressed, and the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

Further, since the ascending restricting member 417 and the locking portion 413 are arranged so as to be displaced in the vertical direction, the functional portion 432 rattles in an oblique direction (for example, the direction connecting the locking portion 413 and the ascending restricting member 417). Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the driven side slide member 430 is disturbed at the moment when it is placed in the lowered position or when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by the player, the driven side slide member 430 rattles. Can be suppressed, and the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

Since the locking portion 413 is displaced upward as compared with the ascending restricting member 417, the locking portion 413 is arranged at a position far from the drive side slide member 420, and the locking portion 413 slides on the drive side. It is possible to make it difficult to hinder the raising and lowering operation of the member 420. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the drive-side slide member 420 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 30, the lowering restricting member 415 is arranged in front of the ascending regulating member 417, and the forming height of the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450 (the length of protrusion from the vicinity of the tooth root of the rack 452). Is the height before reaching the descent restricting member 415, so that the descent restricting member 415 and the contact wall 453 do not abut in the rotation direction of the descent restricting member 415. Further, since the hook-shaped portion 434 is arranged at the same position in the front-rear direction as the ascending regulating member 417, the hook-shaped portion 434 and the descending regulating member 415 do not abut in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, the rack 452 includes a convex plate 453a projecting from the upper end portion of the contact wall 453 toward the front side, and the convex plate 453a can be brought into contact with the lowering restricting member 415 in the rotational direction.

FIG. 31 is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. In FIG. 31, the state in which the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up from the descending position and arranged at the connecting position is shown, and the illustration of the pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 31, the descending regulation member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 on the right side of the front view are partially enlarged.

In a state where the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged at the connecting position, a ball can be introduced into the connecting member 424 via the left swing unit 500 (see FIG. 42).

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 31, the ascending restricting member 417 is a member that covers the hook-shaped portion 434 from above in a state before the upper end portion of the contact wall 453 is brought into contact with the ascending restricting member 417. Rotational operation is possible between the engaged state shown in FIG. 29 and the disengaged state shown in FIG. The released state is not limited to the state shown in FIG. 31, and means a state in which the ascending regulating member 417 is rotated from vertically above the hook-shaped portion 434 to a posture in which the ascending regulating member 417 is retracted.

The ascending restricting member 417 is one of a cylindrical portion 417a pivotally supported by the second shaft support portion 416, an extension plate 417b extending linearly in the tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 417a, and the extension plate 417b. A release convex portion 417c projecting vertically from an end (lower end), an engaging convex portion 417d projecting vertically from the other end of the extension plate 417b, and an engaging convex portion thereof. At the convex end of 417d, the hook extends parallel to the extension direction of the hook-shaped portion 434 in an engaged state and is arranged above and inward (upper left in the enlarged view of FIG. 29) of the tip of the hook-shaped portion 434. The joint claw portion 417e, the separated inclined portion 417f which is downwardly inclined on the upper side surface of the convex end portion of the engaging convex portion 417d, and the cylindrical portion 417a are wound around and one end portion is formed on the main body member 411 of the base member 410. It mainly includes a torsion spring 417 g that urges the ascending restricting member 417 in the inward winding direction (counterclockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 29) by being locked.

The extension plate 417b extends above the axis of the cylindrical portion 417a. As a result, when the release convex portion 417c is pushed up, the other end of the extension plate 417b can be moved in a direction away from the driven side slide member 430, and the release operation can be performed.

Even if the driven side slide member 430 is about to move upward in the engaged state, the engaging claw portion 417e meshes with the hook-shaped portion 434 (between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the functional portion 432). (By inserting 417e), the movement of the driven side slide member 430 is strongly suppressed.

The release operation of the ascending restricting member 417 will be described. First, in the state shown in FIG. 29, the upper end of the contact wall 453 is brought into contact with the release convex portion 417c, while the ascending restricting member 417 is maintained in the engaged state. From this state, when the rack 452 is raised to the state shown in FIG. 31, the end portion of the contact wall 453 pushes up the release convex portion 413c, so that the raising restricting member 417 is moved outward (clockwise in the enlarged view of FIG. 31). ), And the engaging convex portion 417d is retracted from above the hook-shaped portion 434 (released state).

That is, the release operation of the ascending restricting member 417 can be performed only by the ascending operation of the rack 452. Therefore, for example, as compared with the case where the solenoid member for releasing the ascending restricting member 417 is separately arranged, the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) also serves as the driving device for releasing the ascending restricting member 417. It is possible to reduce the number of drive devices to be arranged (the product cost can be reduced). In addition, it is possible to prevent the ascending regulating member 417 from being inadvertently operated.

In other words, according to the present embodiment, since the ascending regulating member 417 is operated according to the arrangement of the rack 452, as compared with the case where the ascending regulating member 417 is operated by another drive source (solenoid or the like), It is possible to prevent the rack 452 and the ascending restricting member 417 from malfunctioning due to inconsistent operation timing, and when the driven side slide member 430 ascends, the ascending restricting member 417 reliably shifts to the released state. Can be made to. For example, it is possible to prevent the rack 452 from being lifted while the lift restricting member 417 is in the engaged state, and an excessive load is applied to the hook-shaped portion 434 and the engaging convex portion 417d of the lift regulating member 417.

Further, the rack 452 is lifted, and the lift restricting member 417 is moved to the released state immediately before the upper end of the rack 452 and the lower end of the driven side slide member 430 are brought into contact with each other, so that the rack 452 continues to lift. When the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420 are separated from each other, an engaged state (see FIG. 29) is formed to prevent the driven side slide member 430 from rattling, while the driven side slide. When the member 430 and the drive-side slide member 420 are in contact with each other, a release state (see FIG. 31) is formed, and the driving force required for raising the driven-side slide member 430 can be suppressed.

Here, in the case of the configuration in which the drive side slide member 420 pushes up the driven side slide member 430 during the ascending operation of the drive side slide member 420 as in the present embodiment, the driven side slide member 430 and the engaging portion are released. Can be performed by pushing up the driven side slide member 430, but in this case, it is necessary to bring the driven side slide member 430 into an engaging state that can be disengaged by the pushing force, and strong engagement is difficult. Will be. Further, in this case, there is a problem that the driven side slide member 430 vibrates due to the reaction generated when the driven side slide member 430 and the engaging portion are disengaged, and the posture becomes unstable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ascending restricting member 417 is rotated to be disengaged by retracting the ascending restricting member 417 from above the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven side slide member 430. The force that can be loaded on the driven side slide member 430 and the force that causes the ascending regulating member 417 to rotate can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to increase the force that suppresses the ascending operation of the driven side slide member 430 in the engaged state while suppressing the force required for releasing.

Further, since the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 do not come into contact with each other when the ascending restricting member 417 is released, the driven side slide member 430 is less likely to recoil, and the driven side slide member 430 at the time of release is less likely to occur. Can stabilize the posture of.

In the connected state shown in FIG. 31, the discharge opening 421c of the drive-side slide member 420 and the tubular passage portion 463 of the lower front plate member 460 are communicated with each other. As a result, the ball that has flowed down the second passage forming member 422 can be discharged to the tubular passage portion 463.

32 and 33 are front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. Note that FIG. 32 shows a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 moves up from the state shown in FIG. 31 and the convex plate 453a of the transmission device 450 is about to come into contact with the lowering regulation member 415. , The state in which the drive-side slide member 420 is raised from the state shown in FIG. 32 and the convex plate 453a is placed in the raised position on the upper side of the lowering regulating member 415 is shown. Further, in FIG. 33, the vicinity of the lowering regulation member 415 is partially enlarged.

In the state shown in FIG. 32, the release convex portion 417c of the ascending restricting member 417 is brought into contact with the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission devices 450 are arranged symmetrically, and the direction in which the release convex portion 417c abuts on the contact wall 453 is also symmetrical. Therefore, the release convex portion 417c functions as a guide for guiding the drive-side slide member 420, and it is possible to prevent the drive-side slide member 420 from rattling in the left-right direction during the ascending / descending operation.

Since the lift restricting member 417 is urged in the left-right inward direction of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 by the torsion spring 417 g, the load in the left-right inward direction of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is applied to the contact wall 453 from the release convex portion 417c. Can be called. As a result, the drive-side slide member 420 is urged in a certain direction along the left-right direction, so that the posture of the drive-side slide member 420 during the ascending / descending operation can be stabilized.

Further, when the drive-side slide member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction, the elastic force applied from the release convex portion 417c to the contact wall 453 is such that the drive-side slide member 420 is returned to the center position, and a pair of left and right slide members are returned. The ascending control member 417 is asymmetrical.

That is, on the side where the contact wall 453 moves in the direction close to the release convex portion 417c, the ascending restricting member 417 is further rotated toward the release side, so that the amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g is increased and the urging force is increased. While the force pushing back the contact wall 453 increases, on the side where the contact wall 453 moves away from the release convex portion 417c, the ascending restricting member 417 is rotated in the direction opposite to the release side, so that the torsion spring 417g The amount of deformation is reduced, the urging force is reduced, and the force pushing the contact wall 453 is reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress rattling in the left-right direction when the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down.

Since the drive gear 442 and the lift restricting member 417 are arranged on the same side with respect to the rack 452, the urging force of the torsion spring 417g acts in the direction of separating the rack 452 from the drive gear 442, so that the drive side slide member 420 The rack 452 and the drive gear 442 are close to each other due to rattling in the left-right direction, and it is possible to suppress an increase in drive resistance (the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 can be stabilized).

That is, when the drive side slide member 420 rattles in the left-right direction and the rack 452 moves in a direction close to the drive gear 442, the ascending restricting member 417 is wound outward (the engaging convex portion 417d is on the left and right outside of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400). By being rotated in the direction of rotation (moving in the direction), the amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g is increased, and by increasing the urging force, the urging force for pushing back the drive side slide member 420 is increased, while the rack 452 is driven. When moving in a direction away from the gear 442, the guide rod 451 supports the rack 452, so that the rack 452 separates from the drive gear 442 beyond the gap provided in the support structure between the guide rod 451 and the rack 452. Is regulated. As a result, the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 is narrowed, and it is possible to suppress an excessive meshing resistance, and the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 is widened, resulting in tooth misalignment. Can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 33, in a state where the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are arranged in the raised position, the lower side surface of the convex plate 453a of the transmission device 450 is the release convex portion 415c of the lowering regulating member 415. Contact with the upper side surface (locked state).

The convex plate 453a includes an inclined side surface 453a1 on the lower side surface, which is inclined upward toward the left and right outward sides.

The descending inclined member 415 is one of a cylindrical portion 415a pivotally supported by the first shaft support portion 414, an extension plate 415b extending linearly in the tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 415a, and the extension plate 415b. A release convex portion 415c that is projected vertically from the end (upper end) and has a semicircular tip, and a release convex portion 415c that is wound around a cylindrical portion 415a and one end is engaged with the main body member 411 of the base member 410. It mainly includes a torsion spring 415d that urges the lowering restricting member 415 in the inward winding direction (counterclockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 33) when stopped.

As shown in FIG. 33, the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 is locked by the lowering restricting member 415. Therefore, the supply of the driving force of the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) can be stopped while the rack 452 is held in the raised position, and the power consumption of the drive motor 441 can be reduced.

Further, the rotation operation of the lowering restricting member 415 to the locked state shown in FIG. 33 is performed by raising the rack 452 and causing the convex plate 453a to get over the release convex portion 415c of the lowering restricting member 415. Therefore, both the driving force for raising the rack 452 and the driving force for forming the locked state of the lowering regulating member 415 can be generated by the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 2). That is, the drive motor 441 can also be used, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Returning to FIG. 30, the positional relationship between the descending regulation member 415, the ascending regulating member 417, and the contact wall 453 in the front-rear direction will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, the lowering restricting member 415 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 30) as compared with the ascending regulating member 417, and the contact wall 453 can abut on the ascending regulating member 417 in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 30. The lower side surface of the lowering regulation member 415 is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the front side surface of the contact wall 453.

It will be described back to FIG. 33. The lowering regulating member 415 and the contact wall 453 are brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 33, the contact wall 453 and the ascending restricting member 417 are brought into contact with each other in the left-right direction (FIG. 33 left-right direction), and the abutting wall 453 and the descending regulating member 415 are brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction (paper surface of FIG. 33). (Vertical direction). As a result, the ascending regulating member 417 can suppress the rattling of the drive side slide member 420 in the left-right direction, and the descending restricting member 415 prevents the drive side slide member 420 from rattling in the front-rear direction (direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442). It is possible to suppress rattling.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the area of the tooth contact surface from being reduced due to the relative movement of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 in the direction parallel to the tooth surface, and to tilt forward when the rack 452 is arranged in the raised position. Can be prevented.

By rotating the drive gear 442 in the direction of lowering the rack 452 from the state shown in FIG. 33, when the rack 452 is about to be lowered, the convex plate 453a applies a load to the release convex portion 415c, thereby causing a lowering regulation member. 415 is rotated outward (clockwise in the magnified view of FIG. 33). As a result, the lock by the lowering regulation member 415 is released, and the driving side slide member 420 can be lowered. That is, since the locking by the lowering regulation member 415 can be released by the driving force of the drive motor 441 (the drive source can also be used), the product cost can be reduced.

Further, since the lowering regulation member 415 is unlocked by the lowering operation of the driving side slide member 420, the operation timing is deviated and the lowering regulation is performed as in the case where the lowering regulating member 415 is rotated by another drive source. It is possible to prevent the drive-side slide member 420 from being lowered before the regulation of the member 415 is released, causing an overload on the drive source and the lowering regulation member 415.

In the structure in which both the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are maintained in the raised position as in the present embodiment, the driven side slide member 430 is locked in the raised position of each member. However, in that case, the structure for connecting and separating the driven side slide member 430 and the driving side slide member 420 becomes complicated, and the cost increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the driven side slide member 420 is maintained in the raised position by locking the drive side slide member 420, the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420 are maintained in the raised position. The configuration required for this can be reduced (only the drive device 450 and the drive side slide member 420 can be used). Further, the interlocking of the driven side slide member 430 with the drive side slide member 420 is solely due to the action of gravity, so that the structure between the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420 can be simplified. it can.

When the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, the driven side slide member 430 is lowered on the rack 452. However, for example, the guide rod 451 becomes dirty and the guide rod 451 and the guide hole 433 (see FIG. 22). ), The descending speed of the driven side slide member 430 may be smaller than the descending speed of the rack 452. Even in this case, when the driven side slide member 430 comes into contact with the ascending restricting member 417, the hook-shaped portion 434 acts on the separated inclined portion 417f of the ascending restricting member 417, so that the ascending restricting member 417 can be rotated. Due to the weight of the driven side slide member 430, the ascending restricting member 417 and the hook-shaped portion 434 can be engaged with each other.

Next, the left swing unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42. FIG. 34 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 34, the left swing unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the second variable winning device 82a and the second specific winning opening 82 of the game board 13, and the ball winning the second specific winning opening 82 is placed. A flow path to pass through is provided inside. In the present embodiment, a sensor member 82b for detecting that a ball has passed is provided between the second variable winning device 82a and the second specific winning opening 82. The sensor member 82b is a part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4).

FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 35, the left swing unit 500 is a unit in which the first passage forming member 520 is hung down to the lower right in the front view, and the effect is produced by swinging the first passage forming member 520. is there.

FIG. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 500, and FIG. 37 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the left swing unit 500 includes a base member 510 that forms a skeleton, a first passage forming member 520 that is pivotally supported by the base member 510 and swings, and a base. A drive device 530 that is fastened and fixed to the member 510 to generate a driving force of the first passage forming member 520, a transmission device 540 that transmits the driving force of the driving device 530 to the first passage forming member 520, and a cover on the front side. It is mainly provided with a cover member 550 having an introduction cylindrical portion 552 which is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and connected to the second specific winning opening 82 of the game board 13.

The base member 510 includes a main body member 511 composed of an L-shaped plate-like body in front view, a shaft support hole 512 formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the right end portion of the main body member in front view, and a shaft support thereof. The first wall portion 513, which is arranged vertically above the hole 512 and has a flat plate shape with the surface facing in the front-rear direction, and one or more spheres to the left of the front view from the lower left end of the first wall portion 513. The second wall portion 514, which is arranged at intervals of the above and is formed in a curved plate shape with the surface facing in the left-right direction, and the sphere, which is arranged on the back side of the second wall portion 514 and reaches the second wall portion 514. The flow-down passage 515, the shaft support 516 arranged in the lower left of the front view of the shaft support hole 512 and projecting in a columnar shape on the front side, and the locking arranged around the shaft of the shaft support 516. It mainly includes a wall portion 517 and a detection sensor 518 arranged above the shaft support portion 516 to detect the phase of the transmission device.

The shaft support hole 512 is a hole through which the shaft support portion 521c of the first passage forming member 520 is inserted, and the first passage forming member 520 swings around the shaft support hole 512.

The first wall portion 513 includes a pair of guide wall portions 513a extending from both ends in the left-right direction to the front side.

The locking wall portion 517 includes an arc wall portion 517a having an arc shape centered on the shaft support portion 516 above the shaft support portion 516, and an inclined wall portion 517b extending downward to the lower right in the front view. ..

The arc wall portion 517a is an end face of the detection sensor 518 and extends to the circumferential end face of the shaft support portion 516.

The first passage forming member 520 is provided on the long rod-shaped distribution base member 521, which is a member pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 512, and the distribution base member 521 arranged on the front side of the distribution base member 521. A passage cover member 522, which is fastened and fixed and forms a passage through which a ball can flow down from the distribution base member 521, is mainly provided.

The distribution base member 521 includes a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 521a forming one side of the flow passage of the sphere, and one sphere along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 521a from the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a. An intermediate plate portion 521b arranged at a position separated by a minute gap V1 and a shaft support portion 521c that is projected in a columnar shape on the back surface side near the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a and is inserted into the shaft support hole 512. And the elongated hole 521d formed along the extending direction in the plate-shaped portion extending in the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c, and the back side from the end portion of the intermediate plate portion 521b on the hanging plate portion 521a side. A distribution convex portion 521e that is convexly provided and whose width is shortened toward the outside in the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c, and a gap V1 along the left side surface of the distribution convex portion 521e as viewed from the rear. It mainly includes a curved wall portion 521f that extends to the front side and curves along an arc shape having a center at the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a.

The hanging plate portion 521a is formed in a shape in which the lower side from the middle portion is bent downward as compared with the middle portion to the upper side, and the plate thickness portion on the front side is shaved at the lower end portion to make the ball feed portion thinner. It includes 521a1.

The gap V1 is a space through which the sphere that has reached the right side of the front view of the distribution convex portion 521e passes in the front direction.

The passage cover member 522 extends in a plate shape from both ends of the plate-shaped plate-shaped portion 522a that is covered on the front side of the distribution base member 521 and the plate-shaped portion 522a in the lateral direction toward the back side. Mainly includes upper and lower wall portions 522b.

The plate-shaped portion 522a is formed of a light-transmitting raw resin material, and has a ball receiving portion 522a1 that is bent to the back side at a portion arranged on the front side of the ball feeding portion 521a1 of the distribution base member 521 at the lower end portion thereof. Be prepared.

The upper and lower wall portions 522b are portions that roll the sphere that has passed through the gap V1 and, like the hanging plate portion 521a, the inclination angle changes with the intermediate portion as a boundary, so that the flow velocity of the sphere can be changed at the intermediate portion. it can.

Of the upper and lower wall portions 522b, the lower wall portion is provided with a step inside the tip portion. The step has a role of displacing the rolling sphere in the opposite direction of the upper and lower wall portions 522b (direction from one wall portion to the other wall portion) and decelerating the sphere.

Further, the ball that has reached the lower end of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the back side by the ball feeding portion 521a1 and the ball receiving portion 522a1. As a result, the speed of the ball before ejection can be reduced, and the ejection of the ball can be stabilized.

The drive device 530 includes a drive motor 531 and a drive gear 532 that is pivotally rotated around the rotation shaft of the drive motor 531, and the drive gear 532 is meshed with the main body gear portion 541 of the transmission device 540.

The transmission device 540 is provided with a main body gear portion 541 that is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 516 and meshed with the drive gear 532, and a first passage forming member that is formed in a columnar shape on the front side from an eccentric position of the main body gear portion 541. The eccentric convex portion 542 inserted through the elongated hole 521d of the 520 and the eccentric convex portion 542 extending in the radial direction from the main body gear portion 541 are configured to be in contact with the locking wall portion 517 and can pass through the gap of the detection sensor 518. The extension portion 543 and the extension portion 543 are mainly provided.

The cover member 550 is connected to a plate-shaped main body member 551 that is overlaid on the base member 510 and a second specific winning opening 82 at the right end portion of the main body member 551 in the front view, and the back side end portion is the first. A cylindrical introduction cylindrical portion 552 that abuts on the wall portion 513, and a pair of guide wall portions 553 extending downward from the left-right end portion of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 on the back surface side surface of the main body member 551. Mainly prepare.

The guide wall portion 553 is a portion that overlaps the guide wall portion 513a of the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The sphere that has passed through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 passes between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 and flows downward.

The swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40. 38 to 40 are front views of the rocking operation unit 500. In addition, in FIGS. 38 to 40, the cover member 550 is not shown, and the outer shape of the first passage forming member 520 viewed in cross section at the intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a is shown and the passage cover member. The outer shape is illustrated by an imaginary line.

Further, in FIG. 38, the state in which the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the release position is shown, and in FIG. 39 (a), the first passage forming member 520 is shaken by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 39 (b), the first passage forming member 520 swings by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a) when the dividing convex portion 521e is arranged at an intermediate position between the pair of guide wall portions 513a. In FIG. 40, the state immediately before the contact with the connecting member 424 is shown, and the state in which the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 39 (b) and arranged at the connecting position is shown. To.

As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 occurs when the transmission device 540 is rotated and the position of the elongated hole 521d is moved as the eccentric convex portion 542 moves.

As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, the direction X1 connecting the shaft support portion 516 and the eccentric convex portion 542 and the direction X2 corresponding to the extension direction of the elongated hole 521d (the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c) intersect vertically. To do. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 by the rotation operation of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the shaft support portion 516, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a load for rotating the transmission device 540. As a result, the posture of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

Further, at the release position, the extension portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is arranged in the gap of the detection sensor 518 and is brought into contact with the end portion of the arc wall portion 517a. That is, the extension portion 543 has both a role as a portion used for detecting the phase of the transmission device 540 and a role as a detent member.

As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged to face the guide wall portion 513a on the right side of the front view of the base member 510. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed to the path on the left side of the front view by the distribution convex portion 521e, and is discharged to the outside of the game area through the flow passage 515. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 39A, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged at the intermediate position of the pair of guide wall portions 513a of the base member 510 at the intermediate position between the release position and the connection position. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and has passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped from flowing down by the distribution convex portion 521e (remains on the tip of the distribution convex portion 521e). ).

As shown in FIG. 39B, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged between the pair of guide wall portions 513a of the base member 510 in a state immediately before the first passage forming member 520 abuts on the connecting member 424. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped from flowing down by the distribution convex portion 521e (while riding on the tip of the distribution convex portion 521e). stay). As a result, in the state of FIG. 39 (b), the ball passes through the first passage forming member 520, is sent to the connecting member 424, and the ball is prevented from reaching the facing wall portion 422f2.

Here, since the facing wall portion 422f2 is smoothly connected to the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 in the upward inclined state (see FIG. 42), the upper end portion is the connecting member 424 in the downward inclined state (see FIG. 41). It is configured to project from the lower end of the upper side wall portion 424b to the left in the front view. Therefore, if a ball is thrown to the connecting member 424 in a downwardly inclined state and the ball collides with the upper end portion of the facing wall portion 422f2, the facing wall portion 422f2 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 39 (b), the introduction of the sphere into the first passage forming member 520 is prevented, so that the sphere can be prevented from colliding with the facing wall portion 422f2. It is possible to prevent the facing wall portion 422f2 from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 40, at the connecting position, the direction X1 connecting the shaft support portion 516 and the eccentric convex portion 542 and the direction X2 corresponding to the extending direction of the elongated hole 521d (the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c) intersect vertically. To do. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 by the rotation operation of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the shaft support portion 516, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a load for rotating the transmission device 540. As a result, the posture of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

Further, at the connection position, the extension portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is brought into contact with the inclined wall portion 517b. As a result, the extension portion 543 is abutted against the inclined wall portion 517b to stabilize the phase in which the transmission device 540 is stopped, and the extension portion 543 is locally loaded as compared with the case where the extension portion 543 is locally loaded. The durability of 543 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 40, in the connected state, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged to face the guide wall portion 513a on the left side of the front view of the base member 510. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed to the path on the right side of the front view by the distribution convex portion 521e, and moves to the front side through the gap V1. Rolls along the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522b (see FIG. 37) of the passage cover member 522.

The flow of spheres in the connected state will be described. First, the ball that has won the second specific winning opening 82 from the game area through the second variable winning device 82a moves back and forth toward the back side through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 (see FIG. 36), and the first wall portion. When it comes into contact with 513, it flows down the passage formed by the guide wall portions 513a and 553, moves back and forth toward the front side through the gap V1 of the first passage forming member 520, and the upper and lower wall portions of the passage cover member 522. Roll over the lower wall of 522b.

That is, the sphere is fed in the front-rear direction before the sphere flows down the inside of the first passage forming member 520. Therefore, even if the balls are supplied to the second specific winning opening 82 in a string of beads, the balls can be smoothly flowed into the first passage forming member 520 by suppressing the bouncing of the balls. Further, by letting the ball sent in the front-rear direction flow down along the curved wall portion 521f (see FIG. 37), the direction of the velocity of the ball can be changed, and the ball smoothly flows into the first passage forming member 520. Can be made to.

In the first passage forming member 520, the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 change in the extending direction with the intermediate portion as a boundary. That is, the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 extend along the straight line Y1 from the intermediate portion to the proximal end side (shaft support portion 521c side), and from the intermediate portion to the distal end side (opposite side of the proximal end side). Is extended along a straight line Y2 that is inclined downward from the straight line Y1.

Therefore, the speed of the sphere rolling inside the first passage forming member 520 is slower from the base end side to the intermediate portion than from the intermediate portion to the tip portion. Become. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball immediately after the ball is introduced into the first passage forming member 520.

Further, as compared with the case where the first passage forming member 520 is formed in a straight shape along the straight line Y1, the direction in which the ball is sent from the first passage forming member 520 at the connecting position (see FIG. 42) , The angle with the direction in which the sphere is introduced into the sensor member 422c (vertical direction) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the ball from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422.

As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the rotation of the transmission device 540 causes the first passage forming member 520 to swing, and the arrangement of the distribution convex portion 521e switches the path through which the ball flows down.

Here, when a wall member arranged to face the distribution convex portion 521e in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged, the distribution convex portion 521e is brought closer to the wall member to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere. If the configuration is adopted, when the sphere stays in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e, the sphere may be caught between the distribution convex portion 521e and the wall member, causing a malfunction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connection position shown in FIG. 40, a space equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere is provided between the distribution convex portion 521e and the second wall portion 514, and the distribution convex portion No wall member is arranged on the opposite side of the second wall portion 514 with the 521e in between, and the wall member is opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring because the ball is not bitten in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e.

The connection of the flow path between the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. 41 and 42 are partial front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500. In addition, in FIGS. 41 and 42, the second passage forming member 422 is cross-sectionally viewed to make the connecting member 424 visible, and the first passage forming member 520 has an outer shape at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a. The illustrated distribution convex portion 521e is visible.

Further, in FIGS. 41 and 42, the state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the connection position (see FIG. 31) is shown, and in FIG. 41, the left swing unit 500 is arranged at the release position (see FIG. 38). In FIG. 42, the state in which the left swing unit 500 is arranged at the connection position (see FIG. 40) is shown.

When the first passage forming member 520 swings from the state shown in FIG. 41 to the state shown in FIG. 42, the tip end portion thereof abuts on the lower side surface of the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424, and the connecting member 424 is brought into contact with the lower side surface. Swing. That is, since the connecting member 424 is moved along with the moving direction of the first passage forming member 520, for example, even if the stop position of the driving side slide member 420 is slightly deviated from the ideal position, the first It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the tip of the passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling between the tip of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424, and to stabilize the throwing of the ball from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422. Can be done.

When the connecting member 424 is swung, the lower side wall portion 424c on which the ball flowing down from the first passage forming member 520 rolls is moved in a direction close to the tip of the first passage forming member 520. The gap between the rolling surfaces of the one passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 can be narrowed, and the ball is prevented from falling from the gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the ball.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 42, the lower side wall portion 424c is inclined downward toward the sensor member 422c communicating with the groove portion 422d (see FIG. 27). As a result, the ball can be rolled along its downward inclination, and the throwing of the ball to the second passage forming member 422 can be stabilized.

The swinging motion of the first passage forming member 520 is performed by detecting the passage of a ball of the sensor member 82b (see FIG. 34) and the sensor member 422c. For example, in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connecting position shown in FIG. 42, the detected numbers of spheres of the sensor member 82b and the sensor member 422c match (the spheres remain in the first passage forming member 520). By starting the swing of the first passage forming member 520 toward the release position (see FIG. 41) at the timing (not shown), it is possible to prevent the ball from being discharged from the tip of the first passage forming member 520 out of the game area. can do.

As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the spheres are distributed by moving the distribution convex portion 521e, and the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 are contacted by swinging the first passage forming member 520. The driving force required for the operation of contacting each other to form the flow path of the sphere is also used (the driving force of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) for operating the first passage forming member 520 is used). Since the states are synchronized, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the sphere is introduced into the first passage forming member 520 in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the release position. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from being discharged from the tip of the first passage forming member 520 out of the game area.

Further, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged at the upper end portion of the distribution base member 521, and is a wall portion that partitions (forms the upper end) the passage of the sphere flowing down the front side of the hanging plate portion 521a (see FIG. 36). Also serves as. As a result, it is possible to reduce the cost of parts as compared with the case of sorting with other parts, and the ball distributed to the first passage forming member 520 side is surely placed on the hanging plate portion 521a and the passage cover member. It can be introduced in the passage to and from 522.

Next, the rotating unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 77. FIG. 43 is a front view of the rotating unit 600, and FIG. 44 is a front perspective view of the rotating unit 600. FIG. 45 is a front view of the rotating unit 600 in a state where the guide member 680 is removed, and FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the rotating unit 600 in a state where the guide member 680 is removed. Further, FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 600, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 48, the rotating unit 600 includes a case member 610 formed in a container shape with one side open, a guide member 620 covered on one side of the case member 610, and their cases. A drive mechanism 630 arranged between the member 610 and the guide member 620 facing each other, a rotary member 640 rotationally driven by the driving force of the drive mechanism 630, and a pitch arranged on the inner peripheral side of the rotary member 640. The device 650 and a guide member 680 arranged on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640 are mainly provided.

The case member 610 includes a bottom wall portion 611 that is substantially circular in front view, and a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 612 that is erected from the bottom wall portion 611 toward the front, and each of these wall portions 611, 612 covers one surface. It is formed in the shape of a container with an open side. The guide member 620 is formed in the shape of a disk having a front view ring, and is arranged (fixed) at the erected tip of the outer wall portion 612 of the case member 610. As a result, an internal space is formed between the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610 and the guide member 620, and the drive mechanism 630 is arranged in the internal space.

The guide member 620 is a member for holding the rotating member 640 in a displaceable manner, and a connecting link action groove 621 and an undulating link action groove 622 are recessed in front of the guide member 620. The connecting link acting groove 621 and the undulating link acting groove 622 are concave grooves having a U-shaped cross section extending along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link described later of the rotating member 640. The insertion portions 644a and 648a of the member 648 are inserted, respectively.

The groove widths of the connecting link working groove 621 and the undulating link working groove 622 are set to have the same or slightly larger diameters as the diameters of the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the undulating link acting groove 622.

When the rotating member 640 is rotationally driven, the connecting link acting groove 621 acts on the connecting link member 644 to increase or decrease the distance between the dividing members DV (see FIG. 73), while the undulating link acting groove 622 It acts on the undulating link member 648 to undulate the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 (see FIGS. 59 and 60). Here, the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

FIG. 49 is a front view of the rotating unit 600 in a state where the rotating member 640, a part of the pitching device 650, and the guide member 680 are removed, and FIG. 50 is a front schematic view of the guide member 620. In FIG. 50, the shapes of the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 are schematically illustrated by using a two-dot chain line. Such an alternate long and short dash line is shown as a line passing through the center of the groove width of each action groove 621 and 622.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the connecting link action groove 621 has a large diameter portion 621a that curves in an arc shape with a radius R1 centered on the axis O, and a large diameter portion 621a that curves in an arc shape with a radius R2 centered on the axis O. It is composed of a small diameter portion 621b and a pair of connecting portions 621c connecting between the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b. The radius R1 of the large diameter portion 621a is set to a size larger than the radius R2 of the small diameter portion 621b (R2 <R1).

The undulating link action groove 622 has a large diameter portion 622a that curves in an arc shape with a radius R3 centered on the axis O, a small diameter portion 622b that curves in an arc shape with a radius R4 centered on the axis O, and these large diameter portions. It consists of a pair of connecting portions 622c that connect between the 622a and the small diameter portion 622b. The radius R3 of the large diameter portion 622a is set to a size larger than the radius R4 of the small diameter portion 622b (R4 <R3).

In the present embodiment, the large-diameter portion 621a and the small-diameter portion 621b of the connecting link action groove 621 and the large-diameter portion 622a and the small-diameter portion 622b of the undulating link action groove 622 are arranged concentrically with the axis O as the center. In this case, the axis O coincides with the center of rotation when the rotating member 640 is rotated. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotated, the large-diameter portions 621a, 622a and the small-diameter portions 622a, 622b of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the undulating link acting groove 622 act on the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648, respectively. The force can be suppressed to reduce the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630.

Further, the pair of connecting portions 621c of the connecting link acting groove 621 are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase. Similarly, the pair of connecting portions 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotationally driven, a force exerted on the connecting link member 644 from one connecting portion 621c of the connecting link acting groove 621 and a force acting on the connecting link member 644 from the other connecting portion 621c. Can be offset. Similarly, the force acting on the undulating link member 648 from one connecting portion 622c of the undulating link acting groove 622 and the force acting on the undulating link member 648 from the other connecting portion 622c can be offset. As a result, the force applied to the rotating member 640 can be made uniform as a whole, so that the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced. ..

In the present embodiment, the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link acting groove 622 are formed so as to have different phases. That is, in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 has a large diameter portion 622a or a small diameter of the undulation link action groove 622. In a state where the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is inserted through the connection portion 622c of the undulation link action groove 622 while being inserted into either one of the portions 622b, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is connected. It is inserted into either the large diameter portion 621a or the small diameter portion 621b of the working groove 621.

Since the connecting portions 621c and 622c are portions for changing the interval of the dividing member DV or displace the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647, the insertion portion receives a relatively large reaction force from the connecting portions 621c and 622c. By preventing the 644a and 648a from being inserted into the connecting portions 621c and 622c at the same time, the required driving force can be dispersed. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

Returning from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the drive mechanism 630 will be described. The drive mechanism 630 is a mechanism for rotationally driving the rotating member 640, and includes a drive motor 631, a pinion gear 632 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631, and a gear (first transmission gear) leading to the pinion gear 632. A central transmission body 634 having a transmission gear train in which 633a) is meshed, a gear 634a meshed with a gear at the end of the transmission gear train (second transmission gear 633b), and a gear 634a of the central transmission member 634 thereof. One-sided distribution gear train and other-side distribution gear train to which the first gear (first distribution gear 635a, 636a) is meshed with each other, and the last gear of those one-side distribution gear train and other-side gear train (third distribution It mainly includes a one-side rotation drive member 637 and another side rotation drive member 638 having gears 637a and 638a meshed with the gears 635c and 636c). The second distribution gears 635b and 636b are interposed between the first distribution gears 635a and 636a and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c, respectively.

The one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are members at the end of a transmission path (output end in the drive mechanism 630) for transmitting the rotation drive force generated from the drive motor 631, and are members of the drive motor 631. The rotation driving force rotates itself, and the rotation causes the rotating member 640 to rotate. Here, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 will be described with reference to FIG. 51.

51 (a) is a front view of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation member 638, and FIG. 51 (b) shows the one-side rotation member 637 and the other in the LIb-LIb line of FIG. 51 (a). It is sectional drawing of the side rotating member 638.

Since the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are members formed in the same shape as each other, only the one-side rotation drive member 637 will be described, and the other-side rotation drive member 638 will be described. Only reference numerals are given in the drawings of FIG. 51, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 47, the one-side rotation drive member 637 is formed in a disk shape, and the engaging portions 637b are recessed at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer edge portions thereof. It is formed.

The engaging portion 637b is a portion that engages with the engaged portion 641 (see FIG. 56) in the split member DV of the rotating member 640, and has a width (distance between the facing surfaces) from the open side toward the recessed back side. ) Is narrowed. Front view (axial view) is formed in a substantially V shape. As will be described later, by rotating the one-side rotation drive member 637, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641, and the rotating member 640 is transmitted. Can be rotated.

The one-side rotation drive member 637 is formed with a connecting wall 637c that partially connects the opposing inner surfaces of the engaging portion 637b. The connecting wall 637c is formed in a shape that curves in an arc shape in a front view (axial direction view) around the axial center of the one-side rotation drive member 637, and is also formed on the open side (one-side rotation drive member 637) of the engaging portion 637b. Only the inner surfaces of the outer edge side of the) are connected to each other, and the inner surfaces of the engaging portion 637b on the back side of the recess are not connected to each other.

Here, when the rotary member 640 is driven by the one-side rotary drive member 637, the engagement and disengagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 are intermittently repeated (see FIG. 74). Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 starts to engage with the engaging portion 637b, an impact load is input, and the one-side rotation drive member 637 may be damaged. On the other hand, when the weight of the one-side rotation drive member 637 increases, a large output is required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, since the connecting wall 637c is formed only on the open side of the engaging portion 637b, reinforcement against an impact load when the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 start to engage is reinforced. And weight reduction can be effectively achieved at the same time. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced while improving the durability of the one-side drive member 637.

It will be described back from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48. Each component of the drive mechanism 630 is disposed on the case member 610, except for the central transmission member 634 (see FIG. 53). On the other hand, the central transmission member 634 is rotatably held on the back surface side of the guide member 620. Here, the holding structure of the central transmission member 634 to the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIG. 52.

FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 600 cut in a plane including the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634. As shown in FIG. 52, the central transmitter 634 has a circular shape in the front view and is formed in a hat shape having a recessed central portion, and a gear 634a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the recessed portion in the center, and the outermost edge thereof. The overhanging portion 634b is formed so as to project outward in the radial direction in a flange shape.

On the back side of the guide member 620, a pair of holding collars 623 and 624 (see FIGS. 47 and 48) are superposed at three locations (that is, positions at 120 degree intervals) that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction. The overhanging portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 is slidably inserted between the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 facing each other. As a result, the central transmission member 634 can be rotatably held by the guide member 620 via the pair of holding collars 623 and 624.

That is, the displacement of the central transmission member 634 with respect to the guide member 620 in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52) can be regulated by abutting the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 on the outer peripheral surfaces of the central transmission member 634. The displacement of the central transmission member 634 with respect to the guide member 620 in the axial direction (left-right direction in FIG. 52) is regulated by abutting the overhanging portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 on the facing surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624. it can.

In this case, the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 are formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634). Therefore, the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 and the outer peripheral surfaces of the central transmission member 634 can be circumscribed (that is, point-contacted) with each other, so that the contact area between them can be reduced. As a result, the frictional resistance when the central transmission member 634 rotates can be reduced. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

Further, by adopting a structure for holding the outer edge side (overhanging portion 634b) of the central transmission member 634 in this way, the central recessed portion of the central transmission member 634 is pivoted to the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610. Since it is not necessary to support the pitcher and a space for arranging the parts for the shaft support is not required, a space for arranging the pitching device 650, which will be described later, can be secured accordingly.

Next, the operation of the drive mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a front view of the case member 610 and the drive mechanism 630, and shows a state in which the central transmission member 634 is viewed in cross section.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the drive mechanism 630, the central transmission member 634 is arranged at a position concentric with the axis O which is the center of rotation of the rotating member 640, and the second transmission is performed on the gear 634a of the central transmission member 634. The gear 633b and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c are arranged in a meshed state. The third distribution gears 635c and 636c are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase (that is, positions that face each other with the axis O in between).

Therefore, when the drive motor 631 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to the second transmission gear 633b via the pinion gear 632 and the first transmission gear 633a, and is centered with the rotation of the second transmission gear 633b. The transmission member 634 is rotated.

When the central transmission member 634 is rotated, the pair of first distribution gears 635a and 636a are rotated along with the rotation of the central transmission member 634, and the rotations are the second distribution gears 635b and 636b and the third distribution. It is transmitted to the gears 637a and 638a (see FIG. 48) of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 via the gears 635c and 636c, and the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 rotate. Will be done.

In this way, the central transmission gear 634 is meshed with the first distribution gear 635a and the second distribution gear 636a. Therefore, by rotating the central transmission gear 634 with the rotational driving force of the drive motor 631, the one-side rotation drive member The 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 can be rotated in a synchronized state. As a result, the drive of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

In this case, since the central transmission gear 634 is arranged concentrically with the axial center O of the rotating member 640, the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and other-side rotating drive members 637, 638 are viewed in the axial center O direction. In the above, it can be arranged inward (on the axial center O direction side) from the outer edge portion of the rotating member 640. That is, since the central transmission gear 634 and the rotation drive members 637 and 638 on one side and the other side do not protrude outward from the outer shape of the rotation member 640, the size can be reduced accordingly.

In the state where the guide member 620 is arranged on the case member 610, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are radially outward from the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. The 638b is exposed (see FIG. 49), and the engaged portion 641 in the split member DV of the rotating member 640 can be engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b. Therefore, by rotating the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement of the engaging portions 637b, 638b and the engaged portion 641. The rotating member 640 can be rotated.

In this case, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase (that is, positions that face each other with the axis O in between). Therefore, as will be described later, the position (engagement position) for applying the driving force to the rotating member 640 can be separated as much as possible to stabilize the rotation of the rotating member 640.

Further, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged in postures (rotation positions) in which the phases of the engaging portion 637b and the engaging portion 638b are different from each other. That is, in a state where one of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is not engaged with the engaged portion 641, the other of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is engaged with the engaged portion 641. (It is avoided that one and the other are disengaged at the same time). Therefore, as will be described later, it is possible to suppress the intermittent transmission of the driving force from the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 to the rotation member 640, and to stabilize the rotation of the rotation member 640.

It will be described back from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48. As described above, the rotating member 640 is a front view ring-shaped member that is rotated by receiving the driving force of the rotating mechanism 630, and is in a posture concentric with the central transmission member 634 and the guide member 620. It is arranged on the front side of the. In the present embodiment, the rotating member 640 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front. Here, the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60.

54 (a) is a front view of the rotating member 640, and FIG. 54 (b) is a side view of the rotating member 640 in the direction of the arrow LIVb of FIG. 54 (a). Further, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the rotating member 640 in the direction of arrow LV in FIG. 54 (b).

As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the rotating member 640 includes a plurality of (30 in this embodiment) dividing member DVs, and the plurality of dividing member DVs are connected to each other in an endless manner along the circumferential direction. As a result, it is formed in an annular shape in the front view.

In this case, the plurality of split member DVs are formed so that the distance between the plurality of split member DVs can be changed. That is, in the rotating member 640, there is a first section S1 in which the dividing members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval, and a second interval in which the dividing members DV are narrower than the first interval. A second section S2 connected in the circumferential direction is formed at. Between the first section S1 and the second section S2, the interval between the dividing members DV changes from the first interval in the first section S1 to the second interval in the second section S2 (or vice versa). A section is formed.

FIG. 56 (a) is a front perspective view of the split member DV, and FIG. 56 (b) is a rear perspective view of the split member DV. Further, FIG. 57 is an exploded front perspective view of the split member DV, and FIG. 58 is an exploded rear perspective view of the split member DV. In addition, in FIGS. 56 to 58, in order to understand the connecting structure of the dividing member DVs, the connecting link member 644 of the adjacent dividing members DV is schematically illustrated by using the alternate long and short dash line.

Here, in the present embodiment, the detected portion 641c is formed in the divided member DV of a part (15 in the present embodiment) of the plurality of divided member DVs, while the remaining divided member DVs The formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. The split member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed and the split member DV in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted have the same other configurations except for the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c. Therefore, in the following, the split member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed will be described, and the description of the split member DV in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the split member DV includes an engaged portion 641, a back side main body 642 in which the engaged portion 641 is arranged on the back side, and a front side of the back side main body 642. The front side main body 643 is arranged in, the connecting link member 644 whose base end side is rotatably supported between the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643, and the front side main body 643. It is displaceably arranged between the plate holding member 645 to be displaced, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 displaceably held by the plate holding member 645, and the front main body 643 and the plate holding member 645. It is mainly composed of an undulating link member 648.

As described above, the engaged portion 641 is a portion that is engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotational drive members 637 and 638 of the drive mechanism 630, and is formed in a substantially isosceles right triangle shape in the front view. The rear side main body 642 is arranged so as to project from the back surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 56B).

On the mounting surface side of the engaged portion 641 to the back side main body 642, an opposing portion 641a is formed between the engaged portion 641 and the back surface of the back side main body 642 at a predetermined interval, and the opposing portion 641a and the back side main body are formed. The outer edge portion of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the surfaces facing the 642. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lifting of the split member DV (one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642) from the front of the guide member 620.

Further, a pair of sliding rollers 641b formed in a columnar shape are rotatably supported on the mounting surface side of the engaged portion 641 on the back surface side main body 642. The sliding roller 641b can make its rotation axis orthogonal to the back surface of the back surface side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the dividing member DV) and can bring its outer peripheral surface into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. Arranged in a posture. As a result, the sliding resistance when the dividing member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620 can be reduced.

On the other hand, a plate-shaped detected portion 641c is formed overhanging on the side opposite to the mounting surface of the engaged portion 641 on the back surface side main body 642. The detected portion 641c is a plate-shaped portion detected by the detection sensor 684 arranged on the guide member 680, and is in a horizontal posture on the back surface of the back surface side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the dividing member DV). To.

The back surface of the back surface side main body 642 is placed on the front surface of the guide member 620, and is a portion that slides on the front surface of the guide member 620 when the rotating member 640 is rotated, and is formed in a rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front. In the state where the rotating member 640 is arranged on the guide member 620, the back surface side main body 642 is arranged in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. That is, each back side main body portion 642 is arranged in a radial linear shape centered on the axis O (see FIG. 54).

The back side main body 642 has a groove-shaped opening 642a and an undulating link opening 642b extending linearly along the longitudinal direction, and the front surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 57). A shaft support portion 642c that is formed and pivotally supports the base end side of the connecting link member 644 with the front side main body 643 (shaft support portion 643b), and a bent portion that protrudes from the back surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 58). 642d and.

The connecting link opening 642a is an opening through which the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 of the adjacent split member DV is slidably inserted, and the split member is inserted by inserting the insertion portion 644a into the connecting link opening 642a. The DV can be connected to the adjacent split member DV via the connecting link member 644. Further, the connecting link member 644 inserts the tip of the insertion portion 644a inserted through the connecting link opening 642a into the connecting link action groove 621 of the guide member 620.

The opening width of the connecting link opening 642a is set to a size equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644. Therefore, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link 644 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connecting link opening 642a.

When the dividing member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 receives an action from the connection link action groove 621 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a opens the connection link opening 642a. By sliding along the line, it is possible to allow the posture of the connecting link member 644 to change with the action from the connecting link action groove 621. As a result, the posture of the connecting link member 644 with respect to the back side main body 642 can be generated, and the distance between the dividing members DV can be increased or decreased.

The undulating link opening 642b is an opening through which the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is slidably inserted, and the undulating link member 648 guides the tip of the insertion portion 648a inserted through the undulating link opening 642b. It is inserted through the undulating link action groove 622 of 620.

The opening width of the undulating link opening 642b is set to a size equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the undulating link opening 642b.

When the dividing member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 receives an action from the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 648a opens the undulating link opening 642b. The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 can be raised and lowered by sliding along the above.

As described above, the shaft support portion 642c is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 57) of the back side main body 642, so that the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is viewed from the engaged portion 641 in front view. It can be pivotally supported at overlapping positions. Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 is driven by the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotational drive members 637 and 638 and the split member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacements are adjacent to each other. It can be easily transmitted to the split member DV to be performed via the connecting link member 644.

The bent portion 642d is projected from the back surface of the back surface side main body 642 on the other side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 58), and the protruding tip thereof is opposed to the back surface of the back surface side main body 642 at a predetermined interval. The inner edge portion of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the bent portion of the protruding tip and the facing surface of the back surface side main body 642. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lifting of the split member DV (the other side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642) from the front of the guide member 620.

Further, the bent portion 642d is arranged so that its base can be brought into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the inner edge of the guide member 620, and the distance between the base of the bent portion 642d and the sliding roller 641b described above is increased. The size is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the radial width of the guide member 620. As a result, the displacement of the dividing member DV in the radial direction of the guide member 620 can be regulated, so that the main body member DV (rear side main body 642) remains in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. Therefore, the guide member 620 can be displaced in the circumferential direction.

The front side main body 643 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view having substantially the same size as the back side main body 642, and is an undulation which is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction. A shaft support portion 643b formed on the back surface of one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 58) and supporting the base end side of the connecting link member 644 between the link slide groove 643a and the back side main body 642 (shaft support portion 642c). , A support plate 643c that is projected from the front and rotatably supports the partition plate 647.

The undulating link slide groove 643a is a linear groove in which the undulating link member 648 is slidably arranged, and extends in parallel with the undulating link opening 642b. That is, the undulating link member 648 is slid along the undulating link slide groove 643a to slide the insertion portion 648a along the undulating link opening 642b.

The width dimension of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 is smaller in the width dimension on the other side in the longitudinal direction than in the width dimension on the one side in the longitudinal direction in the front view. That is, it is formed in a front view wedge shape in which the width dimension of the portion located on the inner peripheral side is smaller than the width dimension of the portion located on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640. Therefore, the second interval in the second section S2 can be made smaller so that the divided members DV can be brought close to each other, and the space required for arranging the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In the second embodiment, in the second section S2, the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 are brought into contact with the adjacent back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 in the circumferential direction (see FIGS. 54 and 73). ..

The connecting link member 644 is a long member, and the base end side is rotatably supported by the shaft support portions 642c and 643b of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643, and a columnar insertion portion is provided on the front end side. 644a is formed. The insertion portion 644a is projected in a posture parallel to the rotation axis of the connecting link member 644, and as described above, the connecting link of the guide member 620 is provided through the connecting link opening 642a of the back side main body 642 in the adjacent split member DV. It is inserted into the working groove 621.

The diameter of the insertion portion 644a is set to be substantially the same as or slightly smaller than the groove width of the connecting link opening 642a and the connecting link working groove 621. Therefore, during the rotation of the rotating member 640, the displacement of the split member DV with respect to the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link 644 can be suppressed to a minimum, and the distance between the split member DVs can be easily maintained constant. As a result, the positional variation of the detected portion 641c can be suppressed, so that the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684 (see FIG. 71) can be improved.

The base end side (that is, the shaft support portions 642c and 643b of each main body 642 and 643) rotatably supported by the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 of the connecting link member 644 is from the connecting link opening 642a. Is also arranged at a position close to the engaged portion 641. In the present embodiment, the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is arranged at a position overlapping the engaged portion 641 in the front view (viewing in the axial center O direction of the rotating member 640).

As a result, the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 are engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV, and the rotation of the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 causes the engaging portions 641. When the split member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement of the split member DV can be easily transmitted to the adjacent split member DV via the connecting link member 644. As a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

The undulating link member 648 is a member that is slidably held in the undulating link slide groove 643a of the front body 643, and has a columnar insertion portion 648a formed on the back side and an action groove 648b on the front side. It is formed. The insertion portion 648a is projected in a posture parallel to the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644, and as described above, is formed in the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 via the undulating link opening 642b of the back side main body 642. It is inserted.

The action groove 648b is a portion for undulating the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 by acting on the actuated portion 646d of the display plate 646 by sliding displacement of the undulation link member 648, and is a portion of the undulation link member 648. It is formed in a groove shape extending linearly along the slide direction, and the actuated portion 646d of the display plate 646 is slidably inserted between the facing surfaces of the groove-shaped portion.

The display plate 646 has a plate portion 646a formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view, a shaft portion 646b and a connecting shaft 646c formed on one side of the plate portion 646a, and an action groove 648b of the undulating link member 648 facing each other. It is provided with a plate-shaped actuated portion 646d to be inserted between the surfaces. Since the acted portion 646d is formed by bending in a substantially S shape in front view, when the undulating link member 648 is slidably displaced, the acted portion 646d is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement. The display plate 646 can be rotated around the shaft portion 646b as the center of rotation.

The partition plate 647 is formed on a plate-shaped plate portion 647a formed in a front view trap shape, a pair of shaft portions 647b formed on one side of the plate portion 647a, and a pair of shaft portions 647b on the same side as the pair of shaft portions 647b. It is provided with a shaft support portion 647c that is formed and rotatably supports the connecting shaft 646c of the display plate 646.

Here, as described above, the rotating unit 600 is an effect device configured to imitate a roulette wheel in which a plurality of pockets rotate a wheel in which a plurality of pockets are connected in the circumferential direction and a thrown ball is dropped into one of the pockets. The space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 of the partition member DV of 1 and the partition plate 647 of the adjacent division member DV is used as a pocket, and the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) is red. Alternatively, a black color is added and different numbers (1 to 29) are displayed for each.

In the present embodiment, the display board 646 of 1 is colored green and a predetermined mark (star shape) is displayed. Further, as for the rotating member 640, only the display plate 646 located in the first section S1 is visible to the player. That is, the display board 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member arranged on the front side thereof, and is invisible to the player.

The plate holding member 645 includes a shaft support portion 645a that rotatably supports the shaft portion 646b of the display plate 646, and a shaft support portion 645b that rotatably supports the shaft portion 647b of the partition plate 647, and each of these shaft support portions. The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are rotatably supported on the upper surface side (front side) of the front side main body 643 by the shaft support by 645a and 645b.

In this case, since the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, the display plate 646 is rotated around the shaft portion 646b with the sliding displacement of the undulating link member 648. Then, the rotation is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, and the partition plate 647 is rotated around the shaft portion 647b. The rotation of the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

59 (a) and 59 (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the dividing member DV in the state of being arranged in the first section S1, and FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b) are views. It is a top perspective view and the bottom perspective view of the split member DV in the state of being arranged in the 2nd section S2. In addition, in FIGS. 59 and 60, in order to facilitate understanding, a state in which a part of the configuration is seen through is shown, and the connecting link member 644, the detected portion 641c, and the bent portion 642d are omitted. As shown in FIG. 59, in the state where the dividing member DV is arranged in the first section S1, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is formed in the small diameter portion 622b (see FIG. 50) of the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620. It is inserted. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slid-displaced to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the inner peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the axial center O side). As a result, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is arranged in the horizontal posture, while the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is arranged in the upright posture.

The horizontal posture is a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is parallel to the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the dividing member DV), and the standing posture is the plate of the partition plate 647. The portion 647a is in a posture of being orthogonally parallel to the back surface of the back surface side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the dividing member DV).

As shown in FIG. 60, in the state where the dividing member DV is arranged in the second section S2, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 has a large diameter portion 622a in the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 (see FIG. 50). Is inserted into. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slid-displaced on one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the outer peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the side opposite to the axis O). As a result, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted from the horizontal posture to the plate portion 647a side of the partition plate 647 and arranged in the inclined posture, and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is moved from the standing posture. The display plate 646 is tilted toward the plate portion 646a and arranged in an inclined posture.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c. Therefore, the display plate 646 is rotated by the sliding displacement of the undulating link member 648. The partition plate 647 can also be rotated via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c.

As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide the undulating link action groove and the undulating link member for each of the mechanism for rotating the display plate 646 and the mechanism for rotating the partition plate 647, and the undulations in both mechanisms. The link action groove and the undulating link member can be shared. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

Here, in the present embodiment, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is heavier than the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647. Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 60 (that is, the state in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is tilted downward), the state shown in FIG. 59 (that is, the display). When the plate portion 646a of the plate 646 is in the horizontal posture and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is in the upright posture), the rotational action of the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) is used. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and quickly.

That is, since the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward, it can form a horizontal posture by being rotated by its own weight in the direction of being tilted downward, and the rotation of the display plate 646 (own weight). Is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, so that the partition plate 647 can be lifted to form an upright posture. Therefore, even when the rotation is hindered by the adhesion of dirt, dust, etc., the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and quickly.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is set so that the overhang length of the plate portion 646a from the shaft portion 646b is larger than the overhang length of the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 from the shaft portion 647b. Therefore, the center of gravity of the display plate 646 in the plate portion 646a can be separated from the shaft portion 646b, and the center of gravity of the partition plate 647 in the plate portion 647a can be brought close to the shaft portion 647b. As a result, the state shown in FIG. 59 is formed. Can be performed more reliably and quickly by utilizing the weight of the display board 646.

It will be described back from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48. The pitching device 650 is a device for throwing a ball B into the rotating member 640, is housed in a central recess in the central transmission member 634 of the drive mechanism 630, and is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640. Here, the pitching device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 69.

61 and 62 are exploded front perspective views of the pitching device 650. In addition, in FIG. 62, the state in which the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670 is attached to the case body 651 is shown, and the passage member 655 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the pitching device 650 includes a case body 651 formed in a container shape with an open front side, an arm rotation mechanism 660 disposed inside the case body 651, and a holding piece infestation. It mainly includes a mechanism 670, a passage member 655 arranged on the front side of the case body 651, and a sphere B formed in a spherical shape from a translucent material.

The case body 651 has a substantially circular bottom wall portion 651a in front view, a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 651b erected from the bottom wall portion 651a toward the front, and a radially outer surface from the outer peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b. It is provided with an overhanging wall portion 651c formed by projecting in a flange shape toward the direction, and the overhanging wall portion 651c is fastened and fixed to the back side of the guide member 620, whereby the vertical tip (opening portion) of the outer wall portion 651b is provided. Is arranged at a position substantially aligned with the front surface of the rotating member 640 (plate portion 646a of the display plate 646).

A ball holding portion 652 is arranged in front of the bottom wall portion 651a. A spherical recess having a size corresponding to the outer diameter of the sphere B is formed on the front surface of the sphere holding portion 652, and the recess is used as a holding position (initial position) of the sphere B. That is, when the sphere B is arranged on the sphere holding portion 652, the sphere B is held between the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b and the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 (see FIG. 44).

In this case, the pitching device 650 is arranged in a posture in which the holding piece 677 of the holding piece infestation mechanism 670 is located at the lowermost position, and when the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is rotated, the ball B becomes an outer wall portion. The inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral passage 651c1) of 651b is rolled and held on the holding piece 677 at the protruding position of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670 (see FIG. 68). Here, the arm rotation mechanism 660 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65.

FIG. 63 is an exploded front perspective view of the arm rotation mechanism 660. Further, FIG. 64 is a front view of the pitching device 660 in a state where the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is arranged at the holding position, and FIG. 65 shows the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 arranged at the separated position. It is a front view of the pitching device 660 in the state of being In addition, in FIGS. 64 and 65, a state in which the front case 662 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is removed is shown for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, the arm rotation mechanism 660 includes a rear case 661 arranged on the bottom wall portion 651a of the case body 651, a front case 662 arranged on the front surface of the back case 661, and the front case 662. It includes a crank member 663 and an arm member 664 that are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the rear case 661 and the front case 662, and a drive motor 665 and a pinion gear 666 for driving the crank member 663 and the arm member 664. ..

The shafts 661a and 661b are projected from the rear case 661, and the crank member 663 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661a and the arm member 664 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661b. A gear 663a to which a pinion gear 676 is meshed is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the crank member 663, and a pin portion 663b is projected at a position eccentric from the center of rotation (shaft 661a). Further, in the arm member 664, a sliding groove 664a through which the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 is slidably inserted is extended in a straight line, and the center of rotation (shaft 661b) with respect to the sliding groove 664a. ) Is formed on the opposite side of the ring, and a front-view curved portion 664b is formed by dividing the ring shape in half.

Therefore, the drive motor 665 is rotationally driven in the forward or reverse direction, the crank member 663 is rotated via the rotation of the pinion gear 666 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 655, and the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 is rotated. By acting on the sliding groove 664a of the arm member 664, the arm member 664 can be rotated in one direction or the other direction with the shaft 661b as the center of rotation.

That is, the arm member 664 holds the curved portion 664b at a holding position (see FIG. 64) for holding the sphere B on the sphere holding portion 652 along the outer peripheral portion of the sphere holding portion 652, and holds the curved portion 664b on the sphere. It is possible to rotate (swing) with a separation position (see FIG. 65) at which the ball B is separated from the portion 652 and the ball B is dropped from the ball holding portion 652 to the inner peripheral passage 651c1.

In the present embodiment, a part of the inner peripheral surface of the curved portion 664b (a range of a central angle of approximately 90 degrees on the side (lower side) separated from the shaft 661b) is formed by the cantilever plate 664c. The cantilever plate 664c is a plate-like body that curves along the inner peripheral surface of the curved portion 664b, and a shaft 664c1 provided on the base end side thereof is rotatably supported by the curved portion 664b and is supported on the tip side. It is maintained in a posture of being lifted upward (inward in the radial direction) by the elastic force of the leaf spring 667a of the limit switch 667 arranged on the back surface side (outer peripheral surface side) of the limit switch 667.

Therefore, when the ball B is held by the ball holding portion 652 while the arm member 664 is arranged at the holding position, the cantilever plate 664c is pushed down with the shaft 664c1 as the center of rotation by the weight of the ball B. When the ball B is not held by the ball holding portion 652 while the limit switch 667 is turned on, the cantilever plate 664c is in the lifted posture as described above, and the limit switch 667 is turned off. As a result, the presence or absence of the ball B in the ball holding portion 652 can be detected.

In this case, the curved portion 664b of the arm member 664 and the recess of the ball holding portion 652 are formed in a size that allows the ball B to be displaced while the arm member 664 is arranged at the holding position. That is, the inner diameter of the curved portion 664b and the inner diameter of the recess of the sphere holding portion 652 are made larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is hit or shaken by the player and an external force (vibration) is input, the ball B can be displaced according to the input of the vibration. That is, when the sphere B is displaced (vibrated), the cantilever plate 664c can be displaced and the limit switch 667 can be turned on / off according to the vibration. As a result, by monitoring the state of the limit switch 667, it is possible to detect the input of an external force to the pachinko machine 10 by using the arm rotation mechanism 660.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 61 and 62. As described above, when the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is rotated to the separated position, the sphere B is rolled on the inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral passage 651c1) of the outer wall portion 651b, and the holding piece infestation mechanism 670 It is held on the holding piece 677 in the protruding position (see FIG. 68). In the holding piece retracting mechanism 670, the holding piece 677 is formed so as to be retractable between the protruding position and the immersion position, and when the holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersion position, the sphere B is formed into a plurality of rotating members 640. The pitch is thrown on any of the dividing member DVs (display board 646) of the above. Here, the holding piece infestation mechanism 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69.

FIG. 66 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670 when the holding piece 677 is arranged at the protruding position, and FIG. 67 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670 when the holding piece 677 is arranged at the immersion position. It is an exploded front perspective view of.

FIG. 68 (a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is arranged at a protruding position, and FIG. 68 (b) is a holding taken along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb of FIG. 68 (a). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the single-sided appearance mechanism 670. Further, FIG. 69 (a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is arranged at the immersion position, and FIG. 69 (b) is a line LXIXb-LXIXb of FIG. 69 (a). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the holding piece infestation mechanism 670 in.

As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670 is formed by being curved in an arc shape along the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651, and is arranged on the bottom wall portion 651a of the case body 651. A back case 671, a front case 672 arranged in front of the back case 671, a slide member 673 held so as to be slidable between the facing surfaces of the back case 671 and the front case 672, and a slide member thereof. It includes a drive motor 675 and a pinion gear 676 for driving the 673, and a holding piece 677 that appears and disappears with the slide displacement of the slide member 673.

The rear case 671 includes two sets of one-to-one sets of roller members 674 that are arranged to face each other at predetermined intervals, and holds the slide member 673 so as to be slidable between the facing sets of the roller members 674. Further, the rear case 671 includes a sliding base 671a having a rectangular plate shape in a top view formed by projecting from one end side (lower portion) in the circumferential direction toward the front side, and the upper surface of the sliding base 671a and the front base 672. Guides the slide displacement (protrusion to the front side and immersion to the back side) of the holding piece 677 with and from the lower surface (outer peripheral surface) of the holding piece.

A pin portion 673a protrudes from one end side (lower portion) in the circumferential direction of the slide member 673, and a rack gear 673b to which a pinion gear 676 is meshed is provided on the inner peripheral surface on the other end side (information portion) in the circumferential direction. It is engraved along. Further, a sliding groove 677a through which the pin portion 673a of the slide member 673 is slidably inserted is bent and extended in a substantially Z shape in the holding piece 677. That is, one end side (right side of FIG. 66) of the sliding groove 677a is offset to the front side of the other end side (left side of FIG. 66).

Therefore, the drive motor 675 is rotationally driven in the forward or reverse direction, and the pinion gear 676 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 675 is rotated to slide and displace the slide member 673 via the rack gear 673b, and slide the slide member 673. By acting the pin portion 673a of the member 673 on the sliding groove 677a of the holding piece 677, the holding piece 677 can be projected to the front side or immersed in the back side. That is, the holding piece 677 can be slidably displaced between the protruding position protruding toward the front side (see FIG. 68) and the immersion position immersed toward the back side (see FIG. 69).

Here, the upper surface of the holding piece 677 is located on the back side (right side of FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)) and is the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651 (that is, the inner peripheral passage 651c1). A curved surface 677b that is concentrically curved and smoothly connected to the inner peripheral passage 651c1 in the circumferential direction, and is connected to the edge of the curved surface 677b and heads toward the front side (left side of FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)). An ascending inclined surface 677c that is ascended according to the above, and a descending inclined surface 677d that is connected to the edge of the ascending inclined surface 677c and is ascended toward the front side are formed.

Therefore, in the state where the holding piece 677 is arranged at the protruding position (see FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b)), the holding piece 677 is dropped from the ball holding portion 652 and rolled on the inner peripheral passage 651c1 to bend the holding piece 677. The ball B that has reached the surface 677b is restricted from rolling to the front side (left side in FIG. 68 (b)) by the ascending inclination of the ascending inclined surface 677c, and is held on the holding piece 677 (curved surface 677b). Can be done.

On the other hand, when the holding piece 677 is immersed in the back side from this protruding position and placed in the immersive position (see FIGS. 69 (a) and 69 (b)), the front of the front case 672 causes the back side (FIG. 69 (b)). ) The ball B whose movement to the right side) is restricted to move over the ascending inclined surface 677c and is positioned on the descending inclined surface 677d as the holding piece 677 is displaced in the immersion direction (back surface side). As a result, the ball B can be rolled along the downward inclination of the descending inclined surface 677d, and the ball B can be thrown to the front side (divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

Since both sides of the curved surface 677b are smoothly connected to the inner peripheral passage 651c1, the ball B that has been dropped from the ball holding portion 652 and rolled on one of the inner peripheral passages 651c1 is curved by the holding piece 677. It can pass over the surface 677b and roll to the other inner peripheral passage 651c1. That is, the sphere B can be reciprocated between the inner peripheral passage 651c1 on one side in the circumferential direction and the inner peripheral passage 651c1 on the other side in the circumferential direction via the curved surface 677b. Further, since the curved surface 677b of the holding piece 677 is located below the inner peripheral passage 651c1, when the momentum of the sphere B is lost and the rolling is converged, the sphere B is positioned on the curved surface 677b. Can be made to.

It returns to FIG. 61 and will be described. As described above, the passage member 655 is arranged on the front side of the case body 651. The passage member 655 is located on the front side of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670, and the ball B thrown by the immersion operation (immersion to the immersion position) of the holding piece 677 is divided into the rotating member 640. The plate 646) includes a throwing passage 655a which is a passage for throwing a ball onto the plate 646) and a return passage 655b which is a passage for returning the ball B thrown from the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 to the ball holding portion 652.

The throwing passage 655a has a substantially U-shaped groove portion 655a1 having substantially the same width dimension as the descending inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece infestation mechanism 670 and extending to the front side, and the front surface from the groove portion 655a1. The front portion 655a2 which is connected to the side edge portion and is substantially flush with the display plate 646 in the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640, and the front portion 655a2 which is erected from both sides in the width direction and is formed in the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640. A pair of facing portions 655a3 facing each other at substantially the same spacing as the facing spacing of the partition plates 647 are provided.

Therefore, when the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is immersed in the immersion position, the sphere B that is rolled on the descending inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 is received by the groove portion 655a1 and the extending direction of the groove portion 655a1. By rolling along the line, the ball B can be thrown while suppressing rattling.

Further, since the front portion 655a2 is flush with the display plate 646 of the dividing member DV and the facing distance between the pair of facing portions 655a3 is substantially the same as the facing distance of the dividing member DV partition plate 647, the pitch is thrown. The formed sphere B can be smoothly arranged on the display board 646 of the dividing member DV. When the ball B is thrown, the rotating member 640 is stopped at a phase (rotational position) at which the partition plate 647 of the dividing member DV coincides with the facing portion 655a3 based on the detection result by the detection sensor 684 described later.

The return passage 655b has a rolling portion 655b1 as a rolling surface that rolls to the downstream side when the ball B sent from the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 is received on the upstream side, and the rolling portion 655b1 on the downstream side. It is provided with an erection portion 655b2 which is formed to be erected and curved so as to direct the rolling direction of the sphere B toward the back surface side.

In the front view of the pitching device 650, the rolling portion 655b1 is arranged on the inner peripheral side edge portion of the rotating member 640 on the upstream side and on the front side of the ball holding portion 652b on the downstream side. Further, the rolling portion 6551b1 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the upstream side to the downstream side and downwardly inclined toward the ball holding portion 652 on the downstream side.

The sphere B placed on the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 and conveyed in the circumferential direction with the rotation of the rotating member 640 is within the radial direction due to the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b of the guide member 680 described later. When the ball is pushed toward the upstream side of the return passage 655b, the ball B is rolled to the downstream side of the rolling portion 655b1 and dropped to the ball holding portion 652 while being guided by the upright portion 655b2. To.

It will be described back from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48. As described above, the guide member 680 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640. The guide member 680 is a member arranged along the lower portion of the rotating member 640, and guides the sphere B on the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 during transportation accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 640 (that is,). The sphere B is supported from below), and a detection sensor 684 for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 is held. Here, the guide member 680 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71.

FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the guide member 680, and FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the guide member 680. As shown in FIG. 70, the guide member 680 includes a base portion 681 disposed on the case member 610, a plate-shaped transmission plate 682 disposed on the front side of the base portion 681, and a back surface side of the transmission plate 682. The cantilever plate 683 arranged in the base portion 681 and a plurality of detection sensors 684 (six in the present embodiment) arranged in the base portion 681 are mainly provided.

The base portion 681 is a member formed by dividing the annular shape at a central angle of approximately 120 degrees (that is, a shape curved in a front view arc shape), and a guide surface 681a is formed on the inner peripheral surface side thereof. .. The guide surface 681a is arranged on the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member 640, and faces the sphere B arranged on the dividing member DV (that is, the space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647). That is, the ball B that is arranged on the split member DV of the rotating member 640 and is conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 is supported from below.

Further, on the inner peripheral surface side of the base portion 681, a return guide 681b connected to the downstream side (right side in FIG. 70) of the guide surface 681a is formed. The return guide 681b is a portion for sending the ball B conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 to the return passage 655b of the passage member 655, is formed to have a width dimension smaller than that of the guide surface 681a, and is formed in the radial direction. By being formed in a shape protruding inward, the rotating member 640 is disposed so as to face the dividing member DV (display plate 646) (see FIGS. 43 and 44).

Therefore, when the sphere B placed on the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 is conveyed in the circumferential direction with the rotation of the rotating member 640, the return guide is provided by the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) of the dividing member DV. The sphere B is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of 681b. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is further rotated, the sphere B is pushed out radially inward by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b, and is conveyed to the upstream side of the return passage 655b.

Here, even if the formation of the return guide 681b is omitted, if the rotating member 640 is rotated to a position where the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) is tilted downward toward the return passage 655b, the partition plate is formed. The ball B can be dropped into the return passage 655b along the downward slope of 647. However, in this case, since the ball B is conveyed upward by the time the ball B starts rolling due to its own weight, the drop position when the ball B is dropped becomes higher, and the partition plate 647 Since the ball B is rolled along the downward inclination and then dropped, the momentum when the ball B falls is large. Therefore, the return passage 655b may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, by providing the return guide 681b, the drop position when the ball B is dropped into the return passage 655b can be lowered, and the ball B slides on the return guide 681b. Since the ball is thrown to the return passage 655b while being carried, the throwing speed can be weakened. As a result, damage to the return passage 655b can be suppressed.

The transmission plate 682 is a portion facing the dividing member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 at a predetermined interval (interval in which the sphere B can be held), and a part of the upper edge side portion in the center in the width direction is formed. The passage member 655 is extended upward to a position facing the throwing passage 655a (front portion 655a2). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball B thrown from the pitching device 650 into the split member DV of the rotating member 640 from jumping out.

Further, the transmission plate 682 is not only the dividing member DV into which the ball B is thrown (that is, the dividing member DV having the same phase as the front portion 655a2 of the throwing passage 655a), but also the downstream side of the dividing member DV (of the ball B). Since the split member DV adjacent to the (downstream side in the transport direction) is also formed to have a size (width dimension) that allows it to partially face each other, the rampage of the ball B thrown from the throwing passage 655a can be caused by the transmission plate 682. It is possible to easily converge between them, and the ball B can be stably conveyed to the return guide 681b.

On the other hand, the transmission plate 682 has a size (width dimension) capable of facing the split member DV on which the ball B is thrown and the split member DV adjacent to the downstream side of the split member DV, and the split member DV to be thrown. And the split member DV located on the downstream side of the adjacent split member DV is not faced. That is, the ball B can be exposed between the edge of the transmission plate 682 on the downstream side in the transport direction (right side in FIG. 70) and the return guide 681b, so that the player can visually recognize the transport of the ball B. It can be done easily.

Since the transmission plate 682 is entirely formed of a light-transmitting material, the player can see through the member or the ball B located on the back surface side thereof. Therefore, the thrown ball B passes through the throwing passage 655a and is dropped between the display plate 647 of the dividing member DV and the transmission plate 682 facing each other, and is supported by the guide surface 681a by the rotation of the rotating member 640. The player can visually recognize a series of modes of transportation.

The cantilever plate 683 is a member that forms the inner peripheral surface of the base portion 681 together with the guide surface 681a, and is formed as a plate-like body that curves along the guide surface 681a (that is, the inner peripheral surface of the base portion 681). One end side of the cantilever plate 683 is rotatably supported by a shaft 685 on the base portion 681, and the other end side in the circumferential direction is rotatably supported by the elastic force of a leaf spring of a limit switch (not shown) arranged on the base portion 681. It is maintained in a lifted position upward (inward in the radial direction).

In the posture in which the other end side of the cantilever plate 683 in the circumferential direction is lifted upward, the limit switch is turned off, and when the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640, the ball B Due to the weight, the cantilever plate 683 is pushed down with the shaft 685 as the center of rotation, and the limit switch is turned on. Thereby, it can be detected that the ball B thrown from the pitching device 650 is arranged at an appropriate position (divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

On the other hand, when the sphere B is conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 and the weight of the sphere B acting on the cantilever plate 683 is equal to or less than a predetermined value, the cantilever plate 683 is lifted as described above. Is returned to, and the limit switch is turned off.

The detection sensor 684 is a sensor device for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640, and is formed as a non-contact sensor in which the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion are arranged to face each other, and the detection region (light emitting portion and the light receiving portion) thereof. The facing spaces of the portions) are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction while being positioned on the movement locus of the detected portion 641c of the dividing member DV in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54). The interval between the detection sensors 684 is set to be the same as the interval between the dividing members DV (detected portion 641c) in the first section S1 (first interval).

Therefore, a plurality of (six in this embodiment) dividing member DVs adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction can be arranged at positions corresponding to the detection sensors 684, and the rotating members 640 correspond to a predetermined amount (that is, the first interval). Each time the rotation amount) is rotated, the split member DV detected by each detection sensor 684 can be shifted in the circumferential direction.

In this case, as described above, the detected portion 641c is formed in the divided member DV of a part (15 in the present embodiment) of the plurality of divided member DV, while the remaining divided member DV is formed. The formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. Therefore, in the detection sensor 684 in which the dividing member DV on which the detected portion 641c is formed is arranged, the light received by the light receiving portion of the light emitted from the light emitting portion is blocked by the detected portion 641c, and the detection signal is turned off. The detection sensor 684 in which the dividing member DV on which the detected portion 641c is not formed can receive the light emitted from the light emitting portion by the light receiving portion, and the detection signal is turned on (see FIG. 76). As a result, as will be described later, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected based on the combination of the detection results of each detection sensor 684.

In the present embodiment, two detection results (on / off) based on the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c of the dividing member DV are performed by the six detection sensors 684, respectively, so 64 (= 2 to the 6th power). Street combinations can be formed. In this case, since the number of the split member DVs arranged is 30, as will be described later, the detection sensor 684 detects which of the plurality of split member DVs the split member DV is located at the reference position. It can always be determined based on the result.

Next, the operation of the rotating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 77. First, the operation of changing the interval between the dividing members DV when the rotating member 640 is rotated will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73.

FIG. 72 is a front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640. 73 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640 in the first section S1, and FIG. 73 (b) is a partial enlarged front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640 in the second section S2. It is an enlarged front view.

In addition, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, only the back side main body 642, the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648 among the components of the dividing member DV are shown in FIGS. 72 and 73. In addition, FIG. 73 shows a state in which the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 are hatched.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the rotating member 640 is a member rotatably formed with the axis O as the center of rotation (that is, along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620), and is a plurality of dividing members DV. Is formed in an endless shape in which the above are connected in the circumferential direction. That is, in each dividing member DV, the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is rotatably supported by the back side main body 642, while the insertion portion 644a on the tip end side of the connecting link member 644 is adjacent to the back side of the split member DV. It is inserted into the connecting link action groove 621 through the connecting link opening 642a in the main body 642.

As described above, in the back side main body 642 of the split member DV, the sliding roller 641b on one side in the longitudinal direction and the bent portion 642 on the other side in the longitudinal direction are in contact with the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the guide member 620. When the guide member 620 is moved in the circumferential direction, the posture with respect to the guide member 620 radiates from the posture in which the axis O is located on the extension line in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (that is, the axis O is the center). It is maintained in a linear posture). That is, only movement while maintaining that posture is allowed.

In this case, the large-diameter portion 621a of the connecting link action groove 621 is formed at a position closer to the base end side (rotatably axially supported side) of the connecting link member 644 than the small-diameter portion 621b. In a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the working groove 621 (see FIG. 73A), the connecting link member 644 is tilted with respect to the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642. As a result, the back side main bodies 642 can be separated from each other. That is, the distance between the dividing members DV (rear side main body 642) in the first section S1 can be set to a large distance (first distance).

On the other hand, since the small diameter portion 621b of the connecting link action groove 621 is formed at a position farther from the base end side (rotatably axially supported side) of the connecting link member 644 than the large diameter portion 621a, such connecting link action In a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is inserted into the small diameter portion 621b of the groove 621 (see FIG. 73B), the connecting link member 644 is placed on the back surface in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642. The side main bodies 642 can be brought close to each other. That is, the distance between the dividing members DV (rear side main body 642) in the second section S2 can be set to a small distance (second distance).

Here, the rotating member 640 is an effect device formed by imitating a roulette wheel as described above, and identification information such as numbers and marks is displayed on the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a). That is, the effect is performed by making the player visually recognize the identification information to be displayed on the display board 646. Therefore, considering the visibility of the player, it is preferable that the display board 646 (display of identification information) is large, and in order to secure variations in the effect, the number of display boards 646 (display of identification information) It is preferable that there are many types).

In this case, in consideration of the visibility of the player, the display of the identification information (that is, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646) needs to have a certain size or more, and the size is maintained. However, if the number of identification information displayed (the number of display boards 646) is increased, the diameter of the rotating member 640 becomes large and the rotating member 640 cannot be accommodated in the predetermined arrangement space, while the rotating member 640 is accommodated in the predetermined space. If the diameter is reduced, the number of identification information displayed (the number of display boards 646) is reduced, and it becomes impossible to secure variations in the effect.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first section S1 in which the dividing member DVs are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval and the interval narrower than the first interval in the first section S1 are set. As described above, the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) located in the first section S1 can be formed on the rotating member 640 with the second section S2 in which the dividing member DV is connected in the circumferential direction at intervals of 2. Visualize to the player (the display board 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member).

Therefore, as compared with the case where the plurality of divided member DVs are all connected at the first interval, the length of the rotating member 640 in the circumferential direction can be shortened, and the space required for arranging the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. At the same time, the display number of the identification information (that is, the display board 646) can be increased while ensuring a certain size or more. As a result, it becomes impossible to secure the visibility of the player and the variation of the effect.

Here, in the first section S1, the split member DV is such a display board because the plate portion 646a of the display board 646 is arranged in a horizontal posture (a posture parallel to the moving plane of the split member DV) as described above. The identification information displayed on the 646 can be easily seen by the player.

On the other hand, in the second section S2, the split member DV is in a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display board 646 is in a posture in which the tip side is lifted from the horizontal posture in the first section S1 as described above. Interference with DV can be suppressed, and the dividing members DV can be brought closer to each other by that amount. That is, the interval (second interval) between the dividing members DV in the second section S2 can be narrowed. As a result, the length of the rotating member 640 in the circumferential direction can be shortened, and the space required for its arrangement can be suppressed.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is displaced (rotated) on the upper surface of the front main body 643, and in the second section S2, the plate portion 646a is placed on the adjacent dividing member DV (plate holding). It can be lifted above the upper surface of the member 645) (that is, at a position where it does not interfere) (see FIG. 54). Therefore, the split member DV can be brought close to the position where the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 come into contact with each other. That is, the second interval in the second section S2 can be made narrower. As a result, the length of the rotating member 640 in the circumferential direction can be shortened, and the space required for arranging the rotating member can be suppressed.

Next, the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by the driving mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. 74 (a) to 74 (d) are state transition diagrams for each time the one-side rotation drive member 637 is rotated by 30 degrees, and the one-side rotation drive member 637 viewed from the front is shown.

Note that FIGS. 74 (b), 74 (c) and 74 (d) correspond to states rotated by 30, 60 and 90 degrees from FIG. 74 (a), respectively. Further, in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the engaged portion 641 of the dividing member DV is shown in a cross-sectional view, and the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 has a two-dot chain line. Illustrated with.

Here, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are formed in the same shape as each other as described above. In the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by these, the same driving operation will be described only by the driving operation by the one-side rotating driving member 637, and the description of the driving operation by the other-side rotating driving member 638 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the movement locus of the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 is partially the same as the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV. It is arranged at an overlapping position, and at the overlapping portion, the engaging portion 637b is made rotatable in a state of being engaged with the engaged portion 641. The circular shape of the movement locus of the engaging portion 637b is an inscribed circle having a smaller diameter than the circular shape of the moving locus of the engaged portion 641.

When the one-side rotation drive member 637 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 53), the rotation is transmitted to the split member DV via the engagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641. The split member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the movement is transmitted to the adjacent split member DV via each connecting link member 644, so that the rotating member 640 rotates. Rotated in the direction.

In this case, as described above, the engaged portion 641 of the dividing member DV is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (see FIGS. 57 and 58). That is, the engaged portion 641 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640 formed in an annular shape. Therefore, the amount of rotation of the rotating member 640 with respect to the unit rotation amount of the one-side rotation drive member 637 can be reduced (the amount of rotation of the one-side rotation drive member 637 required to rotate the rotation member 640 by the unit rotation amount can be increased. ). Therefore, the apparent reduction ratio can be reduced accordingly. In other words, since the driving force is applied to a position far from the axial center O of the rotating member 640, the rotational torque applied to the rotating member 640 can be increased. As a result, the rotary drive of the rotary member 640 (particularly, the rotary drive from the stopped state) can be stabilized, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

Here, the drive mechanism 630 includes a one-side rotation drive member 637 and a other-side rotation drive member 638, and they are arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force applied from the mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 can be dispersed at different positions in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640, and it is possible to suppress the application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided member DVs. That is, even when the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting a plurality of divided member DVs in an endless manner in the circumferential direction as described above, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase with each other in the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force from each rotation driving member 637, 638 can be applied to the two most separated positions of the rotating member 640 (plurality of divided member DVs), and as a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 is caused. Can be stabilized.

In this case, in the state of the dividing member DV, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 pivotally supported by the dividing member DV is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the connecting link action groove 621 of the guide member 620. There are three types, a second state inserted through the small diameter portion 621b, and a third state inserted through the connecting portion 621c. In the present embodiment, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other side The rotation drive member 638 can apply a driving force to the split member DV in the third state (that is, the engaging portions 637b and 638b can be engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV in the third state. ) Is placed.

As a result, a driving force can be applied to the dividing member DV in a state where the interval between the adjacent dividing member DV is changed from the first interval to the second interval (or vice versa). Since the split member DV receives a relatively large reaction force from the connecting portion 621c, the rotation of the entire rotating member 640 in which the plurality of split member DVs are endlessly connected (movement of each split member DV in the circumferential direction) is performed. By directly driving the split member DV that receives a relatively large reaction force from the connecting portion 621c by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, the plurality of split member DVs are endless. The entire rotating member 640 connected to the above can be stably displaced (rotated).

The period in which the driving force is transmitted from the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 to the division member DV completely coincides with the period in which the division member DV is in the third state described above. It is not necessary, and it is sufficient that the period in which the driving force of the former is transmitted and the period in which the latter is in the third state overlap at least in part.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link acting groove 622 are formed at positions having different phases. That is, when the dividing member DV is in the above-mentioned third state, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 arranged in the dividing member DV is formed in the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter portion 622b of the undulating link action groove 622. It is inserted.

Therefore, when the dividing member DV is moved in the circumferential direction of the guiding member 620, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 pivotally supported by the dividing member DV passes through the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link action groove 621. Later, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 passes through the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 (or vice versa).

As a result, the reaction force is not received from both the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link acting groove 622 at the same time, and the timing of receiving the reaction force can be different. As a result, the required driving force can be dispersed, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced accordingly.

Here, since the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged so that their phases (rotation positions of the engaging portions 637b and 638b) are different from each other, the displacement (rotation) of the rotation member 640 is performed. Can be stabilized. Here, the phase relationship between the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 will be described with reference to FIG. 75.

FIG. 75 is a state relationship diagram showing the relationship between the phase and the engagement or disengagement state of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 with respect to the split member DV. In FIG. 75, the upper state relationship diagram corresponds to the one-side rotation drive member 637, and the lower state relationship diagram corresponds to the other side rotation drive member 638, respectively. Further, in FIG. 75, the horizontal axis indicates the phase, and the vertical axis indicates the engaged or disengaged state.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 75, the first engaging portion 637b of the engaging portions 637b formed at three positions of the one-side rotation drive member 637 engages with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV. If the phase at the time of starting the above is defined as 0 ° (reference position), the one-side rotation drive member 637 has a th-order until the phase reaches approximately 100 ° (that is, until it rotates 100 ° from the reference position). The engaging portion 637b of 1 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV, and the driving force is transmitted to the split member DV, while the engagement is released while the phase is approximately 100 ° to 120 °. The transmission of the driving force to the dividing member DV is released.

After that, the second engaging portion 637b and the third engaging portion 637b of the engaging portions 637b formed at the three positions of the one-side rotation drive member 637 are the case of the first engaging portion 637b. The same engagement and disengagement states (ie, engagement between rotation angles of approximately 100 ° and disengagement between rotation angles of approximately 20 °) are repeated.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 75, with respect to the other side rotation drive member 638, each of the engaging portions 638b formed at the three positions is the same engagement and disengagement as in the case of the one side rotation drive member 637 described above. (That is, the engagement between the rotation angles of about 100 ° and the disengagement between the rotation angles of about 20 °) are repeated.

In this case, in this embodiment, as described above, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged so as to be out of phase with each other (rotational positions of the engaging portions 637b and 638b). To. That is, the other side rotation drive member 638 has a phase in which the first engaging portion 638b of the engaging portions 638b formed at the three locations starts engaging with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV. The first engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 is set to a phase delayed by approximately 40 ° from the phase (reference position) at which engagement starts.

As a result, while one of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 is disengaged from the split member DV (that is, the transmission of the driving force is released), one side is released. The phases (rotational positions) of the engaging portions 637b and 638b are set so that the other of the rotary drive member 637 or the other side rotary drive member 638 engages with the split member DV. As a result, it is possible to avoid forming a state in which the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are simultaneously disengaged from the split member DV. As a result, it is possible to suppress the intermittent transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 and stabilize the displacement of the rotating member 640.

That is, as described above, in the configuration in which the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting the plurality of dividing member DVs in an endless manner, the transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 becomes intermittent. Due to the transmission and release of the driving force, the distance between the dividing members DV is likely to be increased or decreased. Therefore, the posture of the rotating member 640 as a whole becomes unstable, and its displacement (rotation) becomes unstable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even if either one of the one-side rotation drive member 637 or the other side rotation drive member 638 is in the released state, the other is in the engaged state, and the driving force is applied to the rotation member 640. Can form a state in which is always transmitted, so that the distance between the dividing members DV can be easily kept constant. As a result, the posture of the rotating member 640 formed by connecting the plurality of divided member DVs in an endless manner can be stabilized, and the displacement (rotation) thereof can be stabilized.

Next, the operation of detecting the rotation position of the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76 is a state transition diagram for each unit rotation amount of the rotating member 640, and shows a state in which the arrangement of the detection sensor 684 and the dividing member DV is developed in a straight line.

In FIG. 76, for convenience of explanation, the reference numerals “A to F” are shown on the detection sensor 684, and the reference numerals “1 to 10, 30” are shown on the dividing member DV, and the detection sensor 684 is shown. The detection state is illustrated by the "on, off" sign. Further, in FIG. 76, the detected portion 641c is hatched for easy understanding.

Here, in the description of FIG. 76, each detection sensor 684 is referred to as a detection sensor A, a detection sensor B, ..., Using the symbols "A to F" and "1 to 10, 30" attached in the drawing. , The detection sensor F, and each division member DV is referred to as a first division member DV, a second division member DV, ..., A thirty division member DV, and distinguish between them.

As shown in FIG. 76A, when the rotating member 640 is rotated and the first dividing member DV reaches the phase (rotational position) that can be detected by the detection sensor A, the second dividing member DV to the sixth The dividing member DV is arranged in a phase that can be detected by the detection sensors B to F, respectively.

Therefore, in the detection sensors A, C to F, the light received by the light receiving portion of the light emitted from the light emitting portion is blocked by the detected portion 641c of the first dividing member DV and the third to sixth dividing member DV. While the detection state is turned off, the detection sensor B can receive the light emitted from the light emitting unit by the light receiving unit, and the detection state is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by a unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), the dividing member DV is rotated in the circumferential direction (FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b)). By moving to the left), the dividing member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one). Therefore, in the detection sensors B to E, the detection state is turned off by shading the third to seventh dividing members DV (detected portion 641c), while in the detection sensors A and F, the detection state is turned on. To.

As shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by a unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (b), the dividing member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed ( In the detection sensors A to D and F, the detection state is turned off by shading the third to sixth dividing members DV and the eighth dividing member DV (detected portion 641c), while the detection is detected. In the sensor E, the detection state is turned on.

After that, every time the rotating member 640 is rotated by a unit rotation amount, the dividing member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one), and this is the number of the dividing member DVs (this implementation). When it is repeated only (30 in the form) (that is, the rotating member 640 is rotated once), the state is restored to the state shown in FIG. 76 (a).

In this case, as described above, there are two types of the rotating member 640, one in which the detected portion 641c is formed and the other in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. By connecting these two types of dividing members DV in the circumferential direction, the detected portions 641c are arranged in a predetermined arrangement at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The predetermined arrangement is a combination of the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c (that is, the detection sensor A) even if any of the adjacent 6 dividing member DVs is taken out from the 30 dividing member DVs connected in the circumferential direction. It means an array in which the detection states of ~ F) are all different combinations.

Therefore, by creating a table of such a combination (a table in which the detection states of the detection sensors A to F and the dividing member DV to be detected at the time of detection are associated with each other) in advance and storing the table in the ROM, the detection sensor By referring to the table each time A to F perform detection, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be grasped. That is, it is possible to determine which of the plurality of (30 in this embodiment) dividing member DV is located at the reference position.

Here, the rotating member 640 is provided with a slit continuous in the circumferential direction, the slit is detected by the detection sensor 684, and the number of pulses of the pulsed signal is cumulatively added, based on the cumulatively added number of pulses. , The amount of rotation (phase) of the rotating member 640 from the reference position can also be detected. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a light reception failure of the light receiving portion of the detection sensor 684 or the like, a deviation occurs between the rotation amount of the rotating member 640 and the cumulative addition number of the number of pulses, and the phase of the rotating member 640 is accurate. Can no longer be detected. That is, if a detection failure occurs even once, it affects the subsequent detection result, and each time a detection failure occurs, the influence on the detection result is accumulated.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of detected portions 641c arranged at unequal intervals (predetermined arrangement) along the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 and the plurality of detected portions 641c are moved. Since a plurality of detection sensors 684 (detection sensors A to F) arranged on the locus are provided, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 is detected based on the combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F. be able to. That is, the phase of the rotating member 640 can be detected based only on the current detection result detected by the detection sensors A to F, and the past of the detection sensors A to F can be used to detect the phase of the rotating member 640. Since the detection result of the above is not required, even if a detection failure occurs in the past, it is not affected by the detection failure, and therefore the phase of the rotating member 640 can be accurately detected.

As described above, the interval between the detection sensors A to F is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the dividing members DV (detected portion 641c) in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54).

Therefore, each time the rotating member 640 is rotated by a rotation angle corresponding to the distance between the divided members DV, the combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F can be changed. That is, the phase (rotation position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected with the rotation angle corresponding to the distance between the divided members DV in the first section S1 as the minimum unit. As a result, the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to any of the split member DVs (that is, any pocket of the rotating member 640 that imitates the roulette wheel) among the plurality of split member DVs connected in the circumferential direction. be able to.

Further, in this way, the arrangement interval of the detection sensors A to F is set with reference to the interval of the dividing member DV in the first section S1 (that is, the detection sensors A to F are set in reference to the interval of the dividing member DV in the first section S1). By arranging the detected portion 641c of the above in a detectable position), the space required for arranging the detection sensors A to F is compared with the case where the interval of the dividing member DV in the second section S2 is used as a reference. Can be easily secured and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

In other words, when the detection sensors A to F are arranged at positions where the detected portion 641c of the dividing member DV in the second section S2 can be detected, a space for arranging the detection sensors A to F is secured. Therefore, there is a limitation in narrowing the interval (second interval) between the dividing members DV. On the other hand, since the detection sensors A to F are arranged on the first section S1 side, there is no limitation on the setting of the interval (second interval) of the dividing member DV in the second section S2, and the second interval is such. The interval between 2 can be a narrower interval. As a result, the space required for arranging the rotating member 640 can be suppressed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, two detection results (on / off) based on the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c of the dividing member DV are performed by the six detection sensors 684, respectively, and therefore 64 (= 2 to 6) combinations can be formed.

In this case, since the number of the divided member DVs is 30, it is sufficient to have 5 detection sensors 684 (that is, a combination of 32 (= 2 to the 5th power) can be formed). However, in this case, a state occurs in which all the detection results of the five detection sensors 684 are turned off (not shaded by the detected unit 641c), and therefore, in a predetermined phase (rotational position) corresponding to the state. , The timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 cannot be obtained.

On the other hand, by using the six detection sensors 684 as in the present embodiment, the detection result is off in all the detection sensors 684 of the six detection sensors 684 (a state in which the detection unit 641c does not block light). ) Can be avoided. That is, in at least one detection sensor 684 out of the six detection sensors 684, the detection result can be turned on (shielded by the detected unit 641), so that all phases (rotation) can be set. At the position), the timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 can be obtained.

FIG. 77 is a partially enlarged side view of the rotating member 640 in the first section S1. As shown in FIG. 77, in the first section S1, the display plate 646 of the dividing member DV has the plate portion 646a arranged in a horizontal posture and the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a (FIGS. 57 and 58). The side surface opposite to (see) (left side in FIG. 77) faces the side surface of the plate holding member 645 of the adjacent dividing member DV.

In the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is formed by bending the side surface of the plate portion 646a on the side opposite to the shaft portion 646b in an arc shape (see the enlarged portion in FIG. 77). Therefore, when the plate portion 646a is rotated around the shaft portion 646b and arranged in the horizontal posture, the display plate 646 has a plate holding member 645 of the split member DV adjacent to the side opposite to the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a. As a result, the distance between the side surface of the plate portion 646a opposite to the shaft portion 646b (arc-shaped side surface) and the side surface of the plate holding member 645 can be further narrowed.

As a result, in the first section S1, when the dividing member DV and the adjacent dividing member DV try to relatively displace in the direction of narrowing the interval (first interval) between them, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 Since the side surface is in contact with the side surface of the plate holding member 645, such relative displacement can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detected portions 641c of the divided member DV from being displaced in the direction of narrowing their intervals, and as a result, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy by the detection sensor 684.

On the other hand, in the first section S1, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 ends the connecting link opening 642a in the back side main body 642 of the adjacent dividing member DV (the end on one side in the extension direction, FIG. 73 (a). ) Since it is located on the lower side (see FIG. 73 (a)), when the dividing member DV and the adjacent dividing member DV try to relatively displace in the direction of widening their distance (first distance), The phase displacement can be regulated by abutting the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 with the end of the connecting link opening 642a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detected portions 641c of the divided member DV from being displaced in the direction of widening their intervals, and as a result, the detection accuracy by the detection sensor 684 can be improved.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 83. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the tip of the first passage forming member 520 is always open has been described, but the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment is arranged at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. , A tip wall member 2560 that opens and closes a passage. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 78 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 78 shows a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position.

As shown in FIG. 78, the left swing unit 2500 includes a base member 2510 that discharges a ball to the rear on the right side of the front view of the first wall portion 513, an extension direction of the distribution base member 2521, and an elongated hole 2521d. It is mainly composed of a first passage forming member 2520 whose extension direction is substantially linear, and a tip wall member 2560 that opens and closes the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

The base member 2510 includes a lateral flow passage 2515 extending rearward from the right side of the guide wall portion 513a. Although the outer shape of the introduced cylindrical portion 552 is different from the outer shape of the introduced cylindrical portion 552 in the first embodiment, the technical idea thereof is the same, and thus the description thereof will be omitted in the present embodiment.

The side flow passage 2515 is a passage for discharging the ball that has reached the first wall portion 513 in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position.

The first passage forming member 2520 includes a distribution base member 2521 and a passage cover member 2522. The distribution base member 2521 includes a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 2521a forming one side of the flow passage of the sphere, an elongated hole 2521d extending along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and a gap V1. The second distribution convex portion 2521g which is arranged to face the distribution convex portion 521e on the right side of the front view, and the back side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g on the right side of the front view toward the front side of the hanging plate portion. It is provided with a discharge recess 2521h recessed from the side surface.

The hanging plate portion 2521a has a recessed portion 2521a2 in which a portion of the lower side wall surface facing the passage cover member 2522 (left side in FIG. 78) is cut and recessed at the lower end portion thereof, and a passage cover member at the lower end portion. A shaft support hole 2521a3 formed in a circular shape in a direction facing the passage cover member is provided on the side opposite to the 2522.

The recessed portion 2521a2 is a recessed portion that forms an opening on the lower side surface of the first passage forming member 2520 jointly with the recessed portion 2522b1 of the passage cover member 2522. The tip wall member 2560 passes through the opening formed by the recessed portion 2521a by a rotational operation.

The shaft support hole 2521a3 is a hole in which the main body portion 2561a of the tip wall member 2560 is pivotally supported by a pin member on a rod, and is arranged at a position (coaxial position) corresponding to the shaft support hole 2522a2 of the passage cover member 2522. To.

The second distribution convex portion 2521g is a portion having substantially the same shape as the distribution convex portion 521e, and is a portion that distributes the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 to the left and right. The discharge recess 2521h is arranged with a space equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere between it and the first wall portion 513, reaches the first wall portion 513, and reaches the right side of the front view of the second distribution convex portion 2521g. The sorted balls are introduced from the discharge recess 2521h into the side flow passage 2515, and then discharged out of the game area.

The passage cover member 2522 extends in a plate shape from both ends of the plate-shaped plate-shaped portion 2522a that is covered on the front side of the distribution base member 2521 and the plate-shaped portion 2522a in the lateral direction toward the back side. The upper and lower wall portions 2522b to be formed are mainly provided.

The plate-shaped portion 2522a includes the ball receiving portion 522a1 described above in the first embodiment and the shaft support hole 2522a2 coaxially bored with the shaft support hole 2521a3 of the distribution base member 2521 at the lower tip portion. Be prepared. The shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 are holes that rotatably support the tip wall member 2560.

The upper and lower wall portions 2522b are recessed at a position facing the recessed portion 2521a2, and include a recessed portion 2522b1 that constitutes an opening through which a ball can pass jointly with the recessed portion 2521a2.

The tip wall member 2560 is disposed between the distribution base member 2521 and the passage cover member 2522 at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and rotates into a rod-shaped pin member coaxially with the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2. It mainly includes a main body member 2561 having a substantially Z-shaped front view that is coaxially supported, and a torsion spring 2562 that urges the main body member 2561 clockwise in the front view.

The torsion spring 2562 is configured such that one arm is fixed to the tip of the passage cover member 2522, and the other arm abuts on the locking pin 2561e projecting from the tip wall member 2560 to the back surface side.

The main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. 79 (a) and 79 (d) are front views of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560, and FIG. 79 (b) is a top view of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560, FIG. 79. (C) is a cross-sectional view of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 in the LXXIXc-LXXIXc line of FIG. 79 (b). In FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (d), the shape of the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 79 (a), the first passage forming member 2520 is in the release position ( The state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged is shown in FIG. 79 (d), and the state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged in the connecting position (see FIG. 81) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 has a tubular main body portion 2561a coaxially supported with the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 (see FIG. 78) and a radial direction from the main body portion 2561a. The plate-shaped plate portion 2561b formed in a straight line, the flow-down hole 2561c formed in the thickness direction of the plate portion 2561b with a diameter equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the side opposite to the main body portion 2561a of the plate portion 2561b. A curved wall portion 2561d extending from the end of the main body portion 2561a along an arc centered on the main body portion 2561a, and a locking pin projecting at the tip portion of the curved wall portion 2561d in parallel with the axial direction of the main body portion 2561a. 2561e and a push-in portion 2561f which is a portion arranged on the opposite side of the curved wall portion 2561d with the main body member 2561a as a boundary and is formed in a shape smaller than the opening of the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520. Mainly prepare.

The plate portion 2561b is formed so that the radial length (extension direction length) of the main body portion 2561a is longer than the dimension in the lateral direction (longitudinal direction in FIG. 80) of the opening at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. To. As a result, the rotation stop position of the tip wall member 2560 in the urging direction of the torsion spring 2562 (see FIG. 78) can be set to a position where the plate portion 2561b and the upper side wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b come into contact with each other (FIG. FIG. 79 (d)).

In the released state (see FIG. 79 (d)), the curved wall portion 2561d stops the flow by causing the ball to collide with the contact wall 2561d1 which is arranged to face the ball flowing down the first passage forming member 2520. On the other hand, in the connected state, the ball is allowed to pass by moving below the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball that has passed through the flow-down hole 2561c is arranged on the back side of the contact wall 2561d1. By rolling over 2561d2, it has the role of smoothing the subsequent flow.

Next, the operation of the left swing unit 2500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. 80 to 82 are front views of the left swing unit 2500. In addition, in FIGS. 80 to 82, the cover member 550 is not shown, in FIG. 80, a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position is shown, and in FIG. A state in which the one passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount is shown, and FIG. 82 shows a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at a connecting position. Further, in FIGS. 80 to 82, the first passage forming member 2520 is shown by an outline line at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g is shown.

As shown in FIG. 80, when the first passage forming member 2520 is set to the release position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and reached the first wall portion 513 is on the right side of the front view of the second distribution convex portion 2521 g. The first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise, and the discharge recess 2521h is arranged on the front side of the side flow passage 2515, and stays between the discharge recess 2521h and the first wall portion 513. As a result, the ball can flow down the side flow passage 2515, and the ball is discharged out of the game area. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from being supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 80, the ball introduced into the discharge recess 2521h stays in the discharge recess 2521h until the first passage forming member 2520 rotates, so that the next ball enters the discharge recess 2521h. It can be prevented, and the next sphere can be kept outside the rotation locus of the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521 g (upper side in FIG. 80).

In the ball fastened to the outside of the rotation locus of the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521g (upper side in FIG. 80), the first passage forming member 2520 rotates clockwise in the front view, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g guides the ball. By being arranged along the wall portion on the right side of the wall portion 513a, it is introduced to the left side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g and supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. To. As a result, even if a plurality of balls reach the first wall portion 513 in the state shown in FIG. 80, the balls introduced into the discharge recess 2521h can be kept as one.

As shown in FIG. 80, in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position, the first passage is formed from the base end portion (left end portion in FIG. 80) toward the tip end portion (right end portion in FIG. 80). The member 2520 is configured to be tilted upward. Therefore, even if the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated with the supplied ball remaining between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, the ball reaches the state shown in FIG. 80. Flows toward the base end due to the action of gravity, so that the ball can be prevented from falling from the tip end.

As shown in FIG. 81, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in a state between the release position and the connection position, the ball that has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 has a second distribution convex. Riding on the tip of the part 2521g, the flow is stopped. As a result, when the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged in a state between the release position and the connecting position, the ball is supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. Can be prevented.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined downward toward the tip end portion. Therefore, when the opening of the tip portion is always open, the sphere is brought into the state shown in FIG. 81 with the sphere remaining between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. May fall from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball may be bitten by another unit (rotating unit 600 or the like (see FIG. 5)), causing a malfunction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the tip wall member 2560 is arranged in the opening of the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520, and the curved wall portion 2561d functions as a lid of the opening. Can be reliably prevented from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

As shown in FIG. 82, when the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the connecting position, the ball that has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 is left in front of the second distribution convex portion 2521 g. It is distributed to the direction, moved to the front side through the gap V1 (see FIG. 78), supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, and extends in the extension direction of the first passage forming member 2520. Flow down along.

At the connecting position, the pushing portion 2561f of the tip wall member 2560 and the wall surface of the accommodating recess 422f of the drive side slide member 420 abut (the wall surface of the accommodating recess 422f is arranged on the displacement locus of the pushing portion 2561f), and the tip ends. The curved wall portion 2561d of the wall member 2560 is rotated in the direction of projecting to the outside of the first passage forming member 2520 (counterclockwise in FIG. 82). That is, since the rotation of the tip wall member 2560 is generated by the change in the position of the first passage forming member 2520, the driving force of the tip wall member 2560 can be shared with the driving force of the first passage forming member 2520. As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

At this time, at the connecting position, the tip wall member 2560 is rotated to a posture in which the plate portion 2561b is in a surface position with respect to the upper and lower wall portions 2522b, so that the ball reaching the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is smoothed. The ball can be thrown into the flow-down hole 2561c (without bouncing as in the case where a step is formed between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b and the plate portion 2561b).

The sphere that has passed through the flow-down hole 2561c is guided to the sensor member 422c of the drive-side slide member 420 by rolling the rolling wall 2561d2 of the curved wall portion 2561d. That is, the curved wall portion 2561d has a role of stopping the ball that has reached the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 and a role of guiding the ball sent from the first passage forming member 2520 through the flow-down hole 2561c. Also used for.

At the connecting position (see FIG. 82), the plate portion 2561b is positioned with the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, so that the plate portion 2561b is positioned before reaching the connecting position. It is assumed that the plate portion 2561b has entered the inner side (upper side of FIG. 82) of the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. That is, the ball can pass through the flow-down hole 2561c only after reaching the connecting position (a state in which the ball is stopped by the curved wall portion 2561d is ensured until the connecting position is reached).

As a result, even if the first passage forming member 2520 starts to rotate from the connecting position to the releasing position in a state where the sphere remains inside the first passage forming member 2520, the sphere is at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. It is possible to surely prevent it from falling from. This is maintained even when a plurality of balls are thrown in a row.

A case where a plurality of balls are continuously thrown to the first passage forming member 2520 will be described with reference to FIG. 83. 83 (a) to 83 (c) are partial front views of the left swing unit 2500 and the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. In addition, in FIGS. 83A to 83C, the spherical passages of the first passage forming member 2520 and the second passage forming member 422 are partially cross-sectionally viewed, and in FIG. 83A, the first passage is viewed. The state in which the forming member 2520 is arranged at the connecting position is illustrated, and in FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (b) from the state shown in FIG. 83 (a). In FIG. 83 (c), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (b) from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), and the tip wall member 2560 is rotated and partitioned. The state is illustrated.

Further, in FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (c), a sphere flowing down in a row at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated as an example.

As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the pushing portion 2561f is in contact with the accommodating recess 422f in the connected state, and the recessed portion 2561f1 is provided on the lower side of FIG. 83 (a) starting from the contacted position. The recessed portion 2561f1 is recessed on the shaft support portion 516 side of the arc C21 centered on the shaft support portion 516 (see FIG. 37). Therefore, from FIG. 83 (a), as the first passage forming member 2520 rotates, the tip wall member 2560 starts to rotate due to the urging force of the torsion spring 2562. In FIG. 83 (a), the sphere arranged on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d is referred to as a feed ball P21, and the sphere arranged on the left side is referred to as a residual sphere P22.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the first passage forming member 2520 is about to rotate, the tip wall member 2560 rotates, so that the curved wall portion 2561d enters the inside of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. As a result, the residual sphere P22 is brought into contact with the contact wall 2561d, and the flow of the residual sphere P22 is stopped.

On the other hand, since the feed ball P21 is arranged on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d, the flow is not stopped by the contact wall 2561d, and passes through the flow hole 2561c to the outside of the first passage forming member 2520. It is possible to throw a ball.

In this case, the feed ball P21 may be lifted to the upper end of the curved wall portion 2561d (see FIG. 83B), but the upper wall portions of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b are arranged to face each other in the moving direction of the curved wall portion 2561d. Therefore, the feed ball P21 is pushed by the wall portion thereof, so that the feed ball P21 can be ensured to pass through the flow-down hole 2561c. As a result, the diameter of the opening of the flow hole 2561c can be suppressed to the same level as the diameter of the sphere, and the flow path of the ball flowing down the flow hole 2561c can be stabilized.

As shown in FIG. 83 (c), from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (c), and the curved wall portion 2561d is the drive side slide member 420. Even if the feed ball P21 remains on the curved wall portion 2561d side when moved above the curved wall portion 422f1, the rolling wall 2561d2 functions as a rolling portion of the feed ball P21, and the rolling wall thereof. The feed ball P21 is allowed to flow down while the distance between the lower end portion of 2561d2 and the upper end portion of the curved wall portion 422f1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere (the first passage is formed during the period until the feed sphere P21 partitions the flow down). By stopping the member 2520 at the position shown in FIG. 83 (c) or slowing down the speed near FIG. 83 (c)), it is ensured that the sphere flows down from the first passage forming member 2520 to the second passage forming member 422. can do.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 88. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the third symbol display device 81 is arranged at the center position in the left-right direction of the driven side slide member 430 has been described, but the liquid crystal elevating unit 3400 in the third embodiment displays the third symbol. The device 81 is arranged on the left side of the driven side slide member 3430 in the left-right direction. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

84 to 88 are front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 3400 according to the third embodiment, in which the elevating and lowering operations of the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 3430 are illustrated in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 84 to 88, the left and right members of the cover member 470 are not shown, and the vicinity of the lowering restricting member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 is partially enlarged.

Further, in FIG. 84, immediately after the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 comes into contact with the driven side slide member 3430 is shown, and in FIG. 85, the rack 452 is raised from the state shown in FIG. 84 to raise the drive side slide member 420. And the state in which the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged in the ascending position is shown, and in FIG. 86, the state in which only the driving side slide member 420 is lowered and arranged in the lowered position from the state of FIG. 85 is shown. Then, the driven side slide member 3430 is dropped from the state shown in FIG. 86, and the separation action surface 434b, which is the lower side surface of the hook-shaped portion 434, and the separation inclined portion 417f of the ascending restricting member 417 are brought into contact with each other and the ascending regulating member is brought into contact with each other. A state in which the 417 is rotated by a predetermined amount is shown, and in FIG. 88, a state in which the driven side slide member 3430 is further dropped from the state shown in FIG. 87 and the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged in the lowered position is shown. ..

As illustrated in FIGS. 84 to 88, the liquid crystal elevating unit 3400 includes a base member 410, a drive side slide member 420, a driven side slide member 3430, a drive device 440, a transmission device 450, and a lower front surface. It mainly includes a plate portion 460, a cover member 470, and a solenoid 3480 that is arranged on the front side of the cover member 470 and operates in a manner of preventing the driven side slide member 3430 from falling.

In the base member 410, the lowering regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 are arranged only on the left side portion in the front view, and the arrangement of the right side portion in the front view is omitted.

The driven side slide member 3430 has a third symbol display device 81 at a position eccentric to the left in the front view from the left-right center position, and is formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, and the left-right direction of the main body member 3431. Functional parts 432 arranged at both ends, guide holes 433 that are holes formed in the functional parts 432 in the vertical direction and through which the guide rod 451 is inserted, and lower ends of the functional parts 432 that rise in the left-right outward direction. An inclined hook-shaped portion 434, and a fall prevention portion 435 extending to the back side inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end of the functional portion 432 (the side close to the other guide hole 433). Mainly prepared.

The main body member 3431 includes a locking convex portion 3431a that is projected to the left in the front view at the upper end portion thereof. The locking convex portion 3431a is a portion that is locked to the solenoid 3480 arranged on the front side of the cover member 470 to prevent the cover member from falling. The locking convex portion 3431a is inclined downward as its upper surface toward the tip in the convex direction.

The solenoid 3480 includes a rod member 3481 that can appear and disappear on the right side in the front view, and the lower surface of the rod member 3481 is tilted upward toward the tip in the overhanging direction. The solenoid 3480 is in an immersive state when energized and in an extended state when it is not energized. In the overhanged state, the tip of the rod member 3481 is projected toward the left and right center side from the tip of the locking convex portion 3431a. Consists of.

As shown in FIG. 84, the third symbol display device 81 is arranged closer to the left side in the front view. As a result, while securing the size of the third symbol display device 81, the areas divided into the left and right sides of the third symbol display device 81 are collected in one place (to the right of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. 84). By configuring it as a large area, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the size of the movable member that can be arranged in the vacant area.

Since the third symbol display device 81 is arranged closer to the left side in the front view, the load applied to the rack 452 from the driven side slide member 420 is asymmetrical (the left side is larger). Since the left and right racks 452 are connected by the drive-side slide member 420, the asymmetry of the load on the rack 452 tends to tilt the postures of the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 84, the wiring storage member 423 is arranged at the lower end on the left side in the front view of the second passage forming member 422. At this time, since the center of gravity position G31 of the wiring storage member 423 is arranged to the left from the center position of the drive side slide member 420, the drive side is affected by the weight of the wiring accommodated in the wiring storage member 423 and the wiring storage member 423. The slide member 420 may be loaded and tilted counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

In this way, the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are easily tilted counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are prevented from rattling during the ascending / descending operation. It can be limited to rattling between the state in which the 452 maintains the horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) and the state in which the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are tilted counterclockwise when viewed from the front (drive-side slide). It is possible to prevent the member 420 and the rack 452 from tilting clockwise from the horizontal position.

Therefore, the lowering restricting member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 arranged on the left side in the front view guide the ascending / descending operation of the driving side slide member 420 and the rack 452 while effectively suppressing the inclination of the driving side sliding member 420 and the rack 452. To do. On the other hand, since the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are not tilted to the right side of the front view, it is not necessary to dispose the lowering regulation member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 outside the functional portion 432 on the right side of the front view. Costs (material costs and assembly man-hours) can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 85, when the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged in the raised position, the wiring storage member 423 rises as compared with the state shown in FIG. 84, and its center of gravity position G31 is compared with the state shown in FIG. It is moved to the left in front view.

Therefore, the load in the direction in which the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are tilted counterclockwise when viewed from the front becomes large, and the meshing relationship between the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 may deteriorate.

On the other hand, in the state where the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged in the ascending position, the convex plate 453a is brought into contact with and supported by the descending restricting member 415. As a result, it is possible to prevent the postures of the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 from tilting counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 85, when the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged in the raised position, the locking convex portion 3431 gets over the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the locking convex portion 3431 is placed on the rod member 3481. ..

At this time, the rod member 3481 is pushed in the left-right direction along the inclination of the upper surface of the locking convex portion 3431, so that the locking convex portion 3431 gets over the rod member 3481. As a result, the locking convex portion 3431 can be placed on the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 without conducting electricity to the solenoid 3480.

As shown in FIG. 86, even if the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered while the driven-side slide member 3430 is arranged in the ascending position, the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 keeps the locking convex portion 3431a of the driven-side slide member 3430. By supporting, the driven side slide member 3430 is prevented from moving downward in conjunction with the drive side slide member 420, and the driven side slide member 3430 is maintained in the raised position.

At this time, the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged at a position where the third symbol display device 81 is closer to the left side in the front view from the center position, and the center of gravity is closer to the left side, so that the solenoid 3480 is only on the left side. Also, it is possible to prevent the driven side slide member 3430 from falling.

That is, when the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is in the center in the left-right direction, the driven side slide member 3430 may wobble both clockwise and counterclockwise due to vibration and the like. If the driven side slide member 3430 is tilted clockwise in the front view while the solenoid 3480 is only on the left side, the locking convex portion 3431a may slip off from the rod member 3481.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the position of the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is closer to the left side in the front view, the driven side slide member 3430 is tilted clockwise from the horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) due to vibration or the like. Is suppressed.

Therefore, the locking convex portion 3431a is likely to incline in the direction close to the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the contact between the locking convex portion 3431a and the rod member 3481 is maintained, so that the locking convex portion 3431a is the rod member 3481. It is suppressed from slipping off.

Therefore, the driven side slide member 3430 can be stably maintained in the ascending position without disposing the solenoids 3480 on both the left and right sides of the driven side slide member 3430, so that the number of solenoids 3480 arranged can be reduced. , The operation of the driven side slide member 3430 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 87, when the solenoid 3480 is energized and the rod member 3481 is immersed, the driven side slide member 3430 falls. In the process of dropping the driven side slide member 3430, since the positions of the hook-shaped portion 434 and the lowering regulating member 415 are displaced in the front-rear direction, the hook-shaped portion 434 is caught by the lowering regulating member 415 and causes a malfunction. It can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 87, the hook-shaped portion 434 falls in a state of being in contact with the separated inclined portion 417f of the ascending restricting member 417, whereby the ascending regulating member 417 is rotated outward (counterclockwise in FIG. 87). Release state).

As shown in FIG. 88, when the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged in the descending position, the ascending restricting member 417 is rotated inward (clockwise in FIG. 88), and the engaging claw portion 417e of the ascending restricting member 417 and The hook-shaped portion 434 and the hook-shaped portion 434 are arranged so as to face each other in the vertical direction (engaged state).

As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, since the ascending restricting member 417 is rotated with respect to the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven side slide member 3430, the state changes from the disengaged state to the engaged state, so that there is no change in posture. The load and posture change amount required to change the disengaged state and the engaged state are increased as compared with the case of engaging with (such as when the disengaged state and the engaged state are changed by the elasticity of the member). be able to. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the engaged state in which the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven side slide member 3430 and the ascending regulating member 417 are engaged with each other.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the ascending restricting member 417 is rotated by the fall of the driven side slide member 3430. That is, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive device in order to form the engaged state of the ascending regulating member 417. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the facing wall portion 422f2 projects from the lower end portion of the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 at the downwardly inclined position has been described, but the driving side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment is curved. The facing wall portion 4422f2 arranged to face the wall portion 422f1 is configured as a wall portion on a plane extending in the vertical direction. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 89 (a) is a partial front view of the drive-side slide member 4420 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 89 (b) is a side view of the drive-side slide member 4420 in the direction of the arrow LXXXIXb of FIG. 89 (a). 89 (c) is a partial front view of the drive-side slide member 4420. In FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (c), the drive-side slide member 4420 is cross-sectionally viewed at the center position in the front-rear direction (vertical direction of the paper surface in FIG. 89 (a)) of the connecting member 4424. Further, FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b) show a downward tilted state of the connecting member 4424, and FIG. 89 (c) shows an upward tilted state of the connecting member 4424.

The connecting member 4424 includes an extended claw portion 4424f extending from the lower end portion of the upper side wall portion 424b to the right side in the front view.

The extended claw portion 4424f is arranged to face the curved wall portion 422f1 in an upwardly inclined state, is recessed and curved in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1, and is curved in a front-rear direction (FIG. 89) as shown in FIG. 89 (b). (B) Left-right direction) A pair of recessed portions are provided in the intermediate portion.

The second passage forming member 4422 includes an opposing wall portion 4422f2 that is arranged to face the curved wall portion 422f1. The facing wall portion 4422f2 is a plate portion extending in the vertical direction along the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the recessed portion is arranged so as not to interfere with the extending claw portion 4424f, and the recessed portion is arranged in FIG. 89 (a). In the state, it is extended to a position where it overlaps with the extended claw portion 4424f.

According to the present embodiment, in the downward tilted state shown in FIG. 89 (a), a portion (protrusion portion or the like) that is damaged by the collision of the sphere with the sphere is not arranged, so that the first passage forming member When a ball is thrown from 520 to the connecting member 4424, it is possible to prevent the member from being damaged by colliding with the ball.

Since the extending claw portion 4424f and the facing wall portion 4422f2 guide the ball in the upward tilted state shown in FIG. 89B, it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged in the vicinity of the sensor member 422c.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a game machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the upper end portion (the radial outer portion of the distribution convex portion 521e) of the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is opened has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the cover member that covers the open portion of the upper end of the first passage forming member 520 opens the side to which the sphere is supplied and the side to which the sphere is supplied in the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e. The other side may operate in the form of a lid. In this case, it is possible to prevent foreign matter other than the sphere from being mixed into the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the connecting member 424 comes into contact with the first passage forming member 520 and is rotated has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the arrangement of the connecting member 424 may be omitted. In this case, the product cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts of the members required for connecting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422. Further, instead of the connecting member 424, a rubber-like elastic body having an internal passage may be arranged. In this case, the displacement between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is absorbed by the deformation of the shape of the rubber-like elastic body due to the contact of the first passage forming member 520 with the rubber-like elastic body. be able to.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the drive-side slide member 420 is driven by the single-layer rack 452 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the rack that drives the drive-side slide member 420 is composed of two front and rear layers, the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down by the front rack, and the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down by the rear rack. And may be configurable. In this case, when only one of the two-layer racks is in contact with the driven side slide member 430 in the vertical direction, the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 move up and down in conjunction with each other. It is possible to switch between the case where the drive-side slide member 420 passes through the driven-side slide member 430 and moves up and down independently.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b project outward from the circle formed by the tooth roots of the other gear teeth has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the abutting portion 351b or the receiving portion 354b may be recessed toward the center of the circle formed by the roots of the other gear teeth, and the other may be projected so as to be longer.

In each of the above embodiments, the portion that comes into contact with the contact portion 351b is an adjacent gear tooth 354c having a gear tooth shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a portion having a shape different from the gear tooth shape may be formed, and the portion and the contact portion 351b may be in contact with each other.

In each of the above embodiments, the portion that comes into contact with the contact portion 351b is the receiving portion 354b in which the tooth shape is not formed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a surface that comes into contact with the contact portion 351b may be formed by partially scraping the gear teeth of the portion formed by the tooth shape.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the entire overlapping portion of the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b comes into contact with each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the surface contact area may be reduced by providing a recessed portion recessed toward the rotation axis at an intermediate position between the contact portion 351b or the receiving portion 354b.

In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right ascending control members 417 come into contact with the drive side slide member 420 at the same timing has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the left and right rising restricting members 417 may be brought into contact with the driving side slide member 420. In this case, a left-right asymmetrical load can be applied to the drive-side slide member 420, and the drive-side slide member 420 is tilted even when the center of gravity of the drive-side slide member 420 is closer to either the left or right side (one of the left and right sides). It can be suppressed.

In the second embodiment, the case where the tip wall member 2560 is arranged at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mode in which a blower for blowing wind from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 toward the base end side is arranged, or a mode in which a magnetic force generator is provided at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 to attract a sphere by magnetic force. Alternatively, the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 may be vibrated in the rotational direction. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

In the second embodiment, the case where the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined upward toward the tip side in the released state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an intermediate portion that sinks between the base end portion and the tip end portion of the first passage forming member 2520 may be provided (may be formed in a U shape). In this case, if the sphere remains inside the first passage forming member 2520 in the released state, the sphere can be fastened to the intermediate portion (the position closer to the tip portion than the base end portion), so that the state changes to the communication state. At that time, the period from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 until the ball is thrown can be shortened.

In the third embodiment, the case where the lowering regulation member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 are arranged on one side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lowering regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the base member 410, respectively, and the elastic coefficients of the torsion springs 415d and 417g for urging the descending regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 are set on the left side. There may be a difference between the torsion springs 415d and 417g arranged and the torsion springs 415d and 417g arranged on the right side. At this time, the elasticity of the torsion springs 415d, 417g arranged on the right side of the front view is compared with the torsion springs 415d, 417g arranged on the left side of the front view (the side where the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is closer). It is preferable to reduce the coefficient. In this case, the load that causes the driven side slide member 3430 to change its posture in the counterclockwise direction (the direction in which the driven side slide member 3430 is tilted due to the bias of the center of gravity) by the lowering regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 arranged on the right side is While suppressing, when the attitude of the driven side slide member 3430 changes clockwise due to the sudden vertical movement of the driven side slide member 3430, the attitude change can be suppressed.

In the third embodiment, the case where the driven side slide member 430 is dropped after the drive side slide member 420 is arranged in the lowered position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driven side slide member 430 may be dropped while the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at an intermediate position. In this state, control (control of repeatedly switching between the ascending operation and the descending operation) may be performed in such a manner that the driving side slide member 420 is operated in the direction opposite to the operating direction of the driven side slide member 430. In this case, the drive-side slide member 420 can make the driven-side slide member 430 bounce (repeatedly bounce, etc.).

In each of the above embodiments, the split member DV in which the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621 is connected by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638. Although the case of driving has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the split member DV in which the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the connecting link action groove 621 is inserted on one side. It may be driven by the rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638. In this case, since the distance between the split member DV that applies the driving force and the adjacent split member DV is widened, the adjacent split member DV, the one-side rotation drive member 637, and the other-side rotation drive member 638 Interference can be suppressed, and the diameters of these one-side rotation drive members and the other-side rotation drive member can be increased accordingly. As a result, the drive torque applied to the split member DV (rotation member 640) from the one-side rotation drive member and the other side rotation drive member can be increased.

In each of the above embodiments, the period during which the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV and the engaging portion 638b of the other side rotation driving member 638 are the split members. Although the case where the period of engagement with the driven portion 641 of the DV overlaps (see FIG. 75), the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 or the like or the like. While one of the engaging portions 638b of the side rotation driving member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV, the other is disengaged and the engaging portion of the one-side rotation driving member 637. While the other of the engaging portion 638b of the 637b or the other side rotation driving member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV, one may be disengaged.

In this case, it is possible to prevent the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation driving member 638 from being simultaneously engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV. .. That is, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 or the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation driving member 638 can be alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641. As a result, the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

That is, where a phase shift occurs between the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 due to dimensional tolerances, assembly tolerances, drive tolerances of the drive motor 631, etc., a plurality of split members In the rotary member 640 formed by connecting the DVs in an endless manner, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotary drive member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotary drive member 638 are simultaneously engaged with the split member DV. If a phase shift occurs while engaged with the portion 641, one section of the rotating member 640 in the circumferential direction is in a compressed state and the other section is in a pulled state, so that the displacement of the rotating member 640 is unstable. It becomes.

On the other hand, as described above, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation driving member 638 are alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV. Therefore, even if the phase shift occurs, it is possible to avoid the influence of the phase shift on the rotating member 640. As a result, even if the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting a plurality of divided member DVs in an endless manner, its displacement can be stabilized.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the split member DV is connected in an endless manner in the rotating unit 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the split member DV is connected in an endless manner (from one end to the other end). Of course, it is possible to connect the split member DV and not connect one end and the other end). In this case, for example, the split member DV connected in an endped manner may be displaced (moved) along the endless orbit in each of the above embodiments, or may be present along the endd orbit. The split member DV connected in an end shape may be reciprocally displaced (reciprocated).

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<About the concept of the invention as an example of a structure in which the rotation of the second gear 352 is regulated by the locking arc portion 351c>
The transmission in a gaming machine including a driving means, a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means, and a displacement member that is displaced between an ascending position and a descending position by the driving force transmitted by the transmitting member. The member includes a first gear and a second gear that is meshed with the first gear and is arranged on the displacement member side of the driving force transmission path with respect to the first gear. The gear includes an abutting portion formed in a part of the tooth profile, and in a state where the displacement member is arranged at an elevated position, a predetermined tooth of the second gear is attached to the abutting portion of the first gear. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the rotation of the second gear in the downward direction of the displacement member is restricted by being brought into contact with the gear.

Here, a game machine including a driving means, a transmission member for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and a displacement member displaced between an ascending position and a descending position by the driving force transmitted by the transmitting member. Are known. For example, the transmission member is formed by a rack and pinion mechanism, the rotation of the pinion driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the displacement member is moved up and down between the descending position and the ascending position by the linear motion of the rack. (Patent Document 1: For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-80941). In this case, when the driving force of the driving means is released while the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position, the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. Therefore, it is necessary to continuously apply the driving force of the driving means, and there is a problem that the energy consumption when holding the displacement member in the raised position increases. On the other hand, by providing a crank mechanism as a part of the driving means and utilizing the dead center of the crank mechanism, the displacement member is prevented from being lowered from the ascending position by its own weight even if the driving force of the driving means is released. A structure is also known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-140602), but in this case, there is a problem that the entire transmission member becomes large due to the presence of the crank mechanism.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the first gear includes a contact portion formed in a part of the tooth profile thereof, and when the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, the first gear contacts the first gear. When the predetermined teeth of the second gear are brought into contact with the portion, the rotation of the second gear in the descending direction of the displacement member is restricted, so that the displacement member is still present even if the driving force of the driving means is released. It is possible to suppress the descent by its own weight. Therefore, the energy consumption when the displacement member is held in the raised position can be suppressed. Further, since the structure for holding the displacement member in the raised position can be formed by the first gear and the second gear, and the crank mechanism does not need to be separately provided, the transmission member can be downsized. it can.

In the game machine A1, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed in a part of the tooth profile thereof, and in a state where the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, the second gear is in contact with the first gear. The gaming machine A2, characterized in that the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises is restricted by abutting the receiving portion of the two gears.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, when the receiving part of the second gear comes into contact with the contact part of the first gear, the displacement member rotates in the rising direction of the second gear. Is regulated, that is, when the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position, the rotation of the second gear is regulated in both forward and reverse directions, so that the displacement member held in the ascending position rattles. Can be suppressed.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that, in a state where the displacement member is arranged in an ascending position, rotation of the first gear in a direction in which the displacement member is lowered is allowed.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1 or A2, in the state where the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position, the rotation of the first gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is allowed. It is not necessary to separately perform an operation for releasing the contact between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear, and the first gear is rotated by the driving force of the driving means to move to the ascending position. The held displacement member can be lowered. That is, the rotation of the second gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is restricted, while the rotation of the first gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is allowed. Therefore, when the displacement member tries to descend from the ascending position by its own weight, the predetermined teeth of the second gear come into contact with the contact portion of the first gear, thereby restricting the rotation of the second gear and restricting the rotation of the displacement member. Can be held in the ascending position. On the other hand, when the first gear is rotated, the second gear is rotated along with the rotation, and the displacement member can be lowered.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear is formed so as to be meshable with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in a direction for raising the displacement member. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the tooth depth is lower than the teeth of the first gear and the predetermined teeth of the second gear can come into contact with the tooth tip surface thereof.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear meshes with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in the direction of raising the displacement member. It is possible to form the gear, and the tooth depth is lower than that of the first gear so that the predetermined tooth of the second gear can come into contact with the tooth tip surface of the first gear. Therefore, the first gear is raised in the direction of raising the displacement member. Is rotated, and when the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position, the second gear can be rotated in the direction of ascending the displacement member through the contact portion and the tooth engagement of the predetermined teeth. As a result, a state in which the predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the contact portion of the first gear (a state in which the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear). It can be formed reliably.

A5 of the game machine A4, wherein the contact portion of the first gear has a tooth thickness larger than that of the teeth of the first gear.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the contact portion of the first gear has a larger tooth thickness than the teeth of the first gear, so that the predetermined teeth of the second gear come into contact with each other. A possible area can be secured. Therefore, the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear in the state where the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position can be relaxed (the allowable amount can be increased). As a result, it is possible to reliably form a state in which the predetermined teeth of the second gear can come into contact with the contact portion of the first gear.

Further, the contact portion of the first gear is a portion that receives a predetermined tooth of the second gear and regulates the rotation of the second gear (that is, supports the weight of the displacement member), and the tooth thickness is Since it is enlarged, strength can be secured.

In the game machine A4 or A5, the contact portion of the first gear is formed by bending the tooth tip surface into an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the first gear. ..

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4 or A5, the contact portion of the first gear is formed with its tooth tip surface curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation center of the first gear. Therefore, the strength of the first gear can be improved while allowing the first gear to rotate until the predetermined teeth of the second gear can come into contact with the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear. Can be planned.

Further, when the second gear is rotated in the direction of lowering the displacement member and the predetermined teeth of the second gear are brought into contact with the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear, the predetermined of the second gear is specified. The direction of the force acting on the contact portion of the first gear from the tooth is set to the direction toward the rotation axis of the first gear, and it is possible to easily suppress the rotation of the first gear. As a result, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends can be easily regulated, and even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the displacement member can be reliably suppressed from being descended by its own weight.

In the game machine A6, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed in a part of the tooth profile thereof.
In the state where the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position, the contact portion of the first gear comes into contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, so that the first displacement member in the ascending direction. A game machine A7 characterized in that the rotation of gears is regulated.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, the second gear is provided with a receiving portion formed in a part of the tooth profile thereof, and the first gear is in a state where the displacement member is arranged in the raised position. Since the contact portion of the gear is brought into contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises is restricted, so that the receiving portion of the second gear is replaced with the displacement member. It can function as a stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after being placed in the raised position.

In the game machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear has a concave portion on the side facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the second gear, and the arc of the contact portion of the first gear. A game machine A8 characterized in that it is formed by being curved in an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to that of the shape.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear is concave on the side facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the second gear, and the first Since it is formed by being curved in an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to the arc shape of the contact portion of the gear, when the contact portion of the first gear is in contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, both surfaces are surfaced. The contact portion of the first gear can be abutted by hitting, and the contact portion of the first gear can be firmly received by the receiving portion of the second gear. As a result, the receiving portion of the second gear can be reliably exerted its function as a stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after the displacement member is arranged in the raised position.

Further, since the receiving portion of the second gear is curved in an arc shape that is concave toward the rotation axis of the second gear, the tooth height on both sides in the tooth thickness direction can be increased, and the strength of the receiving portion can be increased. Can be enhanced. As a result, damage to the receiving portion of the second gear when receiving the contact portion of the first gear can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines A4 to A8, when the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, the engagement between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear is released, and The gaming machine A9, wherein the displacement member is located at the end of a movable range in the ascending direction.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A4 to A8, in the state where the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear Since the meshing of the displacement member is released and the displacement member is located at the end of the movable range in the ascending direction, the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position by the rotation of the first gear in the direction of raising the displacement member. Later, while stopping the second gear, only the first gear can be rotated in the direction in which the displacement member rises. As a result, a predetermined tooth of the second gear can come into contact with the contact portion of the first gear (a state in which the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear). Can be reliably formed.

<About the concept of the invention in which the structure connecting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is an example>
The first passage member and the second passage member formed so that the sphere can pass through are provided, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other. A communication state in which a ball can be thrown from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member. In a game machine capable of forming a separated state in which is non-communication, the first passage member or the first passage member or the first passage member is displaceably arranged at one end of one end of the first passage member or the second passage member. 2. The gaming machine B1 is provided with a connecting member that communicates between the first passage member and one end of the second passage member in a state of being displaced by being in contact with the other of the two passage members.

Here, the first passage member and the second passage member formed so that the sphere can pass through are provided, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other. A communication state in which a ball can be thrown from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member so that the first passage member and the second passage member are not. There is known a game machine capable of forming a separated state that is considered to be communicative (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-171636). In this case, it is inevitable that the stop position when the first passage member is displaced and the arrangement position of the second passage member vary due to the dimensional tolerance and the assembly tolerance of each part. Therefore, in the communicating state, the positions of one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are displaced from each other, which makes it difficult to stably throw the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. was there.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, it is disposed at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and is displaced by being in contact with the other of the first passage member or the second passage member. In the case, since the connecting member for communicating between the one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member is provided, even if the positions of the ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are displaced, one end of each is provided. The displacement can be absorbed by the displacement of the connecting portion between the two. Thereby, the throwing of the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized. Further, as the first passage member is displaced, the first passage member abuts on the connecting member to displace the connecting member, so that the driving force for displaceing the first passage member can also be used and the connecting member is displaced. It is not necessary to separately provide a driving force for causing the displacement.

In the game machine B1, the connecting member includes one side wall portion and the other side wall portion that are arranged so as to face each other with an opening at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member. When it is located on the displacement locus of the first passage member, the first passage member is displaced, and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connecting member. 2. The gaming machine B2, wherein the connecting member is displaced so that the other side wall portion of the connecting member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, when the first passage member is displaced and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connecting member. Since the connecting member is displaced and the other side wall portion of the connecting member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member, the one side wall portion and the other side wall portion of the connecting member are placed in the communicating state. , The first passage member and the second passage member can be brought closer to one end, and the misalignment between one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member can be easily absorbed. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the communication state is formed by rotating the first passage member with one end thereof as the rotation tip side, and the connecting member is a rotation shaft parallel to the rotation axis of the first passage member. When the first passage member is rotated and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connecting member, the connecting member is rotated and said. The gaming machine B3, wherein the other side wall portion of the connecting member is close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, a communication state is formed by rotating the first passage member with one end thereof as the rotation tip side, and the connecting member is the first passage. Since the rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the member is provided, the displacement (rotation) of the connecting member due to the displacement (rotation) of the first passage member can be smoothly performed. Further, by utilizing the rotational motion of both, the other side wall portion of the connecting member can be brought closer to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

In the game machine B2 or B3, in the communication state, one of the facing surfaces of the one side wall portion and the other side wall portion has a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. The gaming machine B4 is a rolling surface when a ball is thrown, and in the communicating state, one of the facing surfaces is downwardly inclined from the first passage member to the second passage member.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2 or B3, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the ball at the communicating portion between the first passage member and one end of the second passage member. That is, since the communicating portion between the one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member is a portion where the positional deviation becomes large, where the ball throwing becomes unstable, a rolling surface of the ball is formed in the communicating portion. Since one of the facing surfaces is inclined downward from the first passage member to the second passage member, the ball can be rolled and the thrown ball can be stabilized.

In any of the game machines B1 to B4, in the communicating state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be thrown from one end of the first passage member, and in the released state, in the first passage member. The gaming machine B5 is provided with a ball throwing regulating means for restricting the ball from being thrown from one end of the first passage member.

Here, in the released state, one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member are not communicated. Therefore, in such a state, for some reason, the first When a ball is supplied to the passage member, the ball that has passed through the first passage member may fall out of the game area. Further, even if the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the communicating state, if the ball stays in the first passage member for some reason and shifts to the released state in that state, the first passage member There is a risk that the ball that stayed in the game will fall into the game area. If the ball falls out of the game area, it may hinder the movement of movable members such as gears and crank mechanisms, and the ball may be pinched, resulting in damage to the movable members.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B4, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be thrown from one end of the first passage member in the communicating state. In addition, in the released state, a ball throwing regulating means for restricting the ball in the first passage member from being thrown from one end of the first passage member is provided. Therefore, for example, when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, Even when the ball stays in the first passage member and shifts from the communication state to the release state, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.

In the game machine B5, a cover body is provided at one end of the first passage member, which allows the passage of a ball in the communicating state and restricts the passage of the ball in the released state, and the cover body regulates the throwing of the ball. A game machine B6 characterized by forming means.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, one end of the first passage member is covered as a ball throwing regulation means that allows the ball to pass in the communicating state and regulates the ball in the released state. Since the body is arranged, for example, even when a ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the ball stays in the first passage member and shifts from the communication state to the released state, the first passage It is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the member.

In the game machine B5, the urging member that applies an urging force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position that restricts the passage of the ball and acts on the cover body with the displacement of the first passage member. The gaming machine B7 is characterized by comprising, at least, an action member that displaces the cover body in a direction that allows the ball to pass through when the communication state is formed.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, an urging member that applies urging force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position that restricts the passage of the ball is provided, so that the cover body is covered in the released state. It is possible to prevent the body from being inadvertently displaced, and as a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. On the other hand, when the communication state is formed, the cover body is displaced in a direction that allows the ball to pass through, so that the ball can be thrown from the first passage member to the second passage member.

In this case, the displacement of the cover body in the direction allowing the passage of the sphere is performed along with the displacement of the first passage member by the action of the acting member. It can also be used as a driving means for the displacement, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The working member is located on the displacement locus of the cover body due to the displacement of the first passage member, and abuts on the cover body displaced along the displacement locus to resist the urging force of the urging member. A driving force that displaces the cover body in a direction that allows the ball to pass through (for example, a second passage member, a connecting member, a member fixed to the game board, etc.) or a driving means that displaces the first passage member. Is transmitted to the cover body, and the cover body is also displaced together with the displacement of the first passage member (for example, a gear or a rack pinion that converts the driving means and the driving force into rotary motion or linear motion and transmits the force to the cover body, etc. ) Is illustrated.

The game machine B8 is characterized in that, in the game machine B5, the ball throwing regulating means arranges the first passage member in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is at the uppermost position in the released state.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the throwing regulating means arranges the first passage member in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is at the top in the released state. Even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the ball stays in the first passage member and shifts from the communication state to the released state, the ball moves out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. It can be suppressed from falling.

It should be noted that the first passage member arranged in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is at the uppermost position in the released state does not need to have the entire first passage member ascending and inclined, and the first passage member of the first passage member. There may be a region that is horizontal or has a downward slope.

In the game machine B5, the ball throwing regulating means is arranged in a posture in which the first passage member is inclined upward from the other end to one end of the first passage member in the released state. Game machine B9.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the ball throwing regulating means arranges the first passage member in a posture of ascending and tilting from the other end to one end of the first passage member in the released state. Therefore, for example, even when a ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the ball stays in the first passage member and shifts from the communication state to the released state, the ball is transmitted from one end of the first passage member. Can be easily suppressed from falling out of the game area.

Further, when the communication state is formed, the entire first passage member can be formed in a downwardly inclined state from the other end toward one end, so that the ball can be easily thrown from the first passage member to the second passage member. , It is possible to prevent the ball from staying in the middle. Therefore, when the release state is entered, it is possible to prevent the ball remaining in the first passage member from falling into the game area.

In any of the game machines B1 to B9, a case body having an upstream passage and a downstream passage formed so that the ball can pass through, and a one-sided position for distributing the ball flowing down from the upstream passage to the first passage and The case body is formed with both sides in the displacement direction of the distribution member open so as to include a distribution member that displaces a ball flowing down from the upstream passage between other side positions that distribute the ball to the downstream passage. A game machine B10 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B9, the case body is formed so that both sides in the displacement direction of the distribution member are open, so that the case body can be moved to one side position or the other side position. Even when a sphere flows down between the distribution member and the case body that are displaced toward the direction, it is possible to prevent the flowing sphere from being sandwiched between the distribution member and the case body.

In the game machine B10, the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and when the communication state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member, the distribution member is arranged at the one side position. The gaming machine B11 is characterized in that when the released state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member, the distribution member is arranged at the other side position.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effect of the game machine B10, a distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and the displacement member is arranged at one side position and the other side position according to the displacement of the first passage member. Therefore, the driving means for displacing the first passage member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the distribution member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Here, in the structure in which the distribution member is displaced independently of the first passage member, for example, when the displacement state of the distribution member and the first passage member is deviated due to the occurrence of control failure, the release state is released. The ball is distributed to the first aisle member (that is, the distribution member is arranged at one side position), and the ball may fall out of the game area from one end of the first aisle member. On the other hand, in the game machine B10, since the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, the displacement states of the distribution member and the first passage member can always be synchronized. Therefore, even if a control failure occurs, it is possible to prevent the ball from being distributed to the first passage member in the released state (that is, when the released state is formed, the distribution member is always in the other side position. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.

In the game machine B11, the first passage member includes a wall portion for partitioning a passage through which a ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member is used as the distribution member.

According to the game machine B12, in addition to the effect of the game machine B11, the first passage member includes a wall portion for partitioning the passage through which the ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member is used as a distribution member. , Parts can be standardized to reduce the cost of parts. Further, by using the wall portion that divides the passage through which the spheres pass as a distribution member, the distributed spheres can be surely flowed down into the passage.

<About the concept of the invention as an example of a structure that regulates the bounce of the driven side slide member 430>
A guide member extending in the vertical direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and capable of being displaced along the guide member, and the displacement member are supported at the descending position. A support member and an elevating member formed so as to be able to elevate along the guide member are provided, and the displacement member is raised from the descending position to the ascending position by being pushed up by the elevating member as the elevating member rises. At the same time, in a gaming machine in which the displacement member is lowered from the ascending position to the lowering position by its own weight as the elevating member is lowered, when the displacement member is lowered to the lowering position, the displacement member is moved in the ascending direction. A game machine C1 characterized by including a rise regulating member that regulates displacement.

Here, a guide member extending in the vertical direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and capable of being displaced along the guide member between the ascending position and the descending position, and the displacement member being supported at the descending position. The support member and the elevating member formed so as to be able to elevate along the guide member are provided, and the displacement member is raised from the descending position to the ascending position by being pushed up by the elevating member as the elevating member rises. There is known a gaming machine in which a displacement member is lowered from an ascending position to a descending position by its own weight as the elevating member is lowered (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-233494). In this case, the displacement member lowered by its own weight along the guide member is maintained in the lowered position by being placed on the support member and supported by the support member. However, since the displacement member is mounted on the support member and can be displaced in the ascending direction along the guide member, rattling is likely to occur due to disturbance, and the posture of the displacement member in the descending position. There was a problem that it was unstable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, since the ascending regulating member that regulates the displacement of the displacement member in the ascending direction when the displacement member is lowered to the descending position is provided, the displacement member is along the guide member at the descending position. Displacement in the ascending direction can be regulated, and rattling caused by disturbance can be suppressed. As a result, the posture of the displacement member in the descending position can be stabilized.

The game machine C1 includes an urging means for urging the ascending restricting member in a direction close to the displacement member, and the displacement member comes into contact with the ascending restricting member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. A separating action portion that displaces the ascending restricting member in a direction away from the displacement member, and the ascending restricting member that allows the ascending restricting member to be displaced in a direction closer to the displacement member at the descending position. A gaming machine C2 comprising an engaging portion to be engaged.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the displacement member includes a separation action portion that displaces the ascending regulating member in a direction away from the displacement member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight, and a lowering position. Since it is provided with an engaging portion that engages with the ascending restricting member, the restricting state by the ascending regulating member can be formed only by the operation of lowering the displacement member to the descending position by its own weight, and the restricting state by the ascending regulating member is formed. It is not necessary to separately provide a drive source for this purpose. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, the engagement between the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion is performed after allowing the ascending restricting member to be displaced in the direction closer to the displacement member, so that the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion are engaged accordingly. The force required to disengage and the displacement of the rise restricting member can be increased. As a result, even when a disturbance is input, it is possible to easily maintain the engagement between the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion.

In the game machine C2, the game machine C3 is characterized in that the disengagement between the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the elevating member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the disengagement between the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the elevating member, so that the displacement member is disturbed. Even when is input and tries to rattle, it is possible to prevent the engagement portion between the ascending restricting member and the displacement member from being inadvertently disengaged.

Further, since the engagement between the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is released by raising the elevating member, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive source for disengaging the ascending / descending member. The drive source for raising and lowering the member can also be used as the drive source for disengaging the engaging portion between the ascending regulating member and the displacement member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. ..

Further, when a drive source for disengaging the engagement portion between the ascending restricting member and the displacement member is separately provided, for example, due to the occurrence of poor control, the engaging portion between the ascending restricting member and the displacement member There is a risk that the elevating member will rise and push up the displacement member in a state where the engagement of the member is not disengaged. Since it can be performed according to the operation of pushing up the displacement member with the elevating member as the elevating member rises, when the displacement member is pushed up by the elevating member, the engagement portion between the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is engaged. Can form a state in which is surely released.

In the game machine C3, when the elevating member is lifted, the elevating member comes into contact with the ascending regulating member and displaces the ascending regulating member so that the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member are engaged with each other. The gaming machine C4 comprising a disengaging action portion for disengaging the engagement.

Here, the engagement between the ascending restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member can be disengaged by the pushing force when pushing up the displacement member as the elevating member moves up and down. In this case, the pushing force is used. It is necessary to make the engagement state to the extent that it can be disengaged, which makes strong engagement difficult. Further, in this case, when the engagement is released, vibration is generated due to the reaction, and the posture of the displacement member becomes unstable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, the elevating member abuts on the ascending regulating member and displaces the ascending regulating member when the elevating member is ascended. Since it is provided with a releasing action portion that disengages the engaging portion between the member and the displacement member, the disengagement is reliably performed even when the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member are firmly engaged. be able to. In other words, since a strong engaging state can be formed, rattling of the displacement member due to disturbance can be suppressed, and the posture of the displacement member in the descending position can be stabilized. Further, the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized by suppressing the vibration due to the reaction when the engagement is released.

In the game machine C3 or C4, the ascending restricting member is attached to the elevating member that elevates and elevates the displacement member between the descending position and the ascending position in a state where the displacement member is disengaged from the engaging portion. A game machine C5 characterized by being brought into contact with each other.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3 or C4, the ascending restricting member moves the displacement member between the descending position and the ascending position when the engagement portion of the displacement member is disengaged. Since it comes into contact with the elevating member for elevating and lowering, it functions as a guide guide and can suppress rattling when the elevating member is moved up and down. As a result, the posture of the displacement member that moves up and down with the lifting member can be stabilized.

In the game machine C5, the lift restricting member that comes into contact with the lift member is urged by the urging means in a direction close to the lift member.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of the game machine C5, the ascending regulating member abutting on the elevating member is urged by the urging means in the direction close to the elevating member, so that the elevating member is urged in a certain direction. It can be urged to stabilize its posture. Further, the rattling of the elevating member can be suppressed by the elastic buffering action of the urging means.

In the game machine C6, a driving means, a pinion rotationally driven by the driving means, and a rack to which the pinions are meshed are provided, and the rack is arranged on the elevating member, and the elevating member is the elevating member. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the rack is urged by the urging means in a direction away from the pinion via an ascending restricting member.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, the rotary motion of the pinion rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the elevating member is moved up and down along the guide member by the linear motion. To. In this case, since the elevating member is urged in the direction in which the rack is separated from the pinion via the ascending regulating member, the distance between the rack and the tooth surface of the pinion can be stabilized. That is, when the elevating member rattles in the direction in which the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion is narrowed, the urging force of the urging means acts in the direction in which the distance is widened, while the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion is widened. When the elevating member rattles, it can be regulated by the guide structure by the guide member that the interval spreads beyond a certain level. Therefore, the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion becomes narrow, and it is possible to prevent the tooth engagement resistance from becoming excessive.

A gaming machine C8, wherein any of the gaming machines C1 to C7 includes a lowering regulating member that regulates the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction when the elevating member pushes the displacement member up to the ascending position.

According to the game machine C8, in any of the game machines C1 to C7, when the elevating member pushes up the displacement member to the ascending position, the elevating member is provided with a lowering regulating member that regulates the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction. The provided displacement member and elevating member can be supported by the descent restricting member. As a result, the driving force for holding the displacement member in the ascending position can be unnecessary, so that the energy consumption of the driving means for driving the elevating member can be suppressed.

Further, since the regulation by the lowering regulation member is performed by raising the elevating member, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive source for forming the regulation by the lowering regulation member, and the drive source for raising and lowering the elevating member is not required. Can also be used as a drive source for forming the regulation by the descending regulation member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the game machine C8, the game machine C9 is characterized in that the restriction by the lowering regulation member is released by lowering the lowering member.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of the game machine C8, the release of the regulation by the lowering regulation member is performed by lowering the elevating member, so that it is necessary to separately provide a drive source for releasing the regulation. Therefore, the drive source for raising and lowering the elevating member can also be used as the drive source for releasing the regulation of the descent restricting member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when a drive source for releasing the regulation by the lowering regulation member is separately provided, for example, the elevating member is lowered and driven in a state where the regulation by the lowering regulation member is not released due to the occurrence of control failure. Where there is a risk of overload acting on the source or damage to the descent restricting member, etc., according to the game machine C9, the regulation by the descent restricting member can be released in accordance with the descent operation of the elevating member. When lowering the elevating member, it is possible to form a state in which the regulation by the lowering regulating member is surely released.

If the lowering regulating member is not an elevating member but a structure that regulates the displacement of the displacement member in the descending direction, the structure in which the regulation is released by the lowering regulating member as the elevating member descends is complicated. However, according to the gaming machines C8 and C9, since the descent regulating member has a structure that regulates the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction, the release of the regulation by the descent regulating member is accompanied by the descent of the elevating member. The structure to be performed can be simplified.

In the game machine C8 or C9, in a state where the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction is restricted by the descending regulating member, the ascending regulating member is brought into contact with the elevating member, and the descending regulating member is attached to the elevating member. The gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the abutting direction and the direction in which the ascending regulating member is abutted on the elevating member are different directions.

According to the game machine C10, in the game machine C8 or C9, the direction in which the lowering regulating member is in contact with the elevating member and the direction in which the ascending regulating member is in contact with the elevating member are different directions. The regulating member and the ascending regulating member can suppress the rattling of the elevating member in different directions. As a result, the posture of the elevating member can be effectively stabilized.

In the game machine C10, a driving means, a pinion rotationally driven by the driving means, and a rack to which the pinions are meshed are provided, and the rack is arranged on the elevating member, and the lowering regulating member is The gaming machine C11 is characterized in that it comes into contact with the elevating member from a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.

According to the game machine C11, the rotational motion of the pinion rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the elevating member is moved up and down along the guide member by the linear motion. In this case, the rack (elevating member) can be displaced in the direction parallel to the tooth surface with respect to the pinion, and the lowering restricting member is brought into contact with the elevating member from the direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack. Therefore, it is possible to regulate that the rack (elevating member) is displaced with respect to the pinion in the direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.

In any of the game machines C1 to C11, when the displacement member is arranged in the descending position, the ascending restricting member and the supporting member can come into contact with the displacement member from one side and the other side sandwiching the guide member. A game machine C12, which is characterized in that it is arranged in each of the above.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C11, when the displacement member is arranged in the descending position, the ascending restricting member and the supporting member sandwich the guide member on one side and the other side. Since they are arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the displacement members from the ground, rattling in either direction of the displacement member with respect to the guide member is regulated by the contact of the ascending regulating member or the supporting member. it can. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the displacement member arranged at the descending position from rattling due to the disturbance.

In any of the game machines C1 to C12, when the displacement member is arranged in the descending position, the support member and the ascending restricting member come into contact with the displacement member while changing their positions along the extending direction of the guide member. The gaming machine C13 is characterized in that the support member is arranged so as to be possible and the support member is arranged above the ascending restricting member.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C11, when the displacement member is arranged in the descending position, the support member and the ascending regulating member are positioned along the extending direction of the guide member. Since the displacement members are arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the displacement members, the rattling of the displacement members in the oblique direction can be regulated by the contact with the ascending regulating member and the supporting member. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the displacement member arranged at the descending position from rattling due to the disturbance.

Further, since the support member is arranged above the ascending regulating member, the supporting member does not hinder the elevating and lowering of the elevating member, and a space for the elevating member to ascend and descend can be secured. Therefore, the degree of freedom in design can be ensured.

<About the concept of the invention in which the structure in which the detected portion 641 of the rotating member 640 is detected by the detection sensor 684 is an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a movable member formed movably and a detecting means for detecting a moving position of the moving member, the detecting means is arranged on the moving member at unequal intervals along the direction of movement. The gaming machine D1 is characterized by including a plurality of detected portions provided and a plurality of detection sensors arranged on the movement locus of the detected portions.

Here, a gaming machine including a moving member rotatably formed and a detecting means for detecting a rotational position of the moving member is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-46667). According to this gaming machine, the detecting means includes a plurality of slits formed at equal intervals on the outer periphery of the moving member, and a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion arranged to face each other with the slits interposed therebetween, and the light receiving portion receives light. The number of pulses of the pulsed signal is cumulatively added, and the amount of rotation (that is, the rotation position) of the moving member from the reference position is detected based on the cumulatively added number of pulses. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a light reception failure of the light receiving portion or the like, the rotation position of the moving member and the cumulative addition number are deviated, and the rotation position of the moving member cannot be accurately detected. There was a problem. That is, when a detection failure occurs, the subsequent detection result is affected, and each time a detection failure occurs, the influence on the detection result is accumulated.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the detection means is arranged on a plurality of detected portions arranged on the moving member at unequal intervals along the direction of movement, and on the movement locus of the detected portions. Since the plurality of detection sensors provided are provided, the moving position of the moving member can be detected based on the combination of the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors. That is, the moving position of the moving member can be detected based only on the current detection results detected by the plurality of detection sensors, and the past detection result of the detection sensor is required to detect the moving position of the moving member. Therefore, the moving position of the moving member can be accurately detected.

In the game machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the moving direction, and the detected portion is among the plurality of divided members. It is characterized in that the plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the divided members, which are arranged in a part of the divided members and not in the remaining divided members. Game machine D2.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the moving direction to be detected. Is arranged on a part of the divided members and not on the remaining divided members, and the plurality of detection sensors are arranged based on the arrangement interval of the divided members. Therefore, each time the moving member is displaced by the amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the divided members, the combination of the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors can be changed. That is, the moving position of the moving member can be detected with the moving amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the dividing member as the minimum unit.

When a plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the dividing members, the plurality of detection sensors are arranged at positions corresponding to any of the plurality of dividing members. Means that. That is, it means that each of the plurality of detection sensors is arranged at a position where the presence / absence of the detected portion of the corresponding dividing member can be detected.

In the game machine D2, the moving member has a first section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected at a first interval, and a second section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a narrower interval than the first interval. A second section connected to the first section is formed, and the plurality of detection sensors have an interval based on the arrangement interval of the dividing members in the first section, and the movement locus of the detected portion in the first section. A game machine D3 characterized by being arranged on the top.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the moving member includes a first section in which a plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a plurality of divided members are more than the first interval. Since the second section connected at the second interval, which is a narrow interval, is formed, the length of the moving member can be shortened as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed.

In this case, since the plurality of detection sensors are arranged on the movement locus of the detected portion in the first section at intervals based on the arrangement interval (first interval) of the dividing members in the first section, It is possible to easily secure the space required for arranging the detection sensor. In other words, when setting the arrangement interval (second interval) of the dividing members in the second section, it is not necessary to consider the space for the arrangement of the detection sensor, and therefore, the second interval is set more. Can be set at narrow intervals. As a result, the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed from this point as well.

In the game machine D3, the split member includes a main body member on which the detected member is arranged, and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to each of the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member. By displacement of the link member with respect to the main body portion of the main body member and the adjacent split member, the distance between the split member and the adjacent split member is increased or decreased, and the link member is displaced in the first section. The gaming machine D4, characterized in that it reaches the end and is restricted from being displaced in a direction in which the split member is displaced in a direction to widen the distance from the adjacent split member.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, both ends of the split member can be displaced to each of the main body member on which the detected member is arranged and the main body member of the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member. By providing a link member connected to the main body member and the link member being displaced with respect to the main body portion of the main body member and the adjacent split member, the distance between the split member and the adjacent split member is increased or decreased. And the structure for forming the second section can be simplified.

In this case, in the first section, since the link member reaches the displacement end and the dividing member is restricted from being displaced in the direction of widening the distance from the adjacent dividing member, the detection is performed in the direction of widening the distance. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the position of the portion. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

The game machine D4 includes a base member in which the split member is displaceably arranged, and the base member guides the main body guide portion and the link member that guide the main body member when the split member is displaced. The link guide portion acts on the link member when the main body member is guided by the main body guide portion of the base member and is displaced, and the link guide portion is adjacent to the main body member. The gaming machine D5, characterized in that the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member of the dividing member is changed.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the base member includes a main body guide portion for guiding the main body member and a link guide portion for guiding the link member when the split member is displaced, and links. When the main body member is guided by the main body guide portion of the base member and displaced, the guide portion acts on the link member to change the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent split member. The distance between the divided members can be increased or decreased as the posture of the link member changes. That is, the first section and the second section can be formed by increasing or decreasing the distance between the dividing members while moving the moving member.

In the game machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guide portion of the base member, and the guided portion of the link member is slidably inserted through the link guide portion of the base member. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that it is formed in a groove shape and the groove width is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guide portion of the base member, and the link guide portion of the base member is guided by the link member. Since the portion is formed in a groove shape to be slidably inserted and the groove width is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member, the link member can be easily maintained at the displacement end in the first section. As a result, it is possible to reliably regulate the displacement of the dividing member in the direction of widening the distance from the adjacent dividing member, and suppress the positional variation of the detected portion in the direction of widening the distance. The detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

In any of the game machines D4 to D6, the split member includes a displacement member displaceably arranged on the main body member, and in the first section, the split member is brought into contact with the main body member of the adjacent split member. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced to a position, and the displacement member is restricted from being displaced in a direction in which the distance between the split member and the adjacent split member is narrowed.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D4 to D6, the dividing member includes a displacement member displaceable on the main body member, and in the first section, the adjacent dividing member Since the displacement member is displaced to the position where it comes into contact with the main body member, and the displacement of the dividing member in the direction of narrowing the distance from the adjacent dividing member is restricted, the detected portion in the direction of narrowing the distance. It is possible to suppress the positional variation of. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

<About the concept of the invention as an example of a structure for adjusting the distance between the divided members DV in the moving member 640>
In a gaming machine provided with a movable member formed so as to be movable, the moving member is formed by having a plurality of divided members and connecting the plurality of divided members along a moving direction, and the moving member is formed. Is a second section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected at a first interval and a second section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected at a second interval which is narrower than the first interval. A game machine E1 characterized in that a section is formed.

Here, a game machine including a moving member formed rotatably is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, a plurality of identification information is displayed on the front surface of the moving member along the circumferential direction, and the identification information arranged at a predetermined position is visually recognized by the player to perform the effect. However, in consideration of the visibility of the player, it is necessary to secure a certain size or more of the identification information. Therefore, if the number of displayed identification information is increased, the diameter of the moving member becomes large, which is necessary for the arrangement. While the space is increased, if the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of identification information displayed is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, the moving member has a first section in which a plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval and a plurality of divided members at an interval narrower than the first interval. Since the second section connected at the second interval is formed, the length of the moving member can be shortened as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed. That is, while securing the number of the dividing members, the space required for arranging the plurality of dividing members can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, when the identification information is displayed on each of the divided members, the space required for arranging the moving members can be suppressed while securing the number of displayed identification information.

In the game machine E1, the split member includes a main body member and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to each of the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member, and the link member is the main body member and The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by being displaced with respect to the main body portion of the adjacent divided member.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the split member includes a main body member and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to each of the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member. In addition, since the link member is displaced with respect to the main body portion of the main body member and the adjacent split member, the distance between the split member and the adjacent split member is increased or decreased, so that the first section and the second section are formed. The structure of can be simplified.

The game machine E2 includes a base member in which the split member is displaceably arranged, and the base member guides the main body guide portion and the link member that guide the main body member when the split member is displaced. The link guide portion acts on the link member and is adjacent to the main body member when the main body member is guided by the main body guide portion of the base member and is displaced. The gaming machine E3 characterized by changing the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member of the dividing member.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the base member includes a main body guide portion for guiding the main body member and a link guide portion for guiding the link member when the split member is displaced, and links. When the main body member is guided by the main body guide portion of the base member and displaced, the guide portion acts on the link member to change the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent split member. The distance between the divided members can be increased or decreased as the posture of the link member changes. That is, the first section and the second section can be formed by increasing or decreasing the distance between the dividing members while moving the moving member.

In the game machine E2 or E3, the dividing member includes a displacement member displaceably arranged on the main body member, and the displacement member has a posture of being tilted toward an adjacent dividing member in the first section. At the same time, the gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the posture in the second section is more upright than the posture in the first section.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2 or E3, the displacement member is in a posture of being tilted toward the adjacent split member in the first section, so that the displacement member is visually recognized by the player. It can be made easier. Therefore, for example, when the identification information is displayed on the displacement member, the visibility of the identification information to the player can be improved. Further, in the first section, since the distance between the dividing members is widened, it is possible to secure a space for the displacement member to tilt, and the displacement member can be increased in size accordingly. Therefore, from this point as well, the visibility of the displacement member, that is, the visibility of the identification information can be improved.

On the other hand, in the second section, the displacement member has an upright posture rather than the posture in the first section, so that the displacement member can be separated from the main body member of the adjacent split member, and the main body members can be separated by that amount. Can be brought closer and their spacing narrowed. That is, the second interval in the second section can be narrowed. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed.

In the game machine E4, the displacement member is displaceably disposed on the upper surface of the main body member, and in the second section, the displacement member is disposed above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent split member. The game machine E5.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, the displacement member is displaceably arranged on the upper surface of the main body member, and in the second section, above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent split member. Since it is arranged, interference with the displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, the main body members can be brought close to each other until they come into contact with each other, and the distance between them can be made narrower. That is, the second interval in the second section can be made narrower. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed.

In the game machine E3, the main body guide portion of the base member is characterized in that its trajectory is formed in a circular shape.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the trajectory of the main body guide portion of the base member is formed in a circular shape, so that the main body member is displaced by being guided by the main body guide portion of the base member. Can be simplified.

In the game machine E3, the trajectory of the dividing member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape connects all the plurality of dividing members in the circumferential direction at the first interval. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that it has the same radius as when it is arranged in a circular shape.

Here, the first section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval and the plurality of dividing members are connected in the circumferential direction at the second interval which is narrower than the first interval. When the second section is formed on the moving member (hereinafter referred to as "the former case"), the moving member is compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval (hereinafter referred to as "the latter"). Since the length in the circumferential direction of the above can be shortened, the space required for arranging the plurality of divided members can be suppressed while securing the number of the divided members. However, when the trajectories of the plurality of dividing members are formed in a circular shape, the radius in the former case is smaller than the radius in the latter case. Therefore, for the player who visually recognizes the dividing member of the first section in the former case, the actual number as the total number of the dividing members forming the moving member based on the number and the radius of the dividing member in the first section. Reminiscent of fewer numbers.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the trajectory of the dividing member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape covers all the plurality of dividing members. Since it is equivalent to the radius when connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval and arranged in a circle, the number of a plurality of dividing members is secured and the space required for arranging the plurality of dividing members is suppressed. At the same time, the player can be reminded of a number corresponding to the actual number as the total number of the divided members forming the moving member.

<Concept of the invention using the drive mechanism 630 as an example>
A moving member formed by connecting a base member on which a guide portion is extended and a plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member, and a driving force are applied to the moving member. The guide portion of the base member is provided with a driving means, and the guide portion of the base member acts on the split member to set the distance between the divided members to the first distance, and the guide portion is more than the first guide portion. The driving means includes a rotary driving member having an engaging portion that can engage with the split member, and the driving means is provided with a second guide portion that sets a gap between the split members in a narrow second gap. A game machine F1 characterized in that a plurality of divided members are displaced along a guide portion of the base member by rotating the member while engaging the engaging portion with the divided member.

Here, a game machine including a moving member formed rotatably is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, a plurality of identification information is displayed on the front surface of the moving member along the circumferential direction, and the identification information arranged at a predetermined position is visually recognized by the player to perform the effect. However, in consideration of the visibility of the player, it is necessary to secure a certain size or more of the identification information. Therefore, if the number of displayed identification information is increased, the diameter of the moving member becomes large, which is necessary for the arrangement. While the space is increased, if the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of identification information displayed is reduced.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application forms a moving member by connecting a plurality of divided members, and the section in which the plurality of divided members are connected to the moving member at the first interval is narrower than the first interval. By forming a section in which a plurality of dividing members are connected at the second interval of the interval, as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval, the number of the dividing members is secured and the plurality of the dividing members are connected. The space required for arranging the dividing members can be suppressed, that is, when the identification information is displayed on each dividing member, the space required for arranging the moving members can be suppressed while securing the number of displayed identification information. I came up with.

However, a moving member to which a plurality of dividing members are connected is connected to a section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected at a first interval and a plurality of dividing members at a second interval narrower than the first interval. There is a problem that it is difficult to displace the moving member with respect to the base member while forming the section to be formed.

On the other hand, in the game machine F1, the guide portion of the base member is narrower than the first guide portion that sets the distance between the divided members to the first distance by acting on the divided member and the first distance. The second guide portion for setting the distance between the divided members is provided at the second interval, and the drive means includes a rotary drive member having an engaging portion that can be engaged with the split member, and the rotary drive member engages with the rotary drive member. By rotating the portions while engaging them with the dividing members, the plurality of dividing members are displaced along the guide portions of the base members, so that the intervals between the dividing members are wide and narrow (the first interval). The moving member can be displaced with respect to the base member while forming the section (the section and the section of the second interval) in the moving member.

In the game machine F1, the game machine F2 is characterized in that a plurality of the engaging portions are formed on the rotation drive member.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, a plurality of engaging portions are formed on the rotation drive member, so that the efficiency of transmitting the driving force from the rotation drive member to the moving member is improved. Can be done.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the moving member is formed by connecting the plurality of divided body members in an endless manner in the circumferential direction, and the driving means includes two rotating driving members, and the rotation of the two. The gaming machine F3, wherein the driving member is arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1 or F2, the rotation drive members 2 are arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member, so that the rotation drive member is imparted to the moving member. The driving force can be distributed to different positions in the circumferential direction of the moving member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members and stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

In the game machine F3, the trajectories of the plurality of dividing members displaced along the guide portion of the base member are circular, and the rotation driving members of the second are 180 degrees out of phase in the circular orbits. A game machine F4 characterized in that it is arranged at a vertical position.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, the trajectories of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member are circular, and the rotational drive members 2 are circular trajectories. Since they are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase with each other, the driving force from the rotary driving member can be applied to the two most separated moving members (plurality of dividing members), and as a result. , The displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

In the game machine F3 or F4, the rotation drive member of the second is the engaging portion of the other rotation drive member while the engagement portion of one rotation drive member is not engaged with the division member. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the engaging portions are arranged in different phases so as to be engaged with the dividing member.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3 or F4, the rotation drive member of 2 is the other while the engaging portion of one rotation drive member is not engaged with the split member. Since the engaging portions of the rotary drive member are arranged so as to be engaged with the split member so that the phases of the engaging portions are different from each other, the engaging portion of one rotary drive member and the other rotary drive member It is possible to prevent the engaging portions from being disengaged from the split members at the same time, and it is possible to prevent the transmission of the driving force from the rotational driving member to the moving member to be intermittent. As a result, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

That is, in the configuration in which a plurality of dividing members are connected in an endless manner as in the present invention, when the driving force is intermittently transmitted from the rotary driving member to the moving member, the dividing member is divided as the driving force is transmitted and released. Since the distance between the members is increased or decreased, the posture of the moving member as a whole becomes unstable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F5, either one of the engaging portion of one rotation driving member and the engaging portion of the other rotation driving member is always engaged with the split member, and the moving member is always driven. Can form a transmitted state, so that the distance between the dividing members can be easily kept constant. As a result, even a moving member formed by connecting a plurality of divided members in an endless manner can stabilize the posture. That is, the displacement can be stabilized.

In any of the game machines F1 to F5, the plurality of dividing members include an engaged portion to which the engaging portion of the rotation driving means is engaged, and the engaged portion is a trajectory of the plurality of divided members. The gaming machine F6, which is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the above.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include an engaged portion to which the engaging portion of the rotation driving means is engaged, and the engaged portion thereof is provided. Since the portions are arranged on the outer peripheral side of the track of the plurality of divided members, the amount of rotation of the moving member (plurality of divided members) with respect to the amount of rotation of the rotation driving member can be reduced. That is, since the reduction ratio can be reduced, the drive torque applied from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be increased accordingly.

In any of the game machines F1 to F6, the rotation driving member is arranged at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the dividing member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions. A game machine F7 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F3 to F6, the rotation drive member is a split member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions, that is, between the split members. Since the engaging portion is arranged at a position where it can be engaged with the split member guided in a state where the interval is widened, interference between the adjacent split member and the rotation drive member can be suppressed, and the rotation drive member can be suppressed accordingly. The diameter of the can be increased. As a result, the drive torque applied from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be increased.

In any of the game machines F3 to F7, the guide portion of the base member acts on the split member displaced along the guide portion, so that the distance between the divided members is set to the first distance or the second. A third guide portion for transitioning from the interval of the above to the second interval or the first interval is provided, and the rotation driving member is attached to the dividing member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions. A game machine F8 characterized in that an engaging portion is arranged at a position where it can be engaged.

According to the game machine F8, in the game machine according to any one of the game machines F1 to F7, the rotation drive member is a split member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions, that is, an adjacent split member. Since the engaging portion is arranged at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member whose distance from the member is changed from the first interval or the second interval to the second interval or the first interval, the guide portion The split member that receives a relatively large reaction force from the (third guide portion) can be directly driven by the rotation drive member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the moving member formed by connecting the plurality of divided members from bending in the middle, and to stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

In any of the game machines F1 to F8, the dividing member is a main body member displaced along the guide portion, one end of which is rotatably connected to the main body member, and the main body member of an adjacent split member. The split member and the other end are provided with a link member whose ends are slidably connected, and one end and the other end of the link member are rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent split member, respectively. The distance between the adjacent split members is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotation drive member is a main body member of the split member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent split member is slidably connected. The gaming machine F9 is also characterized in that one end of the link member is engaged at a position close to a portion rotatably connected.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F8, the dividing member is rotatably connected to the main body member displaced along the guide portion and one end to the main body member. A link member whose other end is slidably connected to the main body member of the adjacent split member is provided, and one end and the other end of the link member are rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent split member, respectively. As a result, the distance between the split member and the adjacent split member is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotation drive member is the main body member of the split member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent split member is slidably connected. Since one end of the link member is engaged at a position closer to the rotatably connected portion than the portion to be connected, when the main body member of the split member is driven by the rotation drive member and displaced along the guide portion, The displacement of the main body member can be easily transmitted to the main body member of the adjacent split member via the link member. As a result, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

The game machine F4 or F5 is characterized in that the game machine F4 or F5 is provided with a drive gear that is arranged concentrically with a circle that is a trajectory of the plurality of divided members and is meshed with each of the rotational drive members.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of the game machine F4 or F5, the two rotation drive members are provided with drive gears that are meshed with each other. Therefore, by rotating the drive gears, the two rotation drive members are synchronized. It can be rotated in the state of being As a result, the rotation of the moving member can be stabilized. In this case, since the drive gear is arranged concentrically with the circle which is the trajectory of the plurality of division members, the drive gear and the rotational drive member 2 are moved members (plurality of division members) in the front view of the base member. It can be arranged inward from the outer circumference of the movement locus of. That is, since the drive gear and the rotary drive member 2 do not protrude outward from the outer shape of the moving member, the size can be reduced accordingly.

A game machine K1 characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine in any one of the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, and F1 to F10. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine K2, characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, and F1 to F10. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, and F1 to F10, the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. The featured game machine K3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a communication state in which one end of a first passage member and a second passage member formed so that a ball can pass is communicated with each other and a separated state in which one ends are separated from each other. ing. (Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171636).
However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that it is difficult to stably throw a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member.
The present technical idea is to solve the above-exemplified problems, and to provide a game machine capable of stabilizing the throwing of a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. The purpose.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a first passage member and a second passage member formed so that the ball can pass through, and at least the first passage member is displaced, whereby the said game machine. A communication state in which one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other so that a ball can be thrown from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is the second. It is possible to form a separated state in which the first passage member and the second passage member are not communicated with each other by being separated from one end of the passage member, and at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member. A connecting member that is displaceably arranged and that communicates between one end of the first passage member and the second passage member in a state of being displaced by being in contact with the first passage member or the other of the second passage member. To be equipped.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1. In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the connecting member is a side wall portion that is arranged so as to face each other with an opening at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member. The one side wall portion is located on the displacement locus of the first passage member, the first passage member is displaced, and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is provided. Is in contact with one side wall of the connecting member, the connecting member is displaced, and the other side wall of the connecting member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.
In the game machine described in the technical idea 2, the first passage member is rotated with one end thereof as the rotation tip side to form the communication state, and the connecting member is the connection member. A rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the first passage member is provided, the first passage member is rotated, and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connection member. Then, the connecting member is rotated so that the other side wall portion of the connecting member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 2, the throwing can be stabilized.
<Sign>
10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board
330 Lifting body (displacement member)
341 drive motor (drive means)
351 1st gear (1st gear, part of transmission member)
351b contact part
352 2nd gear (2nd gear, part of transmission member)
354b receiving part
354c adjacent gear tooth (predetermined tooth)
413 Locking part (support member)
415 Lowering regulation member
417 Rise control member
417c release convex part (release action part)
417g torsion spring ( urging means)
420 Drive side slide member (part of lifting member)
422 Second passage forming member (second passage member, working member)
422b shaft branch (rotating shaft)
422f accommodating recess (part of working member)
424 connecting member
424a Cylindrical part (rotating shaft)
424b Upper side wall (one side wall)
424c lower side wall (other side wall)
430, 3430 Driven side slide member (displacement member)
434a engaging surface (engaging part)
434b Separation action surface (separation action part)
441 drive motor (drive means)
442 drive gear (pinion)
451 Guide rod (guide member)
452 rack (part of lifting member)
453 Contact wall (part of lifting member)
510, 2510 base member (part of case body)
512 shaft support hole (rotary shaft)
515, 2515 Flow passage (downstream passage)
520, 2520 1st passage forming member (1st passage member)
521,521 Sorting base member (sorting member)
521c shaft branch (rotating shaft)
521e Distribution convex part (wall part)
550 cover member (part of case body)
552 Introductory cylinder (upstream passage)
2560 Tip wall member (ball throwing regulation means, cover body)
2562 Torsion spring (urging member)
620 guide member (base member, main body guide part)
621 Connecting link action groove (link guide part, guide part)
621a Large diameter part (1st guide part)
621b small diameter part (second guide part)
621c connection part (third guide part)
630 drive mechanism (drive means)
634 Central transmission member (drive gear)
637 One-sided rotation drive member (rotation drive member)
637b engaging part
638 Other side rotation drive member (rotation drive member)
638b engaging part
640 rotating member (moving member)
DV split member
641 engaged part
641c Detected part (detection means)
642 back side main body (main body member)
643 Front side main body (main body member)
644 connecting link member (link member)
644a insertion part (guided part)
646 display board (displacement member)
684 detection sensor (detection means)
S1 1st section
S2 2nd section

10 Pachinko machine (game machine )
4 22 second passage forming member (second passage member)
4 22f Storage recess ( storage part )
424 connection member
424e torsion spring ( urging means)
5 20, 2520 First passage forming member (first passage member)
2521a2 recessed part (accommodation part)
2522b1 recessed part (accommodation part)
2 562 Torsion spring (urging means)

Claims (3)

The first passage member and the second passage member formed so that the sphere can pass through are provided, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other. A communication state in which a ball can be thrown from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member. In a game machine in which it is possible to form a separated state in which
The first passage member is displaceably arranged at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and is displaced in contact with the other of the first passage member or the second passage member. A gaming machine comprising a connecting member for communicating between one ends of the second passage member and the second passage member. The connecting member includes a one side wall portion and another side wall portion that are arranged so as to face each other with an opening at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and the one side wall portion is the first passage member. When the first passage member is displaced and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connecting member, the connecting member is displaced. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the other side wall portion of the connecting member is displaced and brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member. The communication state is formed by rotating the first passage member with one end thereof as the rotation tip side, and the connecting member includes a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the first passage member, and the first passage member has a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis. When the member is rotated and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connecting member, the connecting member is rotated and the other side wall portion of the connecting member is moved. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the game machine is brought close to the first passage member or the other end of the second passage member.

Images